# Juniper Networks Glossary

Symbols Numerics A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Z

### Symbols

(S, G)

Source (S) of the multicast packet and the destination multicast group address (G).

### Numerics

1X

First phase of third-generation (3G) mobile wireless technology for CDMA2000 networks.

1XEV

Evolutionary phase of third-generation (3G) CDMA2000 networks, divided into two phases: 1XEV-DO (data only) and 1XEV-DV (data and voice).

3DES

Triple Data Encryption Standard. A 168-bit encryption algorithm that encrypts data blocks with three different keys in succession, achieving a higher level of encryption than standard DES. Data is encrypted with the first key, decrypted with the second key, and encrypted again with the third key. 3DES is often implemented with cipher block chaining (CBC). 3DES is one of the strongest encryption algorithms available for use in virtual private networks (VPNs). Also called Triple DES.

3G Wireless

Third generation of wireless developments, in particular mobile phone standards and technology.

3GPP

Third-Generation Partnership Project. Created to expedite the development of open, globally accepted technical specifications for the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).

802.1ad

IEEE specification for “Q-in-Q” encapsulation and bridging of Ethernet frames.

802.1ah

IEEE specification for media access control (MAC) address tunneling encapsulation and bridging of Ethernet frames across a Provider Backbone Bridge (PBB).

802.1p

IEEE specification for enabling Layer 2 switches to prioritize traffic and perform dynamic multicast filtering.

802.1Q

IEEE specification for adding virtual local area network (VLAN) tags to an Ethernet frame.

802.1X

IEEE specification defining a mechanism that allows a supplicant (client) to connect to a wireless access point or wired switch (authenticator) so that the supplicant can provide authentication credentials that can be verified by an authentication server.

802.3ad

IEEE specification that enables grouping of Ethernet interfaces at the physical layer to form a single link layer interface. Also known as a link aggregation group (LAG) or LAG bundle.

802.3ah

IEEE specification defining Ethernet between the subscriber and the immediate service provider. Also known as Ethernet in the first or last mile.

### A

AAA

authentication, authorization, and accounting. Process framework used to standardize the control of access to computer resources, enforcement of policies, audit of usage, and ability to report. Authentication determines who the user is and whether to grant that user access to the network. Authorization determines what the user can do by giving you the ability to limit network services to different users. Accounting tracks the user’s activities and provides an audit trail that can be used for billing for connection time or resources used. See also redirected authentication.

AAA profile

Set of characteristics or commands that you can assign to domain names to control access for an incoming Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) subscriber. You can create an AAA profile and map it between a PPP client’s domain name and certain AAA services on given interfaces and control such things as domain name access to AAA authentication, use of domain name aliases, and other features. If no AAA profile is used, AAA continues as normal. The user’s name and domain name are not changed as a result of an AAA profile mapping.

AAL

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Adaptation Layer. A collection of protocols that defines the conversion of user information into cells by segmenting upper-layer information into cells at the transmitter and reassembling them at the receiver. These protocols enable various types of traffic, including voice, data, image, and video, to run over an ATM network.

AAL5 mode

ATM Adaptation Layer 5. One of four AALs recommended by the International Telecommunication Union—Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T), AAL5 is used predominantly for the transfer of classical IP over ATM, and is the least complex of the current AAL recommendations. It offers low bandwidth overhead and simpler processing requirements in exchange for reduced bandwidth capacity and error recovery capability. It is a Layer 2 circuit transport mode that allows you to send ATM cells between ATM2 IQ interfaces across a Layer 2 circuit-enabled network. You use Layer 2 circuit AAL5 transport mode to tunnel a stream of AAL5-encoded ATM segmentation and reassembly protocol data units (SAR-PDUs) over an MPLS or IP backbone. See also cell-relay mode, Layer 2 circuits, standard AAL5 mode, trunk mode.

ABR

- area border router. Router that belongs to more than one area, with interfaces in the OSPF boundary between two or more areas. Both sides of any link always belong to the same OSPF area. See also OSPF.
- available bit rate. Rate used in ATM for traffic sources that demand low loss ratios but can accept larger delays. ABR uses bandwidth not used by constant bit rate (CBR) and variable bit rate (VBR). ABR uses best effort to send the maximum number of cells but does not guarantee cell delivery. See also CBR, VBR.

absolute URL

URL that points to the exact location of a file or directory on the Internet, by name. See also relative URL.

AC

access concentrator. Device that receives and forwards data for a network point of presence (POP). It often acts as a server that supports multiple T1 or E1 lines over one port, for example, a Juniper Networks E Series Broadband Services Router that acts as a server in a Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) session.

access challenge

Authentication method used to prove the identity of a user logging in to the network. When a user logs in, the network access server, wireless access point, or authentication server creates a "challenge," typically a random number sent to the client machine. The client software uses its password or a secret key to encrypt the challenge, using an encryption algorithm or a one-way hash function and sends the result back to the network (the "response"). The authentication system also performs the same cryptographic process on the challenge and compares its result to the response from the client. If they match, the authentication system has verified that the user has the correct password.

access concentrator

AC. Device that receives and forwards data for a network point of presence (POP). It often acts as a server that supports multiple T1 or E1 lines over one port, for example, a Juniper Networks E Series Broadband Services Router that acts as a server in a Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) session.

access lists

Sequential collection of permit and deny conditions used to filter inbound or outbound routes. Files that provide filters that can be applied to route maps or distribution lists. They enable policies to be created, such as a policy to prevent forwarding of specified routes between the BGP-4 and IS-IS routing tables.

access messages

Authorization and authentication (AA) messages that identify subscribers before the RADIUS server grants or denies them access to the network or network services. When an application requests user authentication, the request must have certain authenticating attributes, such as a user’s name, password, and the particular type of service the user is requesting. This information is sent in the authentication request, using the RADIUS protocol, to the RADIUS server. In response, the RADIUS server grants or denies the request. See also accounting messages.

Access Node Control Protocol

ANCP. Based on a subset of the General Switch Management Protocol (GSMP) in which IGMP is no longer terminated or proxied at the access node. Instead, IGMP passes through the access node transparently. Also known as Layer 2 control (L2C).

access point

AP. Device that serves as a communication hub to connect 802.1X wireless clients to a wired network.

access point name

APN. An element in the header of a GPRS tunneling protocol (GTP) packet that provides information about how to reach a network. It is composed of two elements: a network ID and an operator ID. When mobile stations connect to IP networks over a wireless network, the GGSN uses the APN to distinguish among the connected IP networks (known as APN networks). In addition to identifying these connected networks, an APN is also a configured entity that hosts the wireless sessions, which are called Packet Data Protocol (PDP) contexts.

ACCM

asynchronous control character map. A 32-bit mask that represents control characters with ASCII values 0 through 31. It is an option negotiated by the Link Control Protocol (LCP) and used on asynchronous links such as telephone lines to identify control characters that must be escaped (replaced by a specific two-character sequence) to avoid being interpreted by equipment used to establish the link. See also APN.

accounting messages

Messages that identify service provisions and use on a per-user basis. They keep track of when a particular service is initiated and terminated for a specific user. RADIUS attributes are used by each group of accounting messages. See also access messages.

accounting, accounting services

In RADIUS, the process and method of tracking what the user did and when he did it. Accounting is used for collecting network data related to resource usage, as for an audit trail or for billing for connection time or resources used. See also broadcast accounting server, duplicate accounting server.

ACFC

Address and Control Field Compression. Compression method that enables routers to transmit packets without the two 1-byte address and control fields (0xff and 0x03) normal for PPP-encapsulated packets, thus transmitting less data and conserving bandwidth. ACFC is defined in RFC 1661, The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). See also PFC.

Activate Device wizard

Feature in the Juniper Networks Network and Security Manager (NSM) user interface that guides you through activating a modeled device.

active constituent

Constituent that is monitored or controlled by the shared shaper mechanism. See also constituent, inactive constituent.

active route

Route chosen from all routes in the routing table to reach a destination. Active routes are installed into the forwarding table.

active state

State of a switch route processor (SRP) module whereby data that was synchronized from the active SRP module to the standby SRP module during initialization remains synchronized through mirroring updates. See also SRP.

adaptive services

Set of services or applications that you can configure on an Adaptive Services PIC (AS PIC), including stateful firewall, Network Address Translation (NAT), intrusion detection service (IDS), Internet Protocol Security (IPsec), Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP), and voice services. See also tunneling protocol.

Adaptive Services Module

ASM. On a Juniper Networks M7i Multiservice Edge Router, provides the same functionality as the AS PIC.

Add Device wizard

Feature in the NSM user interface that guides you through importing or modeling a new device.

add/drop multiplexer

ADM. SONET functionality that allows lower-level signals to be dropped from a high-speed optical connection.

Address and Control Field Compression

ACFC. Compression method that enables routers to transmit packets without the two 1-byte address and control fields (0xff and 0x03) normal for PPP-encapsulated packets, thus transmitting less data and conserving bandwidth. ACFC is defined in RFC 1661, The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). See also PFC.

address family identifier

AFI. Number assigned by IANA used to identify the protocol associated with an address family. In an MP-BGP update message, AFI is used with SAFI to identify the network layer protocol associated with the network address of the next hop and the semantics of the NLRI that follows. See also SAFI.

address match conditions

Use of an IP address as a match criterion in a routing policy or a firewall filter.

address object

Represents a component such as a workstation, router, switch, subnetwork, or any other object connected to the network. Use address book objects to specify the network components you want to protect.

address pool

In a NAT context, a group of IP addresses from which a NAT router obtains an address when dynamically creating a new translation.

Address Resolution Protocol

ARP. Protocol for mapping IPv4 addresses to media access control (MAC) addresses; dynamically binds the IP address (the logical address) to the correct MAC address. See also NDP.

address scope

Value used in some unicast and multicast IPv6 addresses that identifies the application suitable for the address. See also scope.

address shifting

Mechanism for creating a one-to-one mapping between any original address in one range of addresses and a specific translated address in a different range.

address spoofing

Technique for creating packets with a source IP address that is not the actual interface address. Attackers can use a spoofed IP address to perform DoS attacks while disguising their true address, or to take advantage of a trusted relationship between two hosts.

adjacency

Relationship between a pair of selected neighboring routers for exchanging routing information. Not every pair of neighboring routers is adjacent. A given router can have multiple adjacencies, but each adjacency consists of only two routers connected by one media segment. Packets that go between them do not have to pass through any other network devices. See also neighbor.

Adjacency-RIB-In

Logical software table that contains BGP routing information bases received from a specific neighbor.

Adjacency-RIB-Out

Logical software table that contains BGP routing information bases to be sent to a specific neighbor.

ADM

add/drop multiplexer. SONET functionality that allows lower-level signals to be dropped from a high-speed optical connection.

administrative distance

Integer (in the range 0–255) that is associated with each route known to a router. The distance represents how reliable the source of the route is considered to be. A lower value is preferred over a higher value. An administrative distance of 255 indicates no confidence in the source; routes with this distance are not installed in the routing table.

admission control

Accounting mechanism that tracks resource information on a router-wide basis. Prevents requests from being accepted when sufficient resources are not available. Admission control determines whether a setup request can be honored for an MPLS LSP with traffic parameters.

ADSL

asymmetrical digital subscriber line. Technology that allows data to be sent over existing copper telephone lines, using the public switched telephone network (PSTN). ADSL supports data rates from 1.5 to 9 Mbps when receiving data (downstream rate) and from 16 to 640 Kbps when sending data (upstream rate).

ADSL Annex A PIM

Juniper Networks Physical Interface Module (PIM) that supports Annex A, the portion of ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 that defines how ADSL works over twisted-pair copper (POTS) lines. See ITU-T Rec. G.992.1, ADSL interface.

ADSL Annex B PIM

Juniper Networks Physical Interface Module (PIM) that supports Annex B, the portion of ITU-T Rec. G.992.1 that defines how ADSL works over ISDN lines. See ITU-T Rec. G.992.1, ADSL interface.

ADSL interface

asymmetrical digital subscriber line interface. Physical WAN interface that connects a router to a digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM). The ADSL interface allocates line bandwidth asymmetrically. Downstream (provider-to-customer) data rates can be up to 8 Mbps for ADSL, 12 Mbps for ADSL2, and 25 Mbps for ADSL2+. Upstream (customer-to-provider) rates can be up to 800 Kbps for ADSL and 1 Mbps for ADSL2 and ADSL2+, depending on the implementation.

ADSL2 interface

ADSL interface that supports ITU-T Standard G.992.3 and ITU-T Standard G.992.4. The ADSL2 interface allocates downstream (provider-to-customer) data rates of up to 12 Mbps and upstream (customer-to-provider) rates of up to 1 Mbps.

ADSL2+ interface

ADSL interface that supports ITU-T Standard G.992.5 and allocates downstream (provider-to-customer) data rates of up to 25 Mbps and upstream (customer-to-provider) rates of up to 1 Mbps.

Advanced Encryption Standard

AES. Defined in Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) PUB 197, the AES algorithm uses keys of 128, 192, or 256 bits to encrypt and decrypt data in blocks of 128 bits. Use AES in your VPNs when you need greater interoperability with other network security devices.

advertisement

Method used by a router to transmit basic information about itself, including IP address, network mask, and other data, to other devices on the network.

AES

Advanced Encryption Standard. Defined in Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) PUB 197. The AES algorithm uses keys of 128, 192, or 256 bits to encrypt and decrypt data in blocks of 128 bits. Use AES in your VPNs when you need greater interoperability with other network security devices.

AF

assured forwarding. A DiffServ component that determines the degree of reliability given a packet within the DiffServ domain. AF values are set as part of per-hop behavior (PHB) groups. See also PHB.

AFI

- authority and format identifier. Number that identifies the format and type of address being used.

- address family identifier. Number assigned by IANA used to identify the protocol associated with an address family. In an MP-BGP update message, AFI is used with SAFI to identify the network layer protocol associated with the network address of the next hop and the semantics of the NLRI that follows. See also SAFI.

AFR

assured flow rate. A Media Flow Controller option that, when enabled, ensures that video or other media content is delivered at a rate that is minimally needed for the media to play smoothly.

agent

SNMP agent. A managed device, such as a router, that collects and stores management information. The SNMP agent (SNMPv3) recognizes up to 32 usernames that can have one of the following security levels: no authentication and no privacy, authentication only, authentication and privacy.

aggregate route

Single entry in a routing table that represents a combination of groups of routes that have common addresses.

aggregate state

State of a router when it is one of multiple virtual BGP routing instances bundled into one address.

aggregated interface

Logical bundle of physical interfaces managed as a single interface with one IP address. Network traffic is dynamically distributed across ports, so administration of data flowing across a given port is done automatically within the aggregated link. Using multiple ports in parallel provides redundancy and increases the link speed beyond the limits of any single port.

aggregation

Process of accumulating data or logical interfaces into a single, larger bundle (for example, higher-speed connections). The process of combining several different routes in such a way that only a single route advertises itself. This technique minimizes the size of the routing table for the router.

aggregator

Object used to bundle multiple routes under one common route generalized according to the value of the network mask.

aggressive aging

Mechanism to accelerate the timeout process when the number of sessions in the session table exceeds a specified high-watermark threshold. When the number of sessions in the table goes below a specified low-watermark threshold, the timeout process returns to normal.

aggressive mode

Internet Key Exchange (IKE) phase 1 negotiation mode that is faster than main mode because fewer messages are exchanged between peers and it enables support for fully qualified domain names when the router uses preshared keys. However, aggressive mode is less secure than main mode because it exposes identities of the peers to eavesdropping.See also main mode.

AH

authentication header. Component of the IPsec protocol used to verify that the data integrity of a packet has not changed, and to validate the identity of the sender. See also ESP.

AIS

alarm indication signal. Signal transmitted instead of the normal signal to maintain transmission continuity and to indicate to the receiving equipment that a transmission interruption (fault) has occurred either at the equipment originating the AIS signal or upstream of that equipment.

AIS cell

alarm indication signal cell. Type of ATM cell used to indicate a fault to the downstream endpoint.

alarm

Signal alerting you to conditions that might prevent normal operation. On the front of the chassis, the alarm signal is the yellow ALARM LED (when lit).

alarm condition

Failure event that triggers an alarm.

alarm indication signal

AIS. Signal transmitted instead of the normal signal to maintain transmission continuity and to indicate to the receiving equipment that a transmission interruption (fault) has occurred either at the equipment originating the AIS signal or upstream of that equipment.

alarm severity

Seriousness of an alarm. The level of severity of an alarm can be either major (red) or minor (yellow).

ALG

application layer gateway, application-level gateway. Security component in a firewall or Network Address Translation (NAT) used to enable certain legitimate applications to pass through a firewall or between NAT realms without being stopped by security checks. It intercepts and analyzes the specified traffic, allocates resources, and defines dynamic policies to permit the traffic to pass securely through the security device.

ALI

ATM line interface. Interface between ATM and 3G systems. See also ATM.

alternate priority queuing

APQ. Dequeuing method that has a special queue, similar to strict-priority queuing (SPQ), which is visited only 50 percent of the time. The packets in the special queue still have a predictable latency, although the upper limit of the delay is higher than that with SPQ. Because the other configured queues share the remaining 50 percent of the service time, queue starvation is usually avoided. See also SPQ.

American National Standards Institute

ANSI. Private organization that coordinates the development and use of voluntary consensus standards in the United States and is the United States’ representative to the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). See also ISO.

American Standard Code for Information Interchange

ASCII. A code for representing English characters as numbers, with each letter assigned a number in the range 0–127.

AMT

Automatic Multicast Tunneling. Protocol that provides dynamic multicast connectivity between multicast-enabled networks across islands of unicast-only networks. AMT is described in detail in draft-ietf-mboned-auto-multicast-10.txt: See also Automatic IP Multicast Without Explicit Tunnels.

analyzer device

Device that receives mirrored traffic from E Series routers during packet mirroring. Also called the mediation device.

analyzer port

IP interface in analyzer mode on E Series routers used to direct mirrored traffic to the analyzer device during packet mirroring.

ANCP

Access Node Control Protocol. Based on a subset of the General Switch Management Protocol (GSMP) in which IGMP is no longer terminated or proxied at the access node. Instead, IGMP passes through the access node transparently. Also known as Layer 2 control (L2C).

Annex M

TU-DMT-BIS Standard G.992.3 and ADSL2PLUS Standard G.992.5 that extends the capability of basic ADSL2 by doubling the number of upstream bits.

ANSI

American National Standards Institute. Private organization that coordinates the development and use of voluntary consensus standards in the United States and is the United States’ representative to the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). See also ISO.

antispam

Any software, hardware, or process used to combat the proliferation of unsolicited bulk e-mail (spam) or to keep spam from entering a system.

antivirus

Software used to detect, delete, or neutralize computer-based viruses or other malware.

antivirus scanning

Method for detecting and blocking viruses in File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP)—including HTTP webmail—and Post Office Protocol version 3 (POP3) traffic. Juniper Networks offers an internal antivirus scanning solution.

any-source multicast

ASM. Method of allowing a multicast receiver to listen to all traffic sent to a multicast group, regardless of its source.

anycast address

Type of address in IPv6 used to send a packet to one recipient out of a set of recipients or interfaces on different nodes. An anycast transmission sends packets to only one of the interfaces associated with the address, not to all of them; typically to the closest interface, as defined by the routing protocol.

AP

access point. Device that serves as a communication hub to connect 802.1X wireless clients to a wired network.

API

application programming interface. A set of routines, protocols, and tools for building software applications.

APN

access point name. An element in the header of a GPRS tunneling protocol (GTP) packet that provides information about how to reach a network. It is composed of two elements: a network ID and an operator ID. When mobile stations connect to IP networks over a wireless network, the GGSN uses the APN to distinguish among the connected IP networks (known as APN networks). In addition to identifying these connected networks, an APN is also a configured entity that hosts the wireless sessions, which are called Packet Data Protocol (PDP) contexts.

application layer

- Seventh and highest level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design that manages communication between application processes. This layer is the main interface for users to interact with application programs such as electronic mail, database managers, and file-server software. See also OSI.
- Fifth and highest level in the five-layer TCP/IP stack. This layer is used by most programs for network communication. Data is passed from the program in an application-specific format, then encapsulated into a transport layer protocol.

application layer gateway, application-level gateway

ALG. Security component in a firewall or Network Address Translation (NAT) used to enable certain legitimate applications to pass through a firewall or between NAT realms without being stopped by security checks. It intercepts and analyzes the specified traffic, allocates resources, and defines dynamic policies to permit the traffic to pass securely through the security device.

application programming interface

API. A set of routines, protocols, and tools for building software applications.

application-specific integrated circuit

ASIC. Specialized processor that performs specific functions on the router.

AppSecure

A suite of next-generation security capabilities for Juniper Networks SRX Series Services Gateways that utilize advanced application identification and classification to deliver greater visibility, enforcement, control, and protection over the network.

APQ

alternate priority queuing. Dequeuing method that has a special queue, similar to strict-priority queuing (SPQ), which is visited only 50 percent of the time. The packets in the special queue still have a predictable latency, although the upper limit of the delay is higher than that with SPQ. Since the other configured queues share the remaining 50 percent of the service time, queue starvation is usually avoided. See also SPQ.

APS

Automatic Protection Switching. Technology used by SONET ADMs to protect against circuit faults between the ADM and a router and to protect against failing routers. See also ADM.

area

Routing subdomain that maintains detailed routing information about its own internal composition as well as routing information that allows it to reach other routing subdomains.

- An OSPF area divides the internetwork into smaller, more manageable constituent pieces, reducing the amount of information each router must store and maintain about all other routers. When a router in the area needs information about another device in or out of the area, it contacts a special router that stores this information, called the Area Border Router (ABR).
- In IS-IS, an area corresponds to a Level 1 subdomain.
- In IS-IS and OSPF, a set of contiguous networks and hosts within an autonomous system that have been administratively grouped together.

area border router

ABR. Router that belongs to more than one area, with interfaces in the OSPF boundary between two or more areas. Both sides of any link always belong to the same OSPF area. See also OSPF.

area range

Sequence of IP addresses defined by a lower limit and an upper limit, indicating a series of addresses of devices existing within an area.

ARP

Address Resolution Protocol. Protocol for mapping IPv4 addresses to media access control (MAC) addresses; dynamically binds the IP address (the logical address) to the correct MAC address. See also NDP.

AS

autonomous system. Set of routers that use the same routing policy while running under a single technical administration (a routing domain). An AS runs interior gateway protocols (IGPs) such as RIP, OSPF, and IS-IS within its boundaries. ASs use exterior gateway protocols (EGPs) to exchange routing information with other ASs. Assigned a globally unique autonomous system number. See alsoAS number.

AS external link advertisement

OSPF link-state advertisement sent by AS boundary routers to describe external routes that they have detected. These link-state advertisements are flooded throughout the AS (except for stub areas).

AS number

autonomous system number. A globally unique number assigned by the IANA that is used to identify an autonomous system (AS). The AS number enables an AS to exchange exterior routing information with neighboring ASs.

AS path

autonomous system path. In BGP, the route to a destination. It consists of the AS numbers of all routers that a packet must go through to reach a destination.

AS path access list

Access list used by a BGP routing instance to permit or deny packets sent by neighbor routing instances to the current virtual routing instance.

AS path attribute class

One of four classes of BGP path attributes: Well-Known Mandatory, Well-Known Discretionary, Optional Transitive, and Optional Non-Transitive.

AS path string

An identifier for an AS path, it is configured alongside an AS path access list ID.

AS PIC

Adaptive Services Physical Interface Card. The physical card on which you can configure a set of adaptive services or applications, including stateful firewall, Network Address Translation (NAT), intrusion detection service (IDS), Internet Protocol Security (IPsec), Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol (L2TP), and voice services.

ASBR

autonomous system boundary router. In OSPF, a router that exchanges routing information with routers in other ASs. The ASBR redistributes routing information received from other ASs throughout its own AS.

ASBR Summary LSA

OSPF link-state advertisement (LSA) sent by an area border router (ABR) to advertise the router ID of an autonomous system boundary router (ASBR) across an area boundary. See also ASBR.

ASCII

American Standard Code for Information Interchange. A code for representing English characters as numbers, with each letter assigned a number in the range 0–127.

ASIC

application-specific integrated circuit. Specialized processor that performs specific functions on the router.

ASM

- Adaptive Services Module. On a Juniper Networks M7i Multiservice Edge Router, provides the same functionality as the AS PIC.
- any-source multicast. Method of allowing a multicast receiver to listen to all traffic sent to a multicast group, regardless of its source.

assured flow rate

AFR. A Media Flow Controller option that, when enabled, ensures that video or other media content is delivered at a rate that is minimally needed for the media to play smoothly.

assured forwarding

AF. A DiffServ component that determines the degree of reliability given a packet within the DiffServ domain. AF values are set as part of per-hop behavior (PHB) groups. See also PHB.

assured rate

Quality of Service rate at which bandwidth is guaranteed until oversubscribed.

asymmetrical digital subscriber line

ADSL. Physical WAN interface that connects a router to a digital subscriber line access multiplexer (DSLAM). The ADSL interface allocates line bandwidth asymmetrically. Downstream (provider-to-customer) data rates can be up to 8 Mbps for ADSL, 12 Mbps for ADSL2, and 25 Mbps for ADSL2+. Upstream (customer-to-provider) rates can be up to 800 Kbps for ADSL and 1 Mbps for ADSL2 and ADSL2+, depending on the implementation.

asynchronous control character map

ACCM. A 32-bit mask that represents control characters with ASCII values 0 through 31. It is an option negotiated by the Link Control Protocol (LCP) and used on asynchronous links such as telephone lines to identify control characters that must be escaped (replaced by a specific two-character sequence) to avoid being interpreted by equipment used to establish the link. See also APN.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode

ATM. A high-speed multiplexing and switching method utilizing fixed-length cells of 53 octets to support multiple types of traffic.

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Adaptation Layer

AAL. A collection of protocols that defines the conversion of user information into cells by segmenting upper-layer information into cells at the transmitter and reassembling them at the receiver. These protocols enable various types of traffic, including voice, data, image, and video, to run over an ATM network.

AT commands

Instructions for controlling modems, originally developed by Hayes, Inc. for their modems and sometimes called Hayes commands. Each command line begins with AT (an abbreviation of ATtention), signaling that it is a modem command. This command structure is a de facto industry standard for modems, with specific commands varying by manufacturer.

ATM

Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing and switching method utilizing fixed-length cells of 53 octets to support multiple types of traffic.

ATM Adaptation Layer

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Adaptation Layer or AAL. A collection of protocols that defines the conversion of user information into cells by segmenting upper-layer information into cells at the transmitter and reassembling them at the receiver. These protocols enable various types of traffic, including voice, data, image, and video, to run over an ATM network.

ATM Adaptation Layer 5

AAL5 mode. One of four AALs recommended by the International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector (ITU-T), AAL5 is used predominantly for the transfer of classical IP over ATM, and is the least complex of the current AAL recommendations. It offers low bandwidth overhead and simpler processing requirements in exchange for reduced bandwidth capacity and error recovery capability. It is a Layer 2 circuit transport mode that allows you to send ATM cells between ATM2 IQ interfaces across a Layer 2 circuit-enabled network. You use Layer 2 circuit AAL5 transport mode to tunnel a stream of AAL5-encoded ATM segmentation and reassembly protocol data units (SAR-PDUs) over an MPLS or IP backbone. See also cell-relay mode, Layer 2 circuits, standard AAL5 mode, trunk mode.

ATM cell

Package of information that is always 53 octets long, unlike a frame or packet, which has a variable length.

ATM line interface

ALI. Interface between ATM and 3G systems.

ATM subinterface

Mechanism that enables a single physical ATM interface to support multiple logical interfaces.

ATM-over-ADSL interface

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) interface used to send network traffic through a point-to-point connection to a DSL access multiplexer (DSLAM). ATM-over-ADSL interfaces are intended for asymmetrical digital subscriber line (ADSL) connections only, not for direct ATM connections.

atomic

Smallest possible operation; an atomic operation is performed either entirely or not at all. For example, if machine failure prevents a transaction from finishing, the system is rolled back to the start of the transaction, with no changes taking place.

atomic aggregate

Object used by a BGP router to inform other BGP routers that the local system selected a generalized route.

atomic configuration

Fail-safe feature for devices running Juniper Networks ScreenOS Software. If the configuration deployment fails for any reason, the device automatically uses the last installed stable configuration. If the configuration deployment succeeds, but the device loses connectivity to the management system, the device rolls back to the last installed configuration. This minimizes downtime and ensures that NSM always maintains a stable connection to the managed device.

attack

An attempt to exploit vulnerabilities in computer hardware and software. Depending on the severity, the attack might completely disable your system, allow access to confidential information, or use your network to attack other networks. See also severity.

attack objects

Object that contains patterns of known attacks that can be used to compromise a network. Use attack objects in your firewall rules to enable security devices to detect known attacks and prevent malicious traffic from entering your network.

attenuation

Decrease in signal magnitude between two points, which can be along a radio path or a transmission line or between two devices.

attribute-value pair

AVP. A RADIUS attribute value carried in a RADIUS protocol message. The pair is a combination of a unique attribute—represented by an integer—and a value containing the actual value identified by the attribute.

AUC

authentication center. Part of the home location register (HLR) in third-generation (3G) systems; performs computations to verify and authenticate a mobile phone user.

audit log target

Security device to which an audit log entry sent a directive.

audit log viewer

Module of the NSM user interface that displays records of administrative actions. Each audit log includes the date and time the administrative action occurred, the NSM administrator who performed the action, and the domain (global or a subdomain) in which the action occurred.

authentication

- In RADIUS, the process of determining who the user is, then determining whether to grant that user access to the network. The primary purpose is to bar intruders from networks. RADIUS authentication uses a database of users and passwords.
- Process that verifies that data is not altered during transmission and ensures that users are communicating with the individual or organization that they believe they are communicating with. See also IPsec.
- Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) term related to the user-based security model (USM). Authentication provides the following benefits:
  - Only authorized parties can communicate with each other. Consequently, a management station can interact with a device only if the administrator configured the device to allow the interaction.
  - Messages are received promptly; users cannot save messages and replay them to alter content. This prevents users from sabotaging SNMP configurations and operations. For example, users can change configurations of network devices only if authorized to do so.

authentication center

AUC. Part of the home location register (HLR) in third-generation (3G) systems; performs computations to verify and authenticate a mobile phone user.

authentication header

AH. Component of the IPsec protocol used to verify that the data integrity of a packet has not changed, and to validate the identity of the sender. See also ESP.

authentication retry

Feature of SSH that limits the number of times a user can try to correct incorrect information—such as a bad password—in a given connection attempt.

authentication server objects

Used to set a default authentication server for the global domain and each subdomain, or access an external RADIUS or SecurID system to provide authentication for NSM administrators and remote access server (RAS) users on your network.

authentication, authorization, and accounting

AAA. Process framework used to standardize the control of access to computer resources, enforcement of policies, audit of usage, and ability to report. Authentication determines who the user is and whether to grant that user access to the network. Authorization determines what the user can do by giving you the ability to limit network services to different users. Accounting tracks the user’s activities and provides an audit trail that can be used for billing for connection time or resources used. See also redirected authentication.

authority and format identifier

AFI. Number that identifies the format and type of address being used.

authorization

In RADIUS, the process of determining what the user can do by giving a network administrator the ability to limit network services to different users.

auto-RP

Method of electing and announcing the rendezvous point-to-group address mapping in a multicast network. Junos OS supports this vendor-proprietary specification. See also RP.

autodetection

Process that determines the layers of each dynamic interface. Occurs when the router conditionally constructs interface layers based on the encapsulation type of the incoming packet. Also called autosensing.

autoinstallation

Automatic configuration of a device over the network from a preexisting configuration file created and stored on a configuration server—typically a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) server. Autoinstallation occurs on a device that is powered on without a valid configuration (boot) file or that is configured specifically for autoinstallation. Autoinstallation is useful for deploying multiple devices on a network.

automatic commit mode

Feature of Juniper Networks JunosE Software in which the system automatically saves any change to the system configuration to nonvolatile storage (NVS), without affecting the command-line interface (CLI) prompt.

Automatic Multicast Tunneling

AMT. Protocol that provides dynamic multicast connectivity between multicast-enabled networks across islands of unicast-only networks. AMT is described in detail in Internet draft draft-ietf-mboned-auto-multicast-10.txt, Automatic IP Multicast Without Explicit Tunnels (AMT).

automatic policing

Policer that allows you to provide strict service guarantees for network traffic. Such guarantees are especially useful in the context of differentiated services for traffic engineered LSPs, providing better emulation for ATM wires over an MPLS network.

Automatic Protection Switching

APS. Technology used by SONET ADMs to protect against circuit faults between the ADM and a router and to protect against failing routers. See also ADM.

autonegotiation

Used by Ethernet devices to configure interfaces automatically. If interfaces support different speeds or different link modes (half duplex or full duplex), the devices attempt to settle on the lowest common denominator.

autonomous system

AS. Set of routers that use the same routing policy while running under a single technical administration (a routing domain). An AS runs interior gateway protocols (IGPs) such as RIP, OSPF, and IS-IS within its boundaries. ASs use exterior gateway protocols (EGPs) to exchange routing information with other ASs. Assigned a globally unique autonomous system number. See AS number.

autonomous system boundary router

ASBR. In OSPF, a router that exchanges routing information with routers in other ASs. The ASBR redistributes routing information received from other ASs throughout its own AS.

autonomous system external link advertisement

OSPF link-state advertisement sent by autonomous system boundary routers to describe external routes that they have detected. These link-state advertisements are flooded throughout the autonomous system (except for stub areas).

autonomous system path

In BGP, the route to a destination. The path consists of the autonomous system numbers of all the routers a packet must pass through to reach a destination.

available bit rate

ABR. Rate used in ATM for traffic sources that demand low loss ratios but can accept larger delays. ABR uses bandwidth not used by constant bit rate (CBR) and variable bit rate (VBR). ABR uses best effort to send the maximum number of cells but does not guarantee cell delivery. See also CBR, VBR.

AVP

attribute value pair. A RADIUS attribute value carried in a RADIUS protocol message. The pair is a combination of a unique attribute—represented by an integer—and a value containing the actual value identified by the attribute.

### B

B-channel

bearer channel. A 64-Kbps channel used for voice or data transfer on an ISDN interface. See also D-channel.

B-MAC

Backbone source and destination MAC address fields found in the IEEE 802.1ah provider MAC encapsulation header.

B-RAS

broadband remote access server. Application responsible for aggregating the output from digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAMs), providing user PPP sessions and PPP session termination, enforcing QoS policies, and routing traffic into an ISP’s backbone network.

B-TAG

Field defined in the IEEE 802.1ah provider MAC encapsulation header that carries the backbone VLAN identifier information. The format of the B-TAG field is the same as that of the IEEE 802.1ad S-TAG field. See also S-TAG.

B-VID

Specific VLAN identifier carried in a B-TAG.

BA classifier

behavior aggregate classifier. Method of classification that operates on a packet as it enters the router. The packet header contents are examined, and this single field determines the class-of-service (CoS) settings applied to the packet. See also multifield classifier.

backbone area

In OSPF, an area that consists of all networks in area ID 0.0.0.0, their attached routers, and all area border routers.

backbone network

Central network; a network that connects other networks together.

backbone router

OSPF router with all operational interfaces within area 0.0.0.0.

backdoor

A mechanism installed on a host computer that facilitates unauthorized access to the system. Attackers who have already compromised a system can install a backdoor to make future attacks easier.

backdoor link

Private link between two routers. OSPF backdoor links typically serve as backup paths, providing a way for traffic to flow from one VPN site to the other only if the path over the backbone is broken. However, when the OSPF backdoor link connects two sites that are in the same OSPF area, the undesired result is that the path over the OSPF backdoor link is always preferred over the path over the backbone.

backplane

Hardware component that physically separates front and rear cavities inside the chassis, distributes power from the power supplies, and transfers packets and signals between router components that plug into it. See also redundancy midplane, midplane.

backup designated router

OSPF router on a broadcast segment that monitors the operation of the designated router (DR) and takes over its functions if the designated router fails.

backup router

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol (VRRP) router available to take forwarding responsibility if the current master router fails. See also master router.

backward explicit congestion notification

BECN. In a Frame Relay network, a header bit transmitted by the destination device requesting that the source device send data more slowly. BECN minimizes the possibility that packets will be discarded when more packets arrive than can be handled. See also FECN.

baffle

Individual dividers and partitions inside a chassis that force cooling air to flow through the device in the optimal manner. A baffle is designed to direct cooling air to where it is needed most.

bandwidth

Range of transmission frequencies a network can use, expressed as the difference between the highest and lowest frequencies of a transmission channel. In computer networks, greater bandwidth indicates a faster data transfer rate capacity.

bandwidth management

Policy management that rate-limits a classified packet flow at ingress to enforce ingress data rates below the physical line rate of a port. When the user configures a rate-limit profile, packets are tagged with a drop preference.

bandwidth model

In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, determines the value of the available bandwidth advertised by the interior gateway protocols (IGPs).

bandwidth on demand

- Technique to temporarily provide additional capacity on a link to handle bursts in data, videoconferencing, or other variable bit rate applications. Also called flexible bandwidth allocation.
- On a Services Router, an ISDN cost-control feature defining the bandwidth threshold that must be reached on links before a Services Router initiates additional ISDN data connections to provide more bandwidth.

bandwidth oversubscription

Feature of JunosE Software that enables line modules to operate at a rate dependent on the resources available rather than having all line modules operate at full line rate performance. Oversubscription enables a much more extensive combination of line modules in the router. See also oversubscription.

base station controller

BSC. Key network node in third-generation (3G) systems that supervises the functioning and control of multiple base transceiver stations.

base station subsystem

BSS. Composed of the base transceiver station (BTS) and base station controller (BSC).

Base Station System GPRS Protocol

BSSGP. Processes routing and quality-of-service (QoS) information for the base station subsystem (BSS).

base transceiver station

BTS. Mobile telephony equipment housed in cabinets and colocated with antennas. Also known as a radio base station.

Base64

Method used to encode digital certificate requests and certificates before they are sent to or from the certificate authority (CA).

baseline statistics

Starting point for statistics collection after resetting protocol or application statistics and counters to zero. See also statistics baseline.

basic NAT

Least secure type of traditional Network AddressTranslation (NAT). Provides translation for IP addresses only and places the mapping into a NAT table. See also NAT.

Basic Rate Interface

BRI. ISDN service intended for home and small enterprise applications. ISDN BRI consists of two 64-Kbps B-channels to carry voice or data and one 16-Kbps D-channel for control and signaling.

bastion host

Special purpose computer on a network specifically set up to withstand attacks, generally a hardened system configured with minimal software to support a single network service.

BBD

blade bay data. 60-byte text string stored in the JCS1200 management module nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) that conveys configuration information to the Routing Engines (blades) in the JCS1200 chassis.

BBL

bearer bandwidth limit. Maximum bandwidth available for voice traffic on an interface when dynamic call admission control is configured on the interface. See also dynamic CAC.

bearer bandwidth limit

BBL. Maximum bandwidth available for voice traffic on an interface when dynamic call admission control is configured on the interface. See also dynamic CAC.

bearer channel

B-channel. A 64-Kbps channel used for voice or data transfer on an ISDN interface. See also D-channel.

BECN

backward explicit congestion notification. In a Frame Relay network, a header bit transmitted by the destination device requesting that the source device send data more slowly. BECN minimizes the possibility that packets will be discarded when more packets arrive than can be handled. See also FECN.

behavior aggregate classifier

BA classifier. Method of classification that operates on a packet as it enters the router. The packet header contents are examined, and this single field determines the class-of-service (CoS) settings applied to the packet. See also multifield classifier.

Bellcore

Bell Communications Research. Research and development organization created after the divestiture of the Bell System. It is supported by the regional Bell holding companies (RBHCs), which own the regional Bell operating companies (RBOCs).

Bellman-Ford algorithm

Algorithm used in distance-vector routing protocols to determine the best path to all routes in the network.

BER

bit error rate. Percentage of received bits in error compared to the total number of bits received.

BERT

bit error rate test. Test that can be run on the following interfaces to determine whether they are operating properly: E1, E3, T1, T3, and channelized (DS3, OC3, OC12, and STM1) interfaces.

best effort

Traffic class in which the network forwards as many packets as possible in as reasonable a time as possible. By default, packets that are not assigned to a specific traffic class are assigned to the best-effort traffic class.

best path

When multiple routes to a given destination exist, BGP must determine which of these routes is the best. BGP puts the best path in its routing table and advertises that path to its BGP neighbors. If only one route exists to a particular destination, BGP installs that route. If multiple routes exist for a destination, BGP uses tie-breaking rules to decide which one of the routes to install in the BGP routing table.

best-effort queue

Queue associated with the best-effort traffic class for a logical interface.

best-effort scheduler node

Scheduler node associated with a logical interface and traffic class group pair, and where the traffic class group contains the best-effort traffic class. Also known as best-effort node.

BFD

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection. Protocol that uses control packets and shorter detection time limits to more rapidly detect failures in a network.

BGP

Border Gateway Protocol. Exterior gateway protocol (EGP) used to exchange routing information among routers in different autonomous systems. Can act as a label distribution protocol for MPLS.

BGP messages

Routing information that BGP speakers exchange with each other over a BGP session. BGP uses five message types:

- Open BGP messages—Used to establish and negotiate certain parameters for the BGP session after the underlying TCP session has been established.
- Update messages—Used to announce routes to prefixes that the speaker can reach and to withdraw routes to prefixes that it can no longer reach. The most important message in the BGP protocol.
- Keepalive messages—Periodic messages to determine whether the underlying TCP connection is still up.
- Notification messages—Sent to a BGP peer to terminate a BGP session (either because the speaker has been configured to do so or because it has detected some error condition).
- Route-refresh messages—Sent to BGP peers that advertise their route-refresh capability, enabling the BGP speaker to apply modified or new policies to the refreshed routes.

BGP neighbor

Another device on the network that is running BGP. There are two types of BGP neighbors:

- Internal neighbors—in the same autonomous system
- External neighbors—in different autonomous systems

A reliable connection is required between neighbors and is achieved by creating a TCP connection between the two. The handshake that occurs between the two prospect neighbors evolves through a series of phases or states before a true connection can be made.

BGP peer

BGP neighbor that has been explicitly configured for a BGP speaker. BGP peers do not have to be directly connected to each other to share a BGP session.

BGP peer group

Two or more BGP peers that share a common set of update policies. They are grouped together to reduce configuration overhead and to conserve system resources when updates are generated.

BGP route

Prefix and a set of path attributes. Sometimes referred to as a path, although that term technically refers to one of the path attributes of that route.

BGP session

TCP connection over which routing information is exchanged according to the rules of the BGP protocol. When two BGP speakers are in the same autonomous system, the BGP session is an internal BGP session, or IBGP session. When two BGP speakers are in different autonomous systems, the BGP session is an external BGP session, or EBGP session. BGP uses the same types of message on IBGP and EBGP sessions, but the rules for when to send and how to interpret each message differ slightly. See also IBGP session, EBGP session.

BGP speaker

Router configured to run the BGP routing protocol. Unlike some other routing protocols, BGP speakers do not automatically discover each other and begin exchanging information. Instead, each BGP speaker must be explicitly configured with a set of BGP peers with which it exchanges routing information.

Bidirectional Forwarding Detection

BFD. Protocol that uses control packets and shorter detection time limits to more rapidly detect failures in a network.

bidirectional NAT

Type of NAT that adds support for DNS to basic NAT, allowing public hosts to initiate sessions into the private network, usually to reach servers intended for public access.

binding

Collection of configuration parameters, including at least an IP address, assigned by a DHCP server to a DHCP client. A binding can be dynamic (temporary) or static (permanent). Bindings are stored in the DHCP server's binding database.

bit error rate

BER. Percentage of received bits in error compared to the total number of bits received.

bit error rate test

BERT. Test that can be run on the following interfaces to determine whether they are operating properly: E1, E3, T1, T3, and channelized (DS3, OC3, OC12, and STM1) interfaces.

bit field match conditions

Use of fields in the header of an IP packet as match criteria in a firewall filter.

bit rate

A data rate expressed as the number of bits transmitted per second: Kbps (kilobits per second). One bit is 1,024 bytes, so bit rate can also be expressed as KB/s (kilobytes per second).

BITS

Building Integrated Timing Source (or Supply, or System). Dedicated timing source that synchronizes all equipment in a particular building; a method for distributing precise timing synchronization among telecommunications equipment.

blacklist

Profile of checklist attributes that cause an AAA server to reject an authentication request. For example, a blacklist profile might cause the rejection of calling station phone numbers or IP addresses that are blocked by the AAA server.

blade

Routing Engine in the Juniper Networks JCS1200 Control System chassis that runs the Junos OS. The JCS1200 chassis holds up to 12 single Routing Engines (or 6 redundant Routing Engine pairs).

blade bay data

BBD. 60-byte text string stored in the JCS1200 management module nonvolatile random access memory (NVRAM) that conveys configuration information to the Routing Engines (blades) in the JCS1200 chassis.

Blowfish

Unpatented, symmetric cryptographic method developed by Bruce Schneier and used in many commercial and freeware software applications. Blowfish uses variable-length keys of up to 448 bits.

BMA

broadcast multiaccess. Network on which broadcast or multicast packets can be sent, enabling each device on a network segment to communicate directly with every other device on that segment. See also NBMA.

BOOTP

bootstrap protocol. UDP/IP-based protocol that allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information, such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers, can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP.

bootstrap loader

Program that loads the operating system for a device at startup.

bootstrap protocol

BOOTP. UDP/IP-based protocol that allows a booting host to configure itself dynamically and without user supervision. BOOTP provides a means to notify a host of its assigned IP address, the IP address of a boot server host, and the name of a file to be loaded into memory and executed. Other configuration information, such as the local subnet mask, the local time offset, the addresses of default routers, and the addresses of various Internet servers, can also be communicated to a host using BOOTP.

bootstrap router

Single router in a multicast network responsible for distributing candidate rendezvous point information to all PIM-enabled routers.

Border Gateway Protocol

BGP. Exterior gateway protocol (EGP) used to exchange routing information among routers in different autonomous systems. Can act as a label distribution protocol for MPLS.

BPDU

bridge protocol data unit. Spanning Tree Protocol hello packet that is sent out at intervals to exchange information across bridges and detect loops in a network topology.

BRI

Basic Rate Interface. ISDN service intended for home and small enterprise applications. ISDN BRI consists of two 64-Kbps B-channels to carry voice or data and one 16-Kbps D-channel for control and signaling.

bridge

- Network component defined by the IEEE that forwards frames from one LAN segment or VLAN to another. The bridging function can be contained in a router, LAN switch, or other specialized device. A bridge operates at Layer 2 of the OSI reference model. See also switch.
- Device that uses the same communications protocol to connect and pass packets between two network segments.

bridge domain

Set of logical ports that share the same flooding or broadcast characteristics. As in a virtual LAN, a bridge domain spans one or more ports of multiple devices. By default, each bridge domain maintains its own forwarding database of MAC addresses learned from packets received on ports belonging to that bridge domain. See also broadcast domain, VLAN.

bridge group

Collection of bridge interfaces stacked on Ethernet layer 2 network interfaces (ports) to form a broadcast domain. Each bridge group has its own set of forwarding tables and filters and functions as a logical transparent bridging device.

bridge group interface

Association of one or more network interfaces with a bridge group. Also called a bridge interface.

bridge protocol data unit

BPDU. Spanning Tree Protocol hello packet that is sent out at intervals to exchange information across bridges and detect loops in a network topology.

bridged Ethernet interface

Link layer protocol that allows multiple upper-layer interface types (IP, PPPoE, and CBF) to be simultaneously multiplexed over the same interface.

bridged IP

Link layer protocol used to manage IP packets that are encapsulated inside an Ethernet frame running over a permanent virtual circuit (PVC).

broadband remote access server

B-RAS. Application responsible for aggregating the output from digital subscriber line access multiplexers (DSLAMs), providing user PPP sessions and PPP session termination, enforcing QoS policies, and routing traffic into an ISP’s backbone network.

broadband services router

BSR. A router used for subscriber management and edge routing.

broadcast

Operation of sending network traffic from one network node to all other network nodes.

broadcast accounting server

In RADIUS, server that sends the accounting information to a group of virtual routers. An accounting virtual router group can contain up to four virtual routers, and the E Series router supports a maximum of 100 virtual router groups. The accounting information continues to be sent to the duplicate accounting virtual router, if one is configured. You might use broadcast accounting to send accounting information to a group of your private accounting servers. See also duplicate accounting server.

broadcast address

IPv4 type of address that enables a device to send a packet to all hosts on a subnetwork.

broadcast circuits

Circuits that use designated routers and are represented as virtual nodes in the network topology. They require periodic database synchronization. By default, IS-IS treats the broadcast link as LAN media and tries to bring up the LAN adjacency even when the interface is configured as unnumbered or only a single neighbor exists on that link. See also point-to-point circuits.

broadcast domain

Logical division of a computer network, in which all nodes can reach each other by broadcast at the data link layer.

broadcast multiaccess

BMA. Network on which broadcast or multicast packets can be sent, enabling each device on a network segment to communicate directly with every other device on that segment. See also NBMA.

broadcast network

Network of many routers that can send, or broadcast, a single physical message to all the attached routers. Pairs of routers on a broadcast network are assumed to be able to communicate with each other. On broadcast networks, the OSPF router dynamically detects its neighbor routers by sending hello packets to the multicast address 224.0.0.5. The hello protocol elects a designated router and a backup designated router for the network. Ethernet is an example of a broadcast network.

BSC

base station controller. Key network node in third-generation (3G) systems that supervises the functioning and control of multiple base transceiver stations.

BSR

broadband services router. A router used for subscriber management and edge routing.

BSS

base station subsystem. Composed of the base transceiver station (BTS) and base station controller (BSC).

BSSGP

Base Station System GPRS Protocol. Processes routing and quality-of-service (QoS) information for the BSS.

BTS

base transceiver station. Mobile telephony equipment housed in cabinets and colocated with antennas. Also known as a radio base station.

buffer

Memory space for handling data in transit. Buffers compensate for differences in processing speed between network devices by temporarily handling bursts of data until they can be processed by slower devices.

buffer overflow

Event that occurs when a program or process attempts to store more data in a buffer than the buffer was intended to hold. Buffers provide temporary data storage and are designed to contain a finite amount of data; any additional data can overflow the buffer zone and attempt to enter nearby buffers, corrupting or overwriting that buffer’s existing data.

Building Integrated Timing Source (or Supply, or System)

BITS. Dedicated timing source that synchronizes all equipment in a particular building; a method for distributing precise timing synchronization among telecommunications equipment.

bundle

- Multiple physical links of the same type, such as multiple asynchronous lines, or physical links of different types, such as leased synchronous lines and dial-up asynchronous lines.
- Collection of software that makes up a Junos OS release.

bypass LSP

Carries traffic for an LSP whose link-protected interface has failed. A bypass LSP uses a different interface and path to reach the same destination.

bypass tunnel

Single label-switched path (LSP) used to back up a set of LSPs by bypassing specific links in the LSP. In the event of a failure in any link of the protected RSVP-TE LSP (the primary LSP), MPLS redirects traffic to the associated bypass tunnel in tens of milliseconds.

### C

C-VLAN

customer VLAN. A stacked VLAN, defined by IEEE 802.1ad, that contains an outer tag corresponding to the S-VLAN and an inner tag corresponding to the C-VLAN. A C-VLAN often corresponds to customer premises equipment (CPE). Scheduling and shaping is often used on a C-VLAN to establish minimum and maximum bandwidth limits for a customer. See also S-VLAN.

CA

certificate authority. A trusted third-party organization that creates, enrolls, validates, and revokes digital certificates. The CA guarantees a user’s identity and issues public and private keys for message encryption and decryption (coding and decoding).

CAC

- call admission control (MPLS). Bandwidth and bandwidth-related resource monitoring and accounting facility that determines whether a setup request can be honored for an MPLS LSP with traffic parameters.
- connection admission control (ATM). Set of actions that the network takes during connection setup or renegotiation. ATM networks use CAC to determine whether to accept a connection request, based on whether allocating the connection’s requested bandwidth would cause the network to violate the traffic contracts of existing connections.

CAIDA

Cooperative Association for Internet Data Analysis. Association that provides tools and analyses promoting the engineering and maintenance of a robust, scalable Internet infrastructure. One tool, cflowd, allows you to collect an aggregate of sampled flows and send the aggregate to a specified host that runs the cflowd application available from CAIDA.

call admission control

CAC. Bandwidth and bandwidth-related resource monitoring and accounting facility that determines whether a setup request can be honored for an MPLS LSP with traffic parameters.

Call Detail Record

CDR. Contains data unique to a specific call, such as origination, termination, length, and time of day.

callback

Alternative feature to dial-in that enables a device to call back the caller from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection. Instead of accepting a call from the remote end of the connection, the router rejects the call, waits a configured period of time, and calls a number configured on the router’s dialer interface. See also dial-in.

caller ID

Telephone number of the caller on the remote end of a backup ISDN connection, used to dial in and also to identify the caller. During dial-in, the router matches the caller ID of the incoming call against all caller IDs configured on its dialer interfaces, and accepts only those calls whose caller IDs are configured.

CAM

content-addressable memory. Memory chip in which content is compared in each bit cell, allowing for very fast table lookups.

CAMA

centralized automatic message accounting. Recording of toll calls at a central point.

CAMEL

Customized Applications of Mobile Enhanced Logic. An ETSI standard for GSM networks that enhances the provision of Intelligent Network services.

candidate configuration

File maintained by the Junos OS containing changes to the router’s active configuration. This file becomes the active configuration when a user issues the commit command.

candidate RP advertisements

Information sent by routers in a multicast network when they are configured as a local rendezvous point (RP). This information is unicast to the bootstrap router for the multicast domain.

capability negotiation

Enables devices to communicate without having prior knowledge of the capabilities of the remote entity. This method is used by BGP peers to determine whether they share the same capabilities, and whether the session will be maintained or terminated, given the respective capabilities of the peers. BGP speakers advertise their capabilities in BGP open messages.

carrier-of-carriers VPN

Virtual private network (VPN) service provided to a network service provider that supplies Internet or VPN service to an end customer, establishing a two-tiered relationship between a provider carrier and a customer carrier. The provider carrier provides a VPN backbone network for the customer carrier (Tier 1). The customer carrier, in turn, provides Layer 3 VPN or Internet services to its end customers (Tier 2). For a carrier-of-carriers VPN, the customer’s sites are configured within the same autonomous system (AS).

CB

Control Board. On a Juniper Networks T640 Core Router routing node, part of the host subsystem that provides control and monitoring functions for router components.

CBC

cipher block chaining. A mode of encryption using 64 or 128 bits of fixed-length blocks in which each block of plain text is XORed with the previous cipher text block before being encrypted. See also XOR.

CBF

connection-based forwarding. A method of forwarding frames in which forwarding decisions are made using only the identity of the ingress interface. No part of a packet’s contents is used to determine how a packet should be forwarded.

CBR

constant bit rate. An ATM service category that supports a constant and guaranteed rate to transport services such as video or voice, as well as circuit emulation, requiring rigorous timing control and performance parameters. For ATM1 and ATM2 IQ interfaces, data is serviced at a constant, repetitive rate. CBR is used for traffic that does not need to periodically burst to a higher rate, such as nonpacketized voice and audio.

CC cells

continuity check cells. Cells that provide continual monitoring of a connection on a segment or from end to end.

CCC

circuit cross-connect. Junos OS feature that allows you to configure transparent connections between two circuits. A circuit can be a Frame Relay DLCI, an ATM virtual channel (VC), a PPP interface, a Cisco HDLC interface, or an MPLS label-switched path (LSP).

CCITT

International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee. Now known as ITU-T (Telecommunication Standardization Sector), organization that coordinates standards for telecommunication on behalf of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). The ITU is a United Nations specialized agency. ITU-T is a subcommittee of ITU. See also ITU-T.

CDMA

code division multiple access. Digital cellular technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques for digital transmission of radio signals, for example, between a mobile telephone and a base transceiver station (BTS). Unlike competing systems that use TDMA (time division multiple access), such as GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications), CDMA does not assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, every channel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversations are encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence. CDMA consistently provides better capacity for voice and data communications than other commercial mobile technologies, allowing more subscribers to connect at any given time.

CDMA2000

Radio transmission and backbone technology standards for the evolution to third-generation (3G) mobile networks.

CDN

content delivery network, content distribution network. A system of computers networked together across the Internet that cooperate transparently to deliver content to end users, most often for the purpose of improving performance, scalability, and cost efficiency.

CDR

Call Detail Record. Contains data unique to a specific call, such as origination, termination, length, and time of day.

CDV

cell delay variation. Difference between a cell’s expected and actual transfer delay. CDV determines the amount of jitter. (JunosE QoS term)

CDVT

cell delay variation tolerance. Acceptable tolerance of CDV (jitter). (JunosE QoS term)

CE

customer edge. Customer router connected to the service provider network.

CE device

customer edge device. Router or switch in the customer’s network that is connected to a service provider’s provider edge (PE) router and participates in a Layer 3 VPN.

cell delay variation

CDV. Difference between a cell’s expected and actual transfer delay. CDV determines the amount of jitter. (JunosE QoS term)

cell delay variation tolerance

CDVT. Acceptable tolerance of CDV (jitter). (JunosE QoS term)

cell loss priority

CLP. ATM cell bit that communicates the loss priority of the payload. A value of zero (0) specifies that the cell not be discarded if it encounters congestion as it moves through the network. A value of one (1) specifies that the network can drop the cell when congestion is encountered.

cell relay

Data transmission technology based on the use of small, fixed-size packets (cells) that can be processed and switched in hardware at high speeds. Cell relay is the basis for many high-speed network protocols, including ATM and IEEE 802.6.

cell tax

Physical transmission capacity used by header information when sending data packets in an ATM network. Each ATM cell uses a 5-byte header.

cell-relay mode

Layer 2 circuit transport mode that sends ATM cells between ATM2 intelligent queuing (IQ) interfaces over an MPLS core network. You use Layer 2 circuit cell-relay transport mode to tunnel a stream of ATM cells over an MPLS or IP backbone. See also AAL5 mode, Layer 2 circuits, standard AAL5 mode, trunk mode.

Central Management Console

CMC. A feature of the Juniper Networks Media Flow Controller management interface that allows you to push configurations to a number of Media Flow Controllers from a central interface.

central office

CO. Local telephone company building that houses circuit switching equipment used for subscriber lines in a given area.

centralized automatic message accounting

CAMA. Recording of toll calls at a central point.

certificate

Electronic document that binds a person or entity to a public key using a digital signature.

certificate authority

CA. A trusted third-party organization that creates, enrolls, validates, and revokes digital certificates. The CA guarantees a user’s identity and issues public and private keys for message encryption and decryption (coding and decoding).

certificate revocation list

CRL. List of digital certificates that have been invalidated, including the reasons for revocation and the names of the entities that issued them. A CRL prevents use of digital certificates and signatures that have been compromised.

CFEB

Compact Forwarding Engine Board. In Juniper Networks M7i and M10i Multiservice Edge Routers, CFEB provides route lookup, filtering, and switching to the destination port.

cflowd

Application available from CAIDA that collects an aggregate of sampled flows and sends the aggregate to a specified host running the cflowd application.

CFM

connectivity fault management. End-to-end per-service-instance Ethernet layer operation, administration, and management (OAM) protocol. CFM includes proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks.

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol

CHAP. Server-driven, three-step authentication of remote users that depends on a shared secret password that resides on both the server and the client.

change of authorization

CoA. RADIUS messages that dynamically modify session authorization attributes, such as data filters.

channel

Communication circuit linking two or more devices, providing an input/output interface between a processor and a peripheral device or between two systems. A single physical circuit can consist of one or many channels, or two systems carried on a physical wire or wireless medium. For example, the dedicated channel between a telephone and the central office (CO) is a twisted-pair copper wire. See also frequency-division multiplexed channel, time-division multiplexed channel.

channel group

Combination of DS0 interfaces partitioned from a channelized interface into a single logical bundle.

channel service unit

CSU/DSU. A channel service unit connects a digital phone line to a multiplexer or other digital signal device. A data service unit connects data terminal equipment (DTE) to a digital phone line.

channelized E1

A 2.048 Mbps interface that can be configured as a single clear channel E1 interface or channelized into as many as 31 discrete DS0 interfaces. On most channelized E1 interfaces, time slots are numbered from 1 through 32, and time slot 1 is reserved for framing. On some legacy channelized E1 interfaces, time slots are numbered from 0 through 31, with time slot 0 reserved for framing.

channelized interface

Wideband interface divided into many smaller channels to carry different streams of data. It is a subdivision of a larger interface, minimizing the number of PICs or Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) that an installation requires. On a channelized PIC or PIM, each port can be configured as a single clear channel or partitioned into multiple discrete T3, T1, E1, and DS0 interfaces, depending on the size of the channelized PIC or PIM.

channelized T1

A 1.544 Mbps interface that can be configured as a single clear channel T1 interface or channelized into as many as 24 discrete DS0 interfaces. Time slots are numbered from 1 through 24.

CHAP

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol. Server-driven, three-step authentication of remote users that depends on a shared secret password that resides on both the server and the client.

chassis alarm

Predefined alarm triggered by a physical condition on the device such as a power supply failure, excessive component temperature, or media failure.

chassis daemon

chassisd. Junos OS process responsible for managing the interaction of the router’s physical components.

chassisd

chassis daemon. Junos OS process responsible for managing the interaction of the router’s physical components.

CHD

computed historical datapoints. Traffic samples that have been computed in some manner, such as summation and averaging.

CIDR

Classless Interdomain Routing. Addressing method that interprets an IP address in two parts: a prefix that identifies the network, followed by notation that indicates the host address and mask; for example, 10.12.8.3/16. CIDR replaces the traditional class structure of IP addresses, in which address allocations were based on octet (8-bit) boundary segments of the 32-bit IP address. In CIDR, the boundary between the network and host portions of an IP address can be on any bit boundary and they have no class restrictions, enabling more efficient use of the IP address space.

CIP

Connector Interface Panel. Panel that contains connectors for the Routing Engines, BITS interfaces, and alarm relay contacts on some M Series and T Series routers.

cipher block chaining

CBC. A mode of encryption using 64 or 128 bits of fixed-length blocks in which each block of plain text is XORed with the previous cipher text block before being encrypted. See also XOR.

CIR

committed information rate. Specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. Each packet is counted as it enters the network. Packets that do not exceed the CIR are marked green, which corresponds to low loss priority. Packets that exceed the CIR but are below the peak information rate (PIR) are marked yellow, which corresponds to medium loss priority. See also trTCM, PIR.

circuit cross-connect

CCC. Junos OS feature that allows you to configure transparent connections between two circuits. A circuit can be a Frame Relay DLCI, an ATM virtual channel (VC), a PPP interface, a Cisco HDLC interface, or an MPLS label-switched path (LSP).

circuit-level proxy

Generic proxy (intermediary cache or relay between a Web client and a Web server) that is not associated with a specific application; instead, a circuit-level proxy can support multiple applications.

Cisco HDLC

Cisco High-Level Data Link Control. Bit-oriented synchronous data-link layer protocol that governs information transfer. Developed by ISO, it specifies a data encapsulation method on synchronous serial links using frame characters and checksums. It is a protocol that has been implemented by many different network equipment vendors. See also SLARP.

Cisco-RP-Announce

Message advertised into a multicast network by a router configured as a local rendezvous point (RP) in an auto-RP network. A Cisco-RP-Announce message is advertised in dense-mode PIM to the 224.0.1.39 multicast group address.

Cisco-RP-Discovery

Message advertised by the mapping agent in an auto-RP network. A Cisco-RP-Discovery message contains the rendezvous point (RP) to multicast group address assignments for the domain. It is advertised in dense-mode PM to the 224.0.1.40 multicast group address.

CISPR

International Special Committee on Radio Interference. An International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) committee whose principal task is to prepare standards that offer protection of radio reception from interference sources at the higher end of the frequency range (from 9 kHz and above), such as electrical appliances of all types; the electricity supply system; industrial, scientific, and electromedical RF; broadcasting receivers (sound and TV); and IT equipment (ITE).

CIST

common and internal spanning tree. Single spanning tree calculated by the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and the logical continuation of that connectivity through multiple spanning-tree (MST) bridges and regions, calculated to ensure that all LANs in the bridged LAN are simply and fully connected. See also MSTI.

CLACL

classifier control list. Specifies the criteria by which the router defines a packet flow.

class of service

CoS. Method of classifying traffic on a packet-by-packet basis using information in the type-of-service (ToS) byte to provide different service levels to different traffic. See also QoS.

Class Selector code point

CSCP. Eight Differentiated Services code point (DSCP) values of the form xxx000 (where x can be 0 or 1). Defined in RFC 2474, Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers.

class type

In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, a collection of traffic flows that are treated equivalently in a Differentiated Services domain. A class type maps to a queue and is much like a class-of-service (CoS) forwarding class in concept. Also known as a traffic class.

class-of-service process

cosd. Process that enables the routing platform to provide different levels of service to applications based on packet classifications.

classification

Process of taking in a single data stream and sorting it into multiple output substreams. In class of service (CoS), the examination of an incoming packet that associates the packet with a particular CoS servicing level. There are two kinds of classifiers, behavior aggregate and multifield. See also BA classifier, multifield classifier.

classifier

Method of reading a sequence of bits in a packet header or label and determining how the packet should be forwarded internally and scheduled (queued) for output.

classifier control list

CLACL. Specifies the criteria by which the router defines a packet flow.

classifier group

Policy rules that make up a policy list.

Classless Interdomain Routing, classless routing

CIDR. Addressing method that interprets an IP address in two parts: a prefix that identifies the network, followed by notation that indicates the host address and mask; for example, 10.12.8.3/16. CIDR replaces the traditional class structure of IP addresses, in which address allocations were based on octet (8-bit) boundary segments of the 32-bit IP address. In CIDR, the boundary between the network and host portions of an IP address can be on any bit boundary and they have no class restrictions, enabling more efficient use of the IP address space.

clear channel

Interface configured on a channelized PIC or PIM that operates as a single channel, does not carry signaling, and uses the entire port bandwidth.

clear to send

CTS. Signalling message transmitted in response to an RTS (request to send) message that enables the sender of the RTS message to begin data transfer

cleartext

Unencrypted form of encrypted text. Also known as plaintext.

CLEC

competitive local exchange carrier. Company that competes with an already-established local telecommunications business by providing its own network and switching.

CLEI

Common Language Equipment Identifier. Inventory code used to identify and track telecommunications equipment.

CLI

command-line interface. Interface provided for entering commands for configuring and monitoring the routing protocol software.

CLI access class

Security level that grants access to specific CLI commands, such as for packet mirroring.

CLI-based packet mirroring

Type of packet mirroring in which an authorized user uses the router CLI commands to configure and manage packet mirroring.

client

Node or software program (front-end device) that requests services from a server. See also SNMP client.

client peer

In a BGP route reflection, a member of a cluster that is not the route reflector. See also nonclient peer.

CLNP

Connectionless Network Protocol. ISO-developed protocol for OSI connectionless network service. A network layer protocol used by CLNS to handle data at the transport layer. CLNP is the OSI equivalent of IP.

CLNS

Connectionless Network Service. OSI network layer service that enables data transmission without establishing a circuit and that routes messages independently of any other messages. A Layer 3 protocol, similar to Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), CLNS uses network service access points (NSAP) instead of the prefix addresses found in IPv4 to specify end systems and intermediate systems.

CLP

cell loss priority. ATM cell bit that communicates the loss priority of the payload. A value of zero (0) specifies that the cell not be discarded if it encounters congestion as it moves through the network. A value of one (1) specifies that the network can drop the cell when congestion is encountered.

cluster

Route reflector and its clients (BGP) that have been grouped together. Consists of one system that acts as a route reflector, along with any number of client peers. Clients peer only with a route reflector and do not peer outside their cluster. Route reflectors peer with clients and other route reflectors within a cluster; outside a cluster they peer with other reflectors and other routers that are neither clients nor reflectors. The client peers receive their route information only from the route reflector system. Routers in a cluster do not need to be fully meshed. See also route reflector, route reflector client.

cluster list

List of paths recorded as a packet travels through a BGP route reflector cluster.

CMC

Central Management Console. A feature of the Juniper Networks Media Flow Controller management interface that allows you to push configurations to a number of Media Flow Controllers from a central interface.

CnS, CNS

Control and Status messages. 3G modem messages used to configure, set parameters, query status, receive event notification, and control traffic of event notifications for the 3G modem device.

CO

central office. Local telephone company building that houses circuit switching equipment used for subscriber lines in a given area.

CoA

change of authorization. RADIUS messages that dynamically modify session authorization attributes, such as data filters.

code division multiple access

CDMA. Digital cellular technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques for digital transmission of radio signals, for example, between a mobile telephone and a base transceiver station (BTS). Unlike competing systems that use TDMA (time division multiple access), such as GSM (Global System for Mobile Communications), CDMA does not assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, every channel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversations are encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence. CDMA consistently provides better capacity for voice and data communications than other commercial mobile technologies, allowing more subscribers to connect at any given time.

code-point alias

Name assigned to a pattern of code-point bits. This name is used, instead of the bit pattern, in the configuration of other class-of-service (CoS) components, such as classifiers, drop-profile maps, and rewrite rules.

cold restart

Result of a standby SRP module becoming active without high availability (HA) being configured (no switchover from active SRP). Similar to a cold start, except:

- The standby SRP becomes active much more quickly because the configuration is already loaded in the standby SRP memory and the device is running.
- Line module software is reloaded, so it takes additional time for the newly active SRP to become fully operational.

See also graceful restart, warm restart.

color-aware rate limit

Type of rate limit that can change the algorithm used, depending on the color of the incoming packet.

color-based thresholding

Process that assigns precedence to packets in JunosE QoS. Packets within the router are tagged with a drop precedence: committed—green; conformed—yellow; exceeded—red. When the queue fills above the exceeded threshold, the router drops red packets, but still queues yellow and green packets. When the queue fills above the conformed drop threshold, the router queues only green packets.

color-blind rate limit

Type of rate limit that runs the same algorithm for all packets, regardless of their color. See also rate-limit hierarchy.

command completion

Function of a router’s command-line interface (CLI) that allows a user to enter only the first few characters in any command. Users access this function through the spacebar or Tab key.

command privileges

Feature of the CLI in E Series routers. Command privileges fall within one of the following levels:

- 0—Allows you to execute the help, enable, disable, and exit commands.
- 1—Allows you to execute commands in User Exec mode plus commands at level 0.
- 5—Allows you to execute Privileged Exec show commands plus the commands at levels 1 and 0.
- 10—Allows you to execute all commands except support commands (provided by Juniper Networks Customer Service), or the privilege command to assign privileges to commands.
- 15—Allows you to execute support commands and assign privileges to commands.

command-line interface

CLI. Interface provided for entering commands for configuring and monitoring the routing protocol software.

commit

Junos OS CLI configuration mode command that saves changes made to a router configuration, verifies the syntax, applies the changes to the configuration currently running on the router, and identifies the resulting file as the current operational configuration.

commit script

Enforces custom configuration rules. A script runs each time a new candidate configuration is committed and inspects the configuration. If a configuration breaks your custom rules, the script can generate actions for the Junos OS.

commit script macro

Sequence of commands that allow you to create custom configuration syntax to simplify the task of configuring a routing platform. By itself, your custom syntax has no operational impact on the routing platform. A corresponding commit script macro uses your custom syntax as input data for generating standard Junos OS configuration statements that execute your intended operation.

committed action

In a rate-limit profile, action that drops, transmits, marks (IP and IPv6), or marks-exp (MPLS) when traffic flow does not exceed the rate. The mark value is not supported for hierarchical rate limits, and the transmit values-—conditional, unconditional, and final-—are supported only on hierarchical rate limits.

committed information rate

CIR. Specifies the average rate at which packets are admitted to the network. Each packet is counted as it enters the network. Packets that do not exceed the CIR are marked green, which corresponds to low loss priority. Packets that exceed the CIR but are below the peak information rate (PIR) are marked yellow, which corresponds to medium loss priority. See also trTCM, PIR.

common and internal spanning tree

CIST. Single spanning tree calculated by the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) and the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP) and the logical continuation of that connectivity through multiple spanning-tree (MST) bridges and regions, calculated to ensure that all LANs in the bridged LAN are simply and fully connected. See also MSTI.

Common Criteria

International standard (ISO/IEC 15408) for computer security. See also EAL3.

Common Criteria Evaluation Assurance Level 3

EAL3. Compliance requirement defined by Common Criteria. Higher levels have more stringent requirements. See also Common Criteria.

Common Language Equipment Identifier

CLEI. Inventory code used to identify and track telecommunications equipment.

Common Open Policy Service

COPS. A query-and-response protocol used to exchange policy information between a policy server and its clients.

Common Open Policy Service usage for policy provisioning

COPS-PR. An IETF standard where the policy enforcement point (PEP) requests policy provisioning when the operational state of the interface and DHCP addresses change.

Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures

CVE. Dictionary of publicly known information security vulnerabilities and exposures that is international in scope and free for public use.

community

- In BGP, a logical group of prefixes or destinations that share a common attribute; used to simplify a routing policy. Community members can be on different networks and in different autonomous systems. BGP allows you to define the community to which a prefix belongs. A prefix can belong to more than one community. The community attribute lists the communities to which a prefix belongs. Community information is included as one of the path attributes in BGP update messages.
- In SNMP, an authentication scheme that authorizes SNMP clients based on the source IP address of incoming SNMP packets, defines which MIB objects are available, and specifies the operations (read-only or read-write) allowed on those objects.

community list

Sequential collection of permit and deny conditions. Each condition describes the community number to be matched. The router tests the community attribute of a route against the conditions in a community list one by one. The first match determines whether the router accepts (the route is permitted) or rejects (the route is denied) a route having the specified community. Because the router stops testing conditions after the first match, the order of the conditions is critical. If no conditions match, the router rejects the route.

Compact Forwarding Engine Board

CFEB. In Juniper Networks M7i and M10i Multiservice Edge Routers, CFEB provides route lookup, filtering, and switching to the destination port.

CompactFlash drive

Nonvolatile memory card in Juniper Networks M Series, MX Series, T Series, and J Series platforms used for storing a copy of the Junos OS and the current and most recent router configurations. It also typically acts as the primary boot device.

competitive local exchange carrier

CLEC (pronounced “see-lek”). Company that competes with an already-established local telecommunications business by providing its own network and switching.

complete sequence number PDU

CSNP. Packet that contains a complete list of all the LSPs in the IS-IS database.

compound explicit shared shaper

One of four types of shared shapers, in which the software selects constituents based on the shared priority and shared weight configured using a JunosE command. If no attributes are specified, the software supplies a shared priority consistent with the legacy scheduler configuration. See also compound implicit shared shaper, simple explicit shared shaper, simple implicit shared shaper, CSNP.

compound implicit shared shaper

One of four types of shared shapers, in which the software selects constituents automatically. If a node exists in a given traffic-class group, the node is active and the queues stacked above it are inactive constituents. See also compound explicit shared shaper, simple explicit shared shaper, simple implicit shared shaper, CSNP.

compound shared shaping

Hardware-assisted mechanism that controls bandwidth for all scheduler objects associated with the subscriber logical interface. See also shared shaping, simple shared shaping.

Compressed Real-Time Transport Protocol

CRTP. Decreases the size of the IP, UDP, and RTP headers and works with reliable and fast point-to-point links for voice over IP (VoIP) traffic. CRTP is defined in RFC 2508, Compressing IP/UDP/RTP Headers for Low-Speed Serial Links.

computed historical datapoints

CHD. Traffic samples that have been computed in some manner, such as summation and averaging.

concurrent routing and bridging

CRB. Mechanism whereby an E Series router can route a protocol among a group of interfaces in one bridge group and concurrently bridge the same protocol among a separate group of interfaces in a different bridge group on the router.

Concurrent Versions System

CVS. Widely used version control system for software development or data archives.

confederation

In BGP, group of systems that appears to external autonomous systems as a single autonomous system. A set of sub-ASs is established within an AS to reduce mesh overhead. BGP peers within each sub-AS are fully meshed, but the sub-ASs do not have to be fully meshed within the AS. See also route reflection.

configlet

Small, static configuration file that contains information about how a security device can connect to NSM.

configuration caching

Mechanism that prevents the system from being partially configured with changes in the event of a reset. When a script or macro begins execution, the resulting configuration changes are automatically cached in system RAM rather than being committed to nonvolatile storage (NVS). When the script or macro completes execution, the cache is flushed as a background operation, saving the configuration changes to NVS.

configuration group

Collection of configuration statements whose inheritance can be directed in the rest of the device configuration. The same group can be applied to different sections of the configuration, and different sections of one group’s configuration statements can be inherited in different places in the configuration.

configuration management server

Remote server used to configure Juniper Networks routers when using the NETCONF XML Management Protocol or the Junos XML Management Protocol.

configuration mode

Junos OS mode that allows a user to alter the router’s current configuration.

conflict

Problem that occurs when an address within the IP address pool is being used by a host that does not have an associated binding in the DHCP server's database. Addresses with conflicts are removed from the pool and logged in a conflicts list until you clear the list.

conformed action

In a rate-limit profile, an action that drops, transmits, marks (IP and IPv6), or marks-exp (MPLS) when traffic flow exceeds the rate but not the excess burst. The mark value is not supported for hierarchical rate limits, and the transmit values-–conditional, unconditional, and final-–are supported only on hierarchical rate limits.

connect

BGP neighbor state in which the local router has initiated the TCP session and is waiting for the remote peer to complete the TCP connection.

connection admission control

CAC. Bandwidth and bandwidth-related resource monitoring and accounting facility that determines whether a setup request can be honored for an MPLS LSP with traffic parameters. Also known as call admission control.

connection-based forwarding

CBF. A method of forwarding frames in which forwarding decisions are made using only the identity of the ingress interface. No part of a packet’s contents is used to determine how a packet should be forwarded.

connection-oriented protocol

Protocol that exchanges control information with a remote computer to verify that the remote computer is ready to receive data before the originating computer sends the data.

Connectionless Network Protocol

CLNP. ISO-developed protocol for OSI connectionless network service. A network layer protocol used by CLNS to handle data at the transport layer. CLNP is the OSI equivalent of IP.

Connectionless Network Service

CLNS. OSI network layer service that enables data transmission without establishing a circuit and that routes messages independently of any other messages. A Layer 3 protocol, similar to Internet Protocol version 4 (IPv4), CLNS uses network service access points (NSAP) instead of the prefix addresses found in IPv4 to specify end systems and intermediate systems.

connectionless protocol

Protocol, such as IP, that does not exchange control information to establish an end-to-end connection before transmitting data.

connectivity fault management

CFM. End-to-end per-service-instance Ethernet layer operation, administration, and management (OAM) protocol. CFM includes proactive connectivity monitoring, fault verification, and fault isolation for large Ethernet metropolitan-area networks.

Connector Interface Panel

CIP. Panel that contains connectors for the Routing Engines, BITS interfaces, and alarm relay contacts on some M Series and T Series routers.

constant bit rate

CBR. An ATM service category that supports a constant and guaranteed rate to transport services such as video or voice, as well as circuit emulation, requiring rigorous timing control and performance parameters. For ATM1 and ATM2 IQ interfaces, data is serviced at a constant, repetitive rate. CBR is used for traffic that does not need to periodically burst to a higher rate, such as nonpacketized voice and audio.

constituent

Scheduler node or queue associated with a logical interface. A shared shaper is configured for a logical interface; all queues and scheduler nodes associated with that logical interface are constituents of the shared shaper. See also active constituent; inactive constituent.

constrained path

In traffic engineering, a path determined by using the CSPF algorithm. The Explicit Route Object (ERO) carried in the RSVP packets contains the constrained path information. See also ERO.

Constrained Shortest Path First

CSPF. MPLS algorithm modified to take into account specific restrictions when calculating the shortest path across the network.

Constraint-Based Routed Label Distribution Protocol

CR-LDP. Traffic engineering signaling protocol for MPLS IP networks. CR-LDP provides mechanisms for establishing explicitly routed label switched paths (LSPs).

constraint-based routed label-switched path

CR-LSP. Explicitly routed label switched path (LSP) established by means of CR-LDP

constraint-based routing (MPLS)

Mechanism to establish paths based on certain criteria (explicit route, QoS parameters). The standard routing protocols can be enhanced to carry additional information to be used when running the route calculation.

content addressable memory

CAM. Memory chip in which content is compared in each bit cell, allowing for very fast table lookups.

content delivery network

CDN, content distribution network. A system of computers networked together across the Internet that cooperate transparently to deliver content to end users, most often for the purpose of improving performance, scalability, and cost efficiency.

content distribution network

content delivery network, CDN. A system of computers networked together across the Internet that cooperate transparently to deliver content to end users, most often for the purpose of improving performance, scalability, and cost efficiency.

context node

Node that the Extensible Stylesheet Language for Transformations (XSLT) processor is currently examining. XSLT changes the context as it traverses the XML document’s hierarchy. See also XSLT.

context-sensitive help

Function of the router’s command-line interface (CLI) that allows a user to request information about the Junos OS hierarchy. You can access context-sensitive help in both operational and configuration mode.

continuity check cells

CC cells. Cells that provide continual monitoring of a connection on a segment or from end to end.

contributing routes

Active IP routes in the routing table that share the same most-significant bits and are more specific than an aggregate or generate route.

Control and Status messages

CnS, CNS. 3G modem messages used to configure, set parameters, query status, receive event notification, and control traffic of event notifications for the 3G modem device.

Control Board

CB. On a Juniper Networks T640 Core Router routing node, part of the host subsystem that provides control and monitoring functions for router components.

control plane

Virtual network path used to set up, maintain, and terminate data plane connections. See also data plane.

convergence

The time it takes all the routers in a network to receive the information and update their routing tables after a topology change.

Cooperative Association for Internet Data Analysis

CAIDA. Association that provides tools and analyses promoting the engineering and maintenance of a robust, scalable Internet infrastructure. One tool, cflowd, allows you to collect an aggregate of sampled flows and send the aggregate to a specified host that runs the cflowd application available from CAIDA.

cooperative route filtering

Enables a BGP speaker to send an inbound route filter to a peer and have the peer install it as an outbound filter on the remote end of the session. Also known as outbound route filtering, ORF.

Coordinated Universal Time

UTC. Historically referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT), a high-precision atomic time standard that tracks Universal Time (UT) and is the basis for legal civil time all over the Earth. Time zones around the world are expressed as positive and negative offsets from UTC.

COPS

Common Open Policy Service (Protocol). A query-and-response protocol used to exchange policy information between a policy server and its clients.

COPS-PR

COPS usage for policy provisioning. An IETF standard where the policy enforcement point (PEP) requests policy provisioning when the operational state of the interface and DHCP addresses change.

core

Central backbone of the network.

core dump file

In E Series routers, file that indicates which module has failed by referencing that module’s hardware slot number (the slot number designation on the system backplane). This slot number is different from the chassis slot number that appears on the front of the chassis and in screen displays.

CoS

class of service. Method of classifying traffic on a packet-by-packet basis using information in the type-of-service (ToS) byte to provide different service levels to different traffic. See also QoS.

cosd

Class-of-service process that enables the routing platform to provide different levels of service to applications based on packet classifications.

cost

Unitless number assigned to a path between neighbors, based on throughput, round-trip time, and reliability. The sum of path costs between source and destination hosts determines the overall path cost. OSPF uses the lowest cost to determine the best path.

CPE

customer premises equipment. Telephone, modem, router, or other service provider equipment located at a customer site.

CR-LDP

Constraint-Based Routed Label Distribution Protocol. Traffic engineering signaling protocol for MPLS IP networks. CR-LDP provides mechanisms for establishing explicitly routed label-switched paths (LSPs).

CR-LSP

constraint-based routed label-switched path. Explicitly routed label-switched path (LSP) established by means of CR-LDP.

craft interface

Mechanisms used by a Communication Workers of America craftsperson to operate, administer, and maintain equipment or provision data communications. On a Juniper Networks router, the craft interface allows you to view status and troubleshooting information and perform system control functions.

CRB

concurrent routing and bridging. Mechanism whereby an E Series router can route a protocol among a group of interfaces in one bridge group and concurrently bridge the same protocol among a separate group of interfaces in a different bridge group on the router.

CRC

cyclic redundancy check. Error-checking technique that uses a calculated numeric value to detect errors in transmitted data.

CRC errors

Indicates the number of packets generating a cyclic redundancy code error processed through the security device over the selected interface.

Critical Security Parameter

CSP. On routers running Junos-FIPS software, a collection of cryptographic keys and passwords that must be protected at all times.

CRL

certificate revocation list. List of digital certificates that have been invalidated, including the reasons for revocation and the names of the entities that issued them. A CRL prevents use of digital certificates and signatures that have been compromised.

CRTP

Compressed Real-Time Transport Protocol. Decreases the size of the IP, UDP, and RTP headers and works with reliable and fast point-to-point links for voice over IP (VoIP) traffic. CRTP is defined in RFC 2508, Compressing IP/UDP/RTP Headers for Low-Speed Serial Links.

Crypto Accelerator Module

Processor card that speeds up certain cryptographic IP Security (IPsec) services on some Juniper Networks devices. For supported cryptographic algorithms, refer to the product documentation for the devices that support the Crypto Accelerator Module.

Crypto Officer

Superuser responsible for the proper operation of a router running Junos-FIPS software.

CSCP

Class Selector code point. Eight Differentiated Services code point (DSCP) values of the form xxx000 (where x can be 0 or 1). Defined in RFC 2474.

CSNP

complete sequence number PDU. Packet that contains a complete list of all the LSPs in the IS-IS database.

CSP

Critical Security Parameter. On routers running Junos-FIPS software, a collection of cryptographic keys and passwords that must be protected at all times.

CSPF

Constrained Shortest Path First. MPLS algorithm modified to take into account specific restrictions when calculating the shortest path across the network.

CSU/DSU

channel service unit/data service unit. A channel service unit connects a digital phone line to a multiplexer or other digital signal device. A data service unit connects data terminal equipment (DTE) to a digital phone line.

CTS

clear to send (signal). Signalling message transmitted in response to an RTS (request to send) message that enables the sender of the RTS message to begin data transfer.

customer edge

CE. Customer router connected to the service provider network.

customer edge device

CE device. Router or switch in the customer’s network that is connected to a service provider’s provider edge (PE) router and participates in a Layer 3 VPN.

customer premises equipment

CPE. Telephone, modem, router, or other service provider equipment located at a customer site.

customer VLAN

C-VLAN. A stacked VLAN, defined by IEEE 802.1ad, that contains an outer tag corresponding to the S-VLAN and an inner tag corresponding to the C-VLAN. A C-VLAN often corresponds to customer premises equipment (CPE). Scheduling and shaping is often used on a C-VLAN to establish minimum and maximum bandwidth limits for a customer. See also S-VLAN.

Customized Applications of Mobile Enhanced Logic

CAMEL. An ETSI standard for GSM networks that enhances the provision of Intelligent Network services.

CVE

Common Vulnerabilities and Exposures. Dictionary of publicly known information security vulnerabilities and exposures that is international in scope and free for public use.

CVS

Concurrent Versions System. Widely used version control system for software development or data archives.

cyclic redundancy check

CRC. Error-checking technique that uses a calculated numeric value to detect errors in transmitted data.

### D

D-channel

delta channel. Circuit-switched channel that carries signaling and control for B-channels. In Basic Rate Interface (BRI) applications, it can also support customer packet data traffic at speeds up to 9.6 Kbps. See also B-channel, BRI.

daemon

Background process that performs operations for the system software and hardware. Daemons normally start when the system software is booted, and run as long as the software is running. In the Junos OS, daemons are also referred to as processes.

damping

Method of reducing the number of update messages sent between BGP peers, thereby reducing the load on those peers without adversely affecting the route convergence time for stable routes.

data carrier detect

DCD. Hardware signal defined by the RS-232C standard that indicates that the device, usually a modem, is online and ready for transmission.

data circuit-terminating equipment

DCE. Device, such as a modem, that provides the interface between a circuit and data terminal equipment (DTE). Also known as data communications equipment.

data communications equipment

DCE. Device, such as a modem, that provides the interface between a circuit and data terminal equipment (DTE). Also known as data circuit-terminating equipment.

Data Encryption Standard

DES. Method for encrypting information using a 56-bit key. Considered to be a legacy method and insecure for many applications. See also 3DES.

Data Encryption Standard-Cipher Block Chaining

DES-CBC. Method for encrypting single DES keys.

data exchange interface

DXI. Specification developed by the switched megabit data services (SMDS) interest group to define the interaction between internetworking devices and CSUs/DSUs that are transmitting over an SMDS access line.

data link layer

Second level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data between network entities by splitting data into frames to send on the physical layer and receiving acknowledgment frames. It performs error checking and retransmits frames not received correctly. In general, it controls the flow of information across the link, providing an error-free virtual channel to the network layer. See also OSI.

data link switching

DLSw. Method of tunneling IBM System Network Architecture (SNA) and NetBIOS traffic over an IP network, used because Junos OS does not support NetBIOS. See also tunneling protocol.

data model

DM. In NSM, an XML file that contains configuration data for an individual device. The DM is stored in the NSM Device Server. When you create, update, or import a device, the GUI Server edits the Abstract Data Model (ADM) to reflect the changes, then translates that information to the DM.

data packet

Chunk of data transiting the router from the source to a destination.

data plane

Virtual network path used to distribute data between nodes. See also control plane.

data service unit

channel service unit, CSU/DSU. A channel service unit connects a digital phone line to a multiplexer or other digital signal device. A data service unit connects data terminal equipment (DTE) to a digital phone line.

data set ready

DSR. One of the control signals on a standard RS-232C connector that indicates whether the DCE is connected and ready to start.

data stream inversion

Collection of data bits in a data stream that are inverted for transmission.

data terminal equipment

DTE. RS-232-C interface that a computer uses to exchange information with a serial device, such as a computer, host, or terminal, that communicates with DCE. At the terminal end of a data transmission, DTE comprises the transmit and receive equipment. See also DCE.

data terminal ready signal

DTR signal. Sent over a dedicated wire (RS-232 connection) from a computer (or terminal) to a transmission device to indicate that the computer is ready to receive data.

data-driven multicast distribution tree tunnel

data-MDT. Multicast tunnel created and deleted based on defined traffic loads and designed to ease loading on the default MDT tunnel.

data-link connection identifier

DLCI. 10-bit channel number attached to data frames to inform a Frame Relay network how to route the data in a Frame Relay virtual connection (a logical interface).

data-MDT

data-driven multicast distribution tree (MDT) tunnel. Multicast tunnel created and deleted based on defined traffic loads and designed to ease loading on the default MDT tunnel.

database description packet

OSPF packet type used in the formation of an adjacency. The packet sends summary information about the local router’s database to the neighboring router.

datagram

Packet format defined by IP.

dcd

device control process. Junos OS interface process (daemon).

DCD

data carrier detect. Hardware signal defined by the RS-232C standard that indicates that the device, usually a modem, is online and ready for transmission.

DCE

data communications equipment, data circuit-terminating equipment. Device, such as a modem, that provides the interface between a circuit and data terminal equipment (DTE).

DCU

destination class usage. Means of tracking traffic originating from specific prefixes on the customer edge router and destined for specific prefixes on the provider core router, based on the IP source and destination addresses.

DDoS

distributed denial of service attack. Attack, typically a flood, from multiple source points. A DDoS attack can be more effective in disrupting services than a DoS, because the flood of incoming attacks are coming from multiple sources.

DE

discard-eligible bit. In a Frame Relay network, header bit that notifies devices on the network that traffic can be dropped during congestion to ensure the delivery of higher priority traffic (those without the DE bit set).

deactivate

Method of modifying the router’s active configuration. Portions of the hierarchy marked as inactive using this command are ignored during the router’s commit process as if they were not configured at all.

dead interval

Amount of time that an OSPF router maintains a neighbor relationship before declaring that neighbor as no longer operational. The Junos OS uses a default value of 40 seconds for this timer.

dead peer detection

DPD. Method that recognizes the loss of the primary IPsec Internet Key Exchange (IKE) peer and establishes a secondary IPsec tunnel to a backup peer. It is a keepalive mechanism that enables the E Series router to detect when communication to a remote IPsec peer has been disconnected. DPD enables the router to reclaim resources and to optionally redirect traffic to an alternate failover destination. If DPD is not enabled, traffic continues to be sent to the unavailable destination. Also known as IKE keepalive.

Deep Inspection

DI. Firewall methodology that builds on the strength of stateful inspection, integrating intrusion prevention technology to provide application-level attack protection at the network perimeter. The Deep Inspection firewall can efficiently perform network security functions as well as analysis on the application message to determine whether to accept or deny traffic.

Deep Inspection action

Action performed by a security device when the permitted traffic matches an attack object specified in the rule. Deep Inspection actions include drop connection, drop packet, close client, and so on.

Deep Inspection profile

DI profile. Contains predefined attack object groups (created by Juniper Networks), and your own custom attack object groups. After creating the DI Profile, you add the Profile object in the Rule Option column of a firewall rule.

default address

Router address that is used as the source address on unnumbered interfaces.

default configuration

Configuration that takes place on a device that cannot locate a configuration (boot) file. You can set up two default configuration files for autoinstallation on the device: network.conf to specify IP address-to-hostname mappings for devices on the network, and router.conf to provide just enough configuration for your subsequent Telnet access.

default route

Route used to forward IP packets when a more specific route is not present in the routing table. Often represented as 0.0.0.0/0, the default route is sometimes referred to as the route of last resort.

delta

Difference or discrepancy. For example, in NSM, the difference between the configuration running on the physical device and the configuration in NSM is called the delta.

delta channel

D-channel. Circuit-switched channel that carries signaling and control for B-channels. In Basic Rate Interface (BRI) applications, it can also support customer packet data traffic at speeds up to 9.6 Kbps. See also B-channel, BRI.

demand circuit

Network segment whose cost varies with usage, according to a service level agreement with a service provider. Demand circuits limit traffic based on either bandwidth (bits or packets transmitted) or access time. See also multicast.

demilitarized zone

DMZ. Physical or logical subnet used as an additional layer of security between an organization’s network and an untrusted network (often the Internet); a neutral zone used to secure a network from external access. An attacker only has access to equipment in the DMZ.

denial of service

DoS. System security breach in which network services become unavailable to users.

denial-of-service attack

DoS attack. Any attempt to deny valid users access to network or server resources by using up all the resources of the network element or server. Typically, an attacker sends a flood of information to overwhelm a service system’s resources, causing the server to ignore valid service requests.

dense mode

Method of forwarding multicast traffic to interested listeners. Dense mode forwarding assumes that most of the hosts on the network will receive the multicast data. Routers flood packets and prune unwanted traffic every 3 minutes. See also sparse mode.

Dense Port Concentrator

DPC. Network interface–specific card that can be installed in the router.

dense wavelength division multiplexing

DWDM. Technology that enables data from different sources to be carried together on an optical fiber, with each signal carried on its own separate wavelength.

DES

Data Encryption Standard. Method for encrypting information using a 56-bit key. Considered to be a legacy method and insecure for many applications. See also 3DES.

DES-CBC

Data Encryption Standard-Cipher Block Chaining. Method for encrypting single DES keys.

designated intermediate system

DIS. An IS-IS router that is elected by priority on an interface basis. In the case of a tie, the router with the highest MAC address becomes the DIS. DIS is analogous to the designated router in OSPF, although the election process and adjacencies within multiaccess media differ significantly. DIS assists broadcast routers to synchronize their IS-IS databases.

designated router

DR

- Router on a subnet that is selected to control multicast routes for the sources and receivers on the subnet. If several routers are present, the selected DR is the router with the highest priority. If the DR priorities match, the router with the highest IP address is selected as the DR. The source’s DR sends PIM register messages from the source network to the rendezvous point (RP). The receiver’s DR sends PIM join and PIM prune messages from the receiver network toward the RP.
- In OSPF, a router, selected by other routers, that is responsible for sending link-state advertisements (LSAs) that describe the network, thereby reducing the amount of network traffic and the size of the topology databases maintained on the other routers.

destination class usage

DCU. Means of tracking traffic originating from specific prefixes on the customer edge router and destined for specific prefixes on the provider core router, based on the IP source and destination addresses.

destination prefix length

Number of bits of the network address used for the host portion of a CIDR IP address.

destination service access point

DSAP. Identifies the destination for which a logical link control protocol data unit (LPDU) is intended.

device administrator

Person who uses an interface to control and manage a network security device.

device control process

dcd. Junos OS interface process (daemon).

device discovery rules

Sets of rules that define subnets or ranges of IP addresses to scan for devices in your network.

Device Management Interface

DMI. In NSM, a common, secure management interface used by all device families. DMI is based on a common protocol and device-specific schemas for configuration, inventory management, logging, and status monitoring. DMI schemas can be updated without the need to upgrade NSM.

Device Monitor

Displays information in NSM about individual devices, their configuration and connection status, and memory usage.

Device Server

In NSM, component of the management system that handles communication between the GUI server and the device, collects data from the managed devices on your network, formats configuration information sent to your managed device, and consolidates log and event data.

DF

do not fragment (bit). One-bit flag in the IP datagram header that specifies if a datagram should be fragmented. A value of zero (0) indicates to fragment the datagram; a value of one (1) indicates not to fragment the datagram.

DFC

dynamic flow capture. Process of collecting packet flows that match a particular filter list to one or more content destinations using an on-demand control protocol that relays requests from one or more control sources.

DHCP

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Mechanism through which hosts using TCP/IP can obtain protocol configuration parameters automatically from a DHCP server on the network; allocates IP addresses dynamically so that they can be reused when no longer needed.

DHCP equal access mode

Mode in which a DHCP local server works with the Juniper Networks Service Deployment System (SDX) software to provide an advanced subscriber configuration and management service. In equal access mode, the router enables access to non-PPP users. Non-PPP equal access requires the use of the E Series router DHCP local server and SDX software, which communicates with a RADIUS server.

DHCP external server

Server that enables an E Series router not running DHCP relay or DHCP proxy server to monitor DHCP packets and keep information for subscribers based on their IP and MAC addresses. When this server application is used, all DHCP traffic to and from the external server is monitored by the router. The services provided by integrating the E Series router DHCP external server application with SDX software are similar to those provided when the DHCP local server is integrated with SDX software. This application is used with other features of the router to provide subscriber management.

DHCP options

Configuration settings sent within a DHCP message from a DHCP server to a DHCP client.

DHCP proxy client

Configuration that enables the router to obtain an IP address from a DHCP server for a remote PPP client. Each virtual router (acting as a DHCP proxy client) can query up to five DHCP servers. For PPP users, the router acts as a DHCP client to obtain an address for the user.

DHCP relay client

Enhanced component of DHCP relay that manages host routes for DHCP clients, including selecting the single most appropriate offer from multiple DHCP servers.

DHCP server

Host that provides an IP address and configuration settings to a DHCP client. A J Series or SRX Series device is a DHCP server.

DHCP standalone mode

Mode in which the DHCP local server operates as a basic DHCP server. Clients are not authenticated by default; however, you can optionally configure the DHCP local server to use AAA authentication for the incoming clients.

dhcpd

DHCP process that implements the DHCP client, allowing the device to obtain IP addresses from the network DHCP server, set other configuration parameters, manage TCP/IP settings propagation, and display client-related information.

DI

Deep Inspection. Firewall methodology that builds on the strength of stateful inspection, integrating intrusion prevention technology to provide application-level attack protection at the network perimeter. The DI firewall can efficiently perform network security functions as well as analysis on the application message to determine whether to accept or deny traffic.

DI profile

Deep Inspection profile. Contains predefined attack object groups (created by Juniper Networks), and your own custom attack object groups. After creating the DI Profile, you add the Profile object in the Rule Option column of a firewall rule.

Diagnostic Mode

DM. Qualcomm protocol specification and mechanism used to collect debug logs from Sierra 3G wireless modem firmware.

dial backup

Feature that reestablishes network connectivity through one or more backup ISDN dialer interfaces after a primary interface fails. When the primary interface is reestablished, the ISDN interface is disconnected.

dial-in

Feature that enables a device to receive calls from the remote end of a backup ISDN connection. The remote end of the ISDN call might be a service provider, a corporate central location, or a customer premises equipment (CPE) branch office. All incoming calls can be verified against caller IDs configured on the router’s dialer interface. See also callback.

dial-on-demand routing (DDR) backup

Feature that provides a device with full-time connectivity across an ISDN line. When routes on a primary serial T1, E1, T3, E3, Fast Ethernet, or PPPoE interface are lost, an ISDN dialer interface establishes a backup connection. To save connection time costs, the Services Router drops the ISDN connection after a configured period of inactivity. Services Routers with ISDN interfaces support two types of dial-on-demand routing backup: on-demand routing with a dialer filter and dialer watch. See also dialer filter, dialer watch.

dial-out route

Route definition that contains the dial-out target, as well as a domain name and profile. The domain name is used in the initial Access Request message. The profile is used to create the IP/Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP) stack for the dial-out session.

dial-out session

Control entity for a triggered IP flow that is used to manage the establishment of an associated L2TP session for dial-out.

dial-out target

Virtual router context and an IP address prefix, for which the arrival of an IP packet (a dial-out trigger) initiates a dial-out session.

dial-out trigger

IP packet that initiates a dial-out session.

dialed number identification service

DNIS. If users have a called number associated with them, the router searches the domain map for the called number. If it finds a match, the router uses the matching domain map entry information to authenticate the user. If the router does not find a match, it searches the domain map using normal processing.

dialer filter

Stateless firewall filter that enables dial-on-demand routing backup when applied to a physical ISDN interface and its dialer interface is configured as a passive static route. The passive static route has a lower priority than dynamic routes. If all dynamic routes to an address are lost from the routing table and the router receives a packet for that address, the dialer interface initiates an ISDN backup connection and sends the packet over it. See also dial-on-demand routing (DDR) backup, floating static route.

dialer interface

Logical interface for configuring dialing properties and the control interface for a backup ISDN connection.

dialer pool

One or more physical interfaces that are associated with a dialer profile.

dialer profile

Set of characteristics configured for the ISDN dialer interface. Dialer profiles allow the configuration of physical interfaces to be separated from the logical configuration of dialer interfaces required for ISDN connectivity. This feature also allows physical and logical interfaces to be bound together dynamically on a per-connection basis.

dialer watch

Dial-on-demand routing (DDR) backup feature that provides reliable connectivity without relying on a dialer filter to activate the ISDN interface. The ISDN dialer interface monitors the existence of each route on a watch list. If all routes on the watch list are lost from the routing table, dialer watch initiates the ISDN interface for failover connectivity. See also dial-on-demand routing (DDR) backup.

DID

direct inward dialing. Feature of a trunk line that allows incoming calls to be routed directly to selected stations without help from an attendant.

Differentiated Services

DiffServ. An architecture that provides assured forwarding and expedited forwarding by classifying packets into one of a small number of aggregated flows or traffic classes for which you can configure different QoS characteristics. The Juniper Networks QoS architecture extends DiffServ to support edge features such as high-density queuing. DiffServ uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte to identify different packet flows on a packet-by-packet basis. DiffServ adds a Class Selector code point (CSCP) and a Differentiated Services code point (DSCP).

Differentiated Services aware

DiffServ-aware. Paradigm that gives different treatment to traffic based on the experimental (EXP) bits in the MPLS label header and allows you to provide multiple classes of service.

Differentiated Services code point

DSCP, DiffServ code point. Values for a 6-bit field defined for IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that can be used to enforce class-of-service (CoS) distinctions in routers.

Differentiated Services domain

Routers in a network that have Differentiated Services enabled.

Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering

Type of constraint-based routing that can enforce different bandwidth constraints for different classes of traffic. It can also do call admission control (CAC) on each traffic engineering class when a label-switched path (LSP) is established.

Diffie-Hellman key exchange

Feature of SSH that provides server authentication by protecting against hackers who interject mimics to obtain your password, so that you can be confident that you are connected to your own router. A method of key exchange whereby an algorithm negotiates a session key without sending the key itself across the network, by allowing each party to pick a partial key independently and send part of it to each other. Each side then calculates a common key value. This is a symmetrical method, and keys are typically used only for a short time, then discarded and regenerated.

DiffServ

Differentiated Services. An architecture based on RFC 2474, Definition of the Differentiated Services Field (DS Field) in the IPv4 and IPv6 Headers that provides assured forwarding and expedited forwarding by classifying packets into one of a small number of aggregated flows or traffic classes for which you can configure different QoS characteristics. The Juniper Networks QoS architecture extends DiffServ to support edge features such as high-density queuing. DiffServ uses the type-of-service (ToS) byte to identify different packet flows on a packet-by-packet basis. DiffServ adds a Class Selector code point (CSCP) and a Differentiated Services code point (DSCP).

DiffServ-aware

Paradigm that gives different treatment to traffic based on the experimental (EXP) bits in the MPLS label header and allows you to provide multiple classes of service.

digital certificate

Electronic file based on private and public key technology that verifies the identity of the certificate’s holder to protect data exchanged online. Digital certificates are issued by a certificate authority (CA).

digital signal

DS. Discontinuous signal used in direct sequence spread spectrum modulation, also known as direct sequence code division multiple access (DS-CDMA). DS-CDMA is one of two approaches to spread spectrum modulation for digital signal transmission over the airwaves. In direct sequence spread spectrum, the stream of information to be transmitted is divided into small pieces, each of which is allocated across to a frequency channel across the spectrum.

digital signal level 0

DS0. In T-carrier systems, a basic digital signaling rate of 64 Kbps. The DS0 rate forms the basis for the North American digital multiplex transmission hierarchy.

digital signal level 1

DS1. In T-carrier systems, a digital signaling rate of 1.544 Mbps. A standard used in telecommunications to transmit voice and data between devices. Also known as T1.

digital signal level 3

DS3. In T-carrier systems, a digital signaling rate of 44.736 Mbps. This level of carrier can transport 28 DS1 level signals and 672 DS0 level channels within its payload. See also T3.

Digital Signature Algorithm

DSA. Cryptographic standard used for authenticating electronic documents, much as a written signature verifies the authenticity of a paper document.

digital subscriber line

DSL. Technology that increases the digital capacity of standard telephone lines into the home or office and provides always-on Internet operation. See also ADSL, SDSL.

digital subscriber line access multiplexer

DSLAM. Network device directly connected to subscriber premises that handles the copper termination and aggregates traffic into a higher-speed uplink. The output from a DSLAM is fed into the router through a DS3 or OC3 link.

Dijkstra algorithm

Search algorithm often used in routing that determines a shortest path tree. See also SPF.

DIMM

dual inline memory module. A 168-pin memory module that supports 64-bit data transfer.

DIOD

direct inward and outward dialing. Feature of a trunk line that allows both incoming and outgoing calls to be routed directly without help from an attendant. See also direct inward dialing, DID, direct outward dialing, DOD.

direct inward and outward dialing

DIOD. Feature of a trunk line that allows both incoming and outgoing calls to be routed directly without help from an attendant. See also direct inward dialing, DID, direct outward dialing, DOD.

direct inward dialing

DID. Feature of a trunk line that allows incoming calls to be routed directly to selected stations without help from an attendant.

direct outward dialing

DOD. Feature of a trunk line that allows outgoing calls to be routed directly to selected stations without help from an attendant.

direct routes

Routes that are in the routing table because an interface has been configured with an IP address. Also called interface routes.

direct server access

First authentication or accounting server that you configure in RADIUS. This server is treated as the primary authentication or accounting server, the next server configured is the secondary, and so on. See also round-robin server access.

direct server return

DSR. In Juniper Networks Media Flow Controller, a method of handling TCP traffic using a proxy.

directive

In NSM, a command sent to managed devices. Directives include importing, updating, rebooting, and so on. When a command is sent to a device or group of devices, NSM creates a job for that command and displays information about that job in the NSM Job Manager.

DIS

designated intermediate system. An IS-IS router that is elected by priority on an interface basis. In the case of a tie, the router with the highest MAC address becomes the DIS. DIS is analogous to the designated router in OSPF, although the election process and adjacencies within multiaccess media differ significantly. DIS assists broadcast routers to synchronize their IS-IS databases.

disable

Method of modifying the router’s active configuration. When portions of the hierarchy are marked as disabled (mainly router interfaces), the router uses the configuration but ignores the disabled portions.

discard

Junos OS syntax command used in a routing policy or a firewall filter. The command halts the logical processing of the policy or filter when a set of match conditions is met. The specific route or IP packet is dropped from the network silently. It can also be a next-hop attribute assigned to a route in the routing table.

discard-eligible bit

DE. In a Frame Relay network, a header bit that notifies devices on the network that traffic can be dropped during congestion to ensure the delivery of higher priority traffic (those without the DE bit set).See also DE.

discrete multitone

DMT. Modulation method used by VDSL2 for separating a digital subscriber line signal so that the usable frequency range is divided into 256 frequency bands (or channels) of 4.3125 KHz each.

disk-on-key

Memory device (stick) that plugs into a USB port to load a complete Junos OS configuration with VoIP onto a Services Router. You must first use an Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet (EPW) to download the configuration to the disk-on-key device. The EPW and disk-on-key device provide an alternative method to configure the router for VoIP.

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol

DVMRP. Dynamically generates IP multicast delivery trees using a technique called reverse-path multicasting (RPM) to forward multicast traffic to downstream interfaces. An interior gateway protocol (IGP) that supports operations within an autonomous system (AS), but not between ASs. The multicast backbone of the Internet uses DVMRP to forward multicast datagrams. DVMRP is a dense-mode multicasting protocol and therefore uses a broadcast-and-prune mechanism. See also dense mode.

distance-vector

Method used in Bellman-Ford routing protocols to determine the best path to all routers in the network. Each router determines the distance (metric) to the destination and the vector (next hop) to follow.

distance-vector routing

One of two major dynamic routing classes, requires each router to inform its neighbors of its routing table. For each network path, the receiving router picks the neighbor advertising the lowest metric, then adds this entry into its routing table for readvertisement. This method has less computational complexity and less message overhead than the other major class (link-state routing).

distributed denial of service attack

DDoS. Attack, typically a flood, from multiple source points. A DDoS attack can be more effective in disrupting services than a DoS, because the flood of incoming attacks are coming from multiple sources.

distributed port scan

Denial of service attack that uses multiple source addresses to scan ports on a network.

distribution list

List that controls routing information that is accepted or transmitted to peer routers. Distribution lists always use access lists to identify routes for distribution. For example, distribution lists can use access lists to specify routes to advertise. See also access lists.

DLCI

data-link connection identifier. 10-bit channel number attached to data frames to inform a Frame Relay network how to route the data in a Frame Relay virtual connection (a logical interface).

DLSw

data link switching. Method of tunneling IBM System Network Architecture (SNA) and NetBIOS traffic over an IP network, used because the Junos OS does not support NetBIOS. See also tunneling protocol.

DLSw circuit

Path formed by establishing data link control (DLC) connections between an end system and a local router configured for DLSw. Each DLSw circuit is identified by the circuit ID that includes the end system method authenticity code (MAC) address, local service access point (LSAP), and DLC port ID. Multiple DLSw circuits can operate over the same DLSw connection.

DLSw connection

Set of TCP connections between two DLSw peers that is established after the initial handshake and successful capabilities exchange.

DM

- Diagnostic Mode. Qualcomm protocol specification and mechanism used to collect debug logs from Sierra 3G wireless modem firmware.
- data model. In NSM, an XML file that contains configuration data for an individual device and is stored in the NSM Device Server. When you create, update, or import a device, the GUI Server edits the Abstract Data Model (ADM) to reflect the changes, then translates that information to the DM.

DMI

Device Management Interface. In NSM, a common, secure management interface used by all device families. DMI is based on a common protocol and device-specific schemas for configuration, inventory management, logging, and status monitoring. DMI schemas can be updated without the need to upgrade NSM.

DMT

discrete multitone. Modulation method used by VDSL2 for separating a digital subscriber line signal so that the usable frequency range is divided into 256 frequency bands (or channels) of 4.3125 KHz each.

DMZ

demilitarized zone. Physical or logical subnet used as an additional layer of security between an organization’s network and an untrusted network (often the Internet); a neutral zone used to secure a network from external access. An attacker only has access to equipment in the DMZ.

DNIS

dialed number identification service. If users have a called number associated with them, the router searches the domain map for the called number. If it finds a match, the router uses the matching domain map entry information to authenticate the user. If the router does not find a match, it searches the domain map using normal processing.

DNS

Domain Name System. A system that stores information about hostnames and domain names. It provides an IP address for each hostname and lists the e-mail exchange servers accepting e-mail addresses for each domain.

DNS-ALG

Domain Name System-Application Level Gateway. Facilitates name-to-address mapping over bidirectional NAT or twice NAT.

document type definition

DTD. Defines the elements and structure of an Extensible Markup Language (XML) document or data set.

DOD

direct outward dialing. Feature of a trunk line that allows outgoing calls to be routed directly to selected stations without help from an attendant.

domain

Logical grouping of devices, policies, and access privileges that can also contain templates, objects, VPNs, administrators, activities, authentication servers, and groups—a representation of all or a subset of the physical devices and functionality on a network. The domain at a level above a domain is the parent domain, and the domain at a level below a domain is the child domain. Domains at the same level are considered peer domains. Also refers to a collection of routers that use a common interior gateway protocol (IGP).

Domain Menu

In NMS, the pull-down menu above the navigation tree where domains and subdomains are selected.

Domain Name System

DNS. A system that stores information about hostnames and domain names. It provides an IP address for each hostname and lists the e-mail exchange servers accepting e-mail addresses for each domain.

domain-specific part

DSP. Section of the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) address that uniquely identifies a system on the network.

don’t fragment (bit)

DF. One-bit flag in the IP datagram header that specifies if a datagram should be fragmented. A value of zero (0) indicates to fragment the datagram; a value of one (1) indicates not to fragment the datagram.

DoS

denial of service. System security breach in which network services become unavailable to users.

DoS attack

denial-of-service attack. Any attempt to deny valid users access to network or server resources by using up all the resources of the network element or server. Typically, an attacker sends a flood of information to overwhelm a service system’s resources, causing the server to ignore valid service requests.

downstream-on-demand

Method of label distribution whereby MPLS devices do not signal a FEC-to-label binding until requested to do so by an upstream device. Downstream-on-demand conserves labels by not binding until needed, and the label-switching router (LSR) receives label bindings (also known as label mappings) from a neighbor that is the next hop to a destination. It is used when RSVP is the signaling protocol. See also downstream-unsolicited, independent control, ordered control.

downstream-unsolicited

Label distribution method whereby MPLS devices do not wait for a request from an upstream device before signaling FEC-to-label bindings. As soon as the LSR learns a route, it sends a binding for that route to all peer LSRs, both upstream and downstream. Downstream-unsolicited does not conserve labels, because an LSR receives label mappings from neighbors that might not be the next hop for the destination; it is used by BGP or LDP when adjacent peers are configured to use the platform label space. See also downstream-unsolicited, independent control, ordered control.

DPC

Dense Port Concentrator. Network interface–specific card that can be installed in the router.

DPD

dead peer detection. Method that recognizes the loss of the primary IPsec Internet Key Exchange (IKE) peer and establishes a secondary IPsec tunnel to a backup peer. It is a keepalive mechanism that enables the E Series router to detect when communication to a remote IPsec peer has been disconnected. DPD enables the router to reclaim resources and to optionally redirect traffic to an alternate failover destination. If DPD is not enabled, traffic continues to be sent to the unavailable destination. Also known as IKE keepalive.

DR

designated router.

- Router on a subnet that is selected to control multicast routes for the sources and receivers on the subnet. If several routers are present, the selected DR is the router with the highest priority. If the DR priorities match, the router with the highest IP address is selected as the DR. The source’s DR sends PIM register messages from the source network to the rendezvous point (RP). The receiver’s DR sends PIM join and PIM prune messages from the receiver network toward the RP.
- In OSPF, a router, selected by other routers, that is responsible for sending link-state advertisements (LSAs) that describe the network, thereby reducing the amount of network traffic and the size of the topology databases maintained on the other routers.

drop probability

Percentage value that expresses the likelihood that an individual packet will be dropped from the network. See also drop profile.

drop profile

Template that defines parameters that allow packets to be dropped from the network, controlling the dropping behavior of a set of egress queues. The profile defines the range within the queue where random early detection (RED) operates, the maximum percentage of packets to drop, and the sensitivity to bursts of packets. Weighted random early detection (WRED) is an extension to RED that enables an administrator to assign different RED drop profiles to each color of traffic. When you configure drop profiles, there are two important values: the queue fullness and the drop probability. See also drop probability, queue fullness, RED.

DS

- digital signal. Discontinuous signal used in direct sequence spread spectrum modulation, also known as direct sequence code division multiple access (DS-CDMA). DS-CDMA is one of two approaches to spread spectrum modulation for digital signal transmission over the airwaves. In direct sequence spread spectrum, the stream of information to be transmitted is divided into small pieces, each of which is allocated across to a frequency channel across the spectrum.
- Differentiated Services (field). The IPv4 header ToS octet or the IPv6 Traffic Class octet used to mark packets to enable differentiated services. See also DiffServ.

DS-BGP

dual-stack Border Gateway Protocol router. Router that runs both the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocol stack. DS-BGP routers are typically used to connect IPv6 islands across IPv4 clouds.

DS0

digital signal level 0. In T-carrier systems, a basic digital signaling rate of 64 Kbps. The DS0 rate forms the basis for the North American digital multiplex transmission hierarchy.

DS1

digital signal level 1. In T-carrier systems, a digital signaling rate of 1.544 Mbps. A standard used in telecommunications to transmit voice and data between devices. Also known as T1.

DS3

digital signal level 3. In T-carrier systems, a digital signaling rate of 44.736 Mbps. This level of carrier can transport 28 DS1 level signals and 672 DS0 level channels within its payload. Also known as T3.

DSA

Digital Signature Algorithm. Cryptographic standard used for authenticating electronic documents, much as a written signature verifies the authenticity of a paper document.

DSAP

destination service access point. Identifies the destination for which a logical link control protocol data unit (LPDU) is intended.

DSCP

Differentiated Services code point, DiffServ code point. Values for a 6-bit field defined for IPv4 and IPv6 packet headers that can be used to enforce class-of-service (CoS) distinctions in routers.

DSI

dynamic subscriber interface. Associated with a primary IP interface and dynamically created in response to an external event, such as packet detection or a DHCP event.

DSL

digital subscriber line. Technology that increases the digital capacity of standard telephone lines into the home or office and provides always-on Internet operation. See also ADSL, SDSL.

DSLAM

digital subscriber line access multiplexer. Network device directly connected to subscriber premises that handles the copper termination and aggregates traffic into a higher-speed uplink. The output from DSLAMs is fed into the router through a DS3 or OC3 link.

DSP

domain-specific part. Section of the Network Service Access Point (NSAP) address that uniquely identifies a system on the network.

DSR

- data set ready. One of the control signals on a standard RS-232C connector that indicates whether the DCE is connected and ready to start.
- direct server return. In Juniper Networks Media Flow Controller, a method of handling TCP traffic using a proxy.

DSU

data service unit. Device used to connect a DTE to a digital phone line. DSU converts digital data from a router to voltages and encoding required by the phone line. See also CSU/DSU.

DTCP

Dynamic Tasking Control Protocol. Means of communicating filter requests and acknowledgments between one or more clients and a monitoring platform, used in dynamic flow capture (DFC) and flow-tap configurations. The protocol is defined in Internet draft draft-cavuto-dtcp-00.txt, DTCP: Dynamic Tasking Control Protocol.

DTD

document type definition. Defines the elements and structure of an Extensible Markup Language (XML) document or data set.

DTE

data terminal equipment. RS-232-C interface that a computer uses to exchange information with a serial device, such as a computer, host, or terminal, that communicates with DCE. At the terminal end of a data transmission, DTE comprises the transmit and receive equipment. See also DCE.

DTR signal

data terminal ready signal. Sent over a dedicated wire (RS-232 connection) from a computer (or terminal) to a transmission device to indicate that the computer is ready to receive data.

dual-core processor

Two process execution systems located on the same physical processor. The dual-core processor architecture enables faster computing speed and greater data throughput.

dual-stack Border Gateway Protocol

DS-BGP. Router that runs both the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocol stack. DS-BGP routers are typically used to connect IPv6 islands across IPv4 clouds.

duplex mode

Transmission and reception of signals in both directions. See also full-duplex mode, half-duplex mode.

duplicate accounting server

In RADIUS, a server that sends the accounting information to a particular router. You might use duplicate accounting to send the accounting information to a customer’s accounting server. See also broadcast accounting server.

DVMRP

Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol. Dynamically generates IP multicast delivery trees using a technique called reverse-path multicasting (RPM) to forward multicast traffic to downstream interfaces. An interior gateway protocol (IGP) that supports operations within an autonomous system (AS), but not between ASs. The multicast backbone of the Internet uses DVMRP to forward multicast datagrams. DVMRP is a dense-mode multicasting protocol and therefore uses a broadcast-and-prune mechanism. See also dense mode.

DVMRP tunnels

Allow the exchange of IP multicast traffic between routers separated by networks that do not support multicast routing.

DWDM

dense wavelength division multiplexing. Technology that enables data from different sources to be carried together on an optical fiber, with each signal carried on its own separate wavelength.

DXI

data exchange interface. Specification developed by the switched megabit data services (SMDS) interest group to define the interaction between internetworking devices and CSUs/DSUs that are transmitting over an SMDS access line.

dynamic CAC

Dynamic call admission control application that blocks calls on a WAN interface when the bandwidth is exhausted. See also call admission control, CAC.

dynamic encapsulation lockout

Mechanism that temporarily prevents an ATM 1483 subinterface from autodetecting, accepting, and creating dynamic interface columns for a configurable time period.

dynamic flow capture

DFC. Process of collecting packet flows that match a particular filter list to one or more content destinations using an on-demand control protocol that relays requests from one or more control sources.

Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol

DHCP. Mechanism through which hosts using TCP/IP can obtain protocol configuration parameters automatically from a DHCP server on the network; allocates IP addresses dynamically so that they can be reused when no longer needed.

dynamic interface

Type of interface created through an external event, typically through the receipt of data over a lower-layer link, such as an ATM virtual circuit. The layers of a dynamic interface are created based on the packets received on the link and can be configured through RADIUS authentication, profiles, or a combination of RADIUS authentication and profiles. See also static interface.

dynamic label-switched path (LSP)

MPLS network path established by signaling protocols such as RSVP and LDP.

dynamic oversubscription

Mechanism that enables the router to vary queue thresholds based on the amount of egress buffer memory in use. See also bandwidth oversubscription, static oversubscription.

dynamic routing

Method that adjusts to changing network circumstances by analyzing incoming routing update messages. If a message indicates that a network change has occurred, the routing software recalculates routes and sends out new routing update messages, using different routes, based on current conditions of communications circuits. There are two common forms of dynamic routing: distance vector routing and link state routing.

dynamic subscriber interface

DSI. Associated with a primary IP interface and dynamically created in response to an external event, such as packet detection or a DHCP event.

Dynamic Tasking Control Protocol

DTCP. Means of communicating filter requests and acknowledgments between one or more clients and a monitoring platform, used in dynamic flow capture (DFC) and flow-tap configurations. The protocol is defined in Internet draft draft-cavuto-dtcp-00.txt, DTCP: Dynamic Tasking Control Protocol.

dynamic translation

One of two NAT methods used to assign a translated IP address. This method uses access list rules and NAT address pools. Use it when you want the NAT router to initiate and manage address translation and session flows between address realms on demand.

dynamic tunnel-server ports

Module that supports dynamic tunnel-server ports. It provides both tunnel services and regular access services. Also known as shared tunnel-server module.

### E

E-carrier

European carrier. Standards that form part of the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), in which groups of E1 circuits are bundled onto higher-capacity E3 links between telephone exchanges or countries. E-carrier standards are used just about everywhere in the world except North America and Japan, and are incompatible with the T-carrier standards.

E-LSP

EXP-inferred PSC-LSP. One of two types of LSPs used by MPLS to support differentiated services. The EXP field of the MPLS shim header is used to determine the per-hop behavior applied to the packet. See also L-LSP, shim header.

E1

High-speed WAN digital communication protocol that operates at a rate of 2.048 Mbps.

E3

High-speed WAN digital communication protocol that operates at a rate of 34.368 Mbps and uses time-division multiplexing to carry 16 E1 circuits.

EAL3

Common Criteria Evaluation Assurance Level 3. Compliance requirement defined by Common Criteria. Higher levels have more stringent requirements. See also Common Criteria.

EAP

Extensible Authentication Protocol. Industry standard for network access that acts as a transport for multiple authentication methods or types. Defined by RFC 2284, PPP Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).

early packet discard

EPD. For ATM2 interfaces only, a limit on the number of transmit packets that can be queued. Packets that exceed the limit are dropped. See also queue length.

EBGP

External Border Gateway Protocol. Configuration in which sessions are established between routers in different autonomous systems (ASs).

EBGP session

External Border Gateway Protocol session. Session between two BGP speakers that are in different autonomous systems. EBGP sessions typically exist between peers that are physically connected. See also IBGP session.

ECC

error checking and correction; error-checking code. Process of detecting errors during the transmission or storage of digital data and correcting them automatically. This usually involves sending or storing extra bits of data according to specified algorithms.

ECMP

equal-cost multipath. Traffic load-balancing feature that enables traffic to the same destination to be distributed over multiple paths that have the same cost.

ECP

Encryption Control Protocol. Responsible for configuring and enabling data encryption algorithms on both ends of a PPP link.

ECSA

Exchange Carriers Standards Association. Organization created after the divestiture of the Bell System to represent the interests of interexchange carriers.

edge cache

Appliance between the Internet and the end user, nearer to the end user, that caches and delivers content such as Java scripts, common channel signaling (CSS), images, and so on. This frees up Web servers for other processes. When Media Flow Controller is used as an edge cache, it is effectively a “reverse proxy,” that provides these benefits: reduces the network and CPU load on an origin server by servicing previously retrieved content, and enhances the user experience due to a decrease in latency.

edge router

In MPLS, the router located at the beginning or end of a label-switching tunnel. When at the beginning of a tunnel, it applies labels to new packets entering the tunnel. When at the end of a tunnel, it removes labels from packets exiting the tunnel. See also MPLS.

editor macros (Emacs)

Shortcut keystrokes used within the router’s command-line interface (CLI). These macros move the cursor and delete characters based on the sequence you specify.

EEPROM

electrically erasable programmable read-only memory. Chip used to store small amounts of configuration data.

effective weight

Result of a weight or an assured rate. Users configure the scheduler node by specifying either an assured rate or a weight within a scheduler profile. An assured rate, in bits per second, is translated into a weight, referred to as an effective weight.

EGP

exterior gateway protocol. Distributes routing information to routers that connect separate autonomous systems. See also IGP, BGP.

egress

Outbound, referring to packets exiting a device. See also ingress.

egress router

In MPLS, the last router in a label-switched path (LSP). See also ingress router.

EIA

Electronic Industries Association. United States trade group that represents manufacturers of electronic devices and sets standards and specifications.

EIA-530

Serial interface that employs the EIA-530 standard for the interconnection of DTE and DCE equipment.

EIR

equipment identity register. Mobile network database that contains information about devices using the network.

electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

EEPROM. Chip used to store small amounts of configuration data.

electromagnetic interference

EMI. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics or electrical equipment.

Electronic Industries Association

EIA. United States trade group that represents manufacturers of electronic devices and sets standards and specifications.

Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet

EPW. Customized Microsoft Excel spreadsheet used with a disk-on-key USB memory stick to configure VoIP on a Services Router. You download the EPW from an Avaya website.

Electronic Serial Number

ESN. Standardized code that uniquely identifies a mobile device. It can be printed on the device and is also digitally assigned to the device’s firmware, and can be displayed by using a command such as show modem wireless interface firmware.

electrostatic discharge

ESD. Stored static electricity that can damage electronic equipment and impair electrical circuitry when released.

electrostatic discharge wrist strap

ESD wrist strap. Strap with a metal contact that is tied to the user’s wrist in order to channel static electricity to a proper ground when the user handles sensitive computer equipment.

embedded OS software

Software used by a router to operate the physical router components.

embedded system

Special-purpose computer system designed to perform one or a few dedicated functions, usually embedded as part of a complete device that includes hardware and mechanical parts.

emergency transfer relay

ETR. Feature that provides an emergency link between the telephone connected to the first line port on the TGM550 and the trunk connected to the trunk port on the TGM550 if power is disconnected from the Services Router or if the TGM550 becomes unregistered from its Media Gateway Controller (MGC).

EMI

electromagnetic interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics or electrical equipment.

Encapsulating Security Payload

ESP. Protocol for securing packet flows for IPsec using encryption, data integrity checks, and sender authentication, which are added as a header to an IP packet. If an ESP packet is successfully decrypted, and no other party knows the secret key the peers share, the packet was not wiretapped in transit. See also AH.

encryption

Process of changing data into a form that can be read only by the intended receiver. A software mechanism that makes data confidential by making it unreadable to everyone except the sender and the intended recipient. The receiver of the encrypted message must have the correct decryption key to decipher the message.

Encryption Control Protocol

ECP. Responsible for configuring and enabling data encryption algorithms on both ends of a PPP link.

end system

ES. Any nonrouting network node or host in OSI internetworking. See also intermediate system.

End System-to-Intermediate System

ES-IS. Protocol that resolves Layer 3 ISO network service access points (NSAPs) to Layer 2 addresses. ES-IS resolution is similar to the way ARP resolves Layer 2 addresses for IPv4.

endpoint discriminator

LCP negotiation option that identifies the system or device transmitting the packet.

enterprise MIB

SNMP term for a MIB defined by a single vendor. In addition to providing consistency of management data representation across that vendor’s product line, the enterprise MIB also accounts for proprietary functions and value-added features not addressed by standard MIBs.

EPD

early packet discard. For ATM2 interfaces only, a limit on the number of transmit packets that can be queued. Packets that exceed the limit are dropped. See also queue length.

EPW

Electronic Preinstallation Worksheet. Customized Microsoft Excel spreadsheet used with a disk-on-key USB memory stick to configure VoIP on a Services Router. You download the EPW from an Avaya website.

equal access mode

Mode in which a DHCP local server works with the Juniper Networks Service Deployment System (SDX) software to provide an advanced subscriber configuration and management service. In equal access mode, the router enables access to non-PPP users. Non-PPP equal access requires the use of the E Series router DHCP local server and SDX software, which communicates with a RADIUS server.Also known as DHCP equal access mode.

equal-cost multipath

ECMP. Traffic load-balancing feature that enables traffic to the same destination to be distributed over multiple paths that have the same cost.

ERO

Explicit Route Object. Extension to RSVP that allows an RSVP PATH message to traverse an explicit sequence of routers that is independent of conventional shortest-path IP routing.

error checking and correction

ECC, error checking code. Process of detecting errors during the transmission or storage of digital data and correcting them automatically. This usually involves sending or storing extra bits of data according to specified algorithms.

error checking code

ECC, error checking and correction. Process of detecting errors during the transmission or storage of digital data and correcting them automatically. This usually involves sending or storing extra bits of data according to specified algorithms.

errored frame

Frame with one or more bits with errors. This frame will be dropped at the next Ethernet node and become a lost frame.

errored second

Period of a second with one or more errored or lost frames.

ES

end system. Any nonrouting network node or host in OSI internetworking. See also intermediate system.

ES-IS

End System-to-Intermediate System. Protocol that resolves Layer 3 ISO network service access points (NSAPs) to Layer 2 addresses. ES-IS resolution is similar to the way ARP resolves Layer 2 addresses for IPv4.

ESD

electrostatic discharge. Stored static electricity that can damage electronic equipment and impair electrical circuitry when released.

ESD wrist strap

electrostatic discharge wrist strap. Strap with a metal contact that is tied to the user’s wrist in order to channel static electricity to a proper ground when the user handles sensitive computer equipment.

ESN

Electronic Serial Number. Standardized code that uniquely identifies a mobile device. It can be printed on the device and is also digitally assigned to the device’s firmware, and can be displayed by using a command such as show modem wireless interface firmware.

ESP

Encapsulating Security Payload. Protocol for securing packet flows for IPsec using encryption, data integrity checks, and sender authentication, which are added as a header to an IP packet. If an ESP packet is successfully decrypted, and no other party knows the secret key the peers share, the packet was not wiretapped in transit. See also AH.

established

BGP neighbor state that represents a fully functional BGP peering session.

Ethernet

Local area network (LAN) technology used for transporting information from one location to another, formalized in the IEEE standard 802.3. Ethernet uses either coaxial cable or twisted-pair cable. Transmission speeds for data transfer range from the original 10 Mbps (10BaseT), to Fast Ethernet at 100 Mbps, to Gigabit Ethernet at 1000 Mbps.

Ethernet link aggregation

. Process that enables grouping of Ethernet interfaces at the physical layer to form a single link layer interface. Also known as 802.3ad link aggregation, a link aggregation group (LAG), or LAG bundle.

ETR

emergency transfer relay. Feature that provides an emergency link between the telephone connected to the first line port on the TGM550 and the trunk connected to the trunk port on the TGM550 if power is disconnected from the Services Router or if the TGM550 becomes unregistered from its Media Gateway Controller (MGC).

ETSI

European Telecommunications Standardization Institute. Nonprofit organization that produces voluntary telecommunications standards used throughout Europe.

European carrier

E-carrier. Standards that form part of the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH), in which groups of E1 circuits are bundled onto higher-capacity E3 links between telephone exchanges or countries. E-carrier standards are used just about everywhere in the world except North America and Japan, and are incompatible with the T-carrier standards.

European Telecommunications Standardization Institute

ETSI. Nonprofit organization that produces voluntary telecommunications standards used throughout Europe.

EV-DO

Evolution-Data Optimized. Telecommunications standard for transmitting data through radio signals.

event categories

Classification groups and severity levels for system events that can be used to track system changes. Severity levels (categories) include: Emergency, Alert, Critical, Error, Warning, Notice, Info, and Debug.

event ID

event identifier. System log message code that uniquely identifies a system log message. The code begins with a prefix indicating the software process or library that generated the event.

event MIB

Enables you to create trigger conditions, test those conditions, and determine which action to take when a trigger meets those conditions, for object integers accessible in the SNMP agent, making it possible to monitor any aspect of a device without defining specific notifications. See also event table (mteEventTable), objects table (mteObjectsTable), SNMP Server Event Manager, trigger table (mteTriggerTable).

event policy process

eventd. Process that performs configured actions in response to events on a routing platform that trigger system log messages.

event table (mteEventTable)

SNMP term for a table that defines which action you want a device to take when a trigger occurs. This action can be in the form of a notification, setting a specified MIB object, or both. The results of these actions are controlled within two subordinate MIB tables—notification and set. One of the three parts of the Event MIB. See also objects table (mteObjectsTable), trigger table (mteTriggerTable).

eventd

Event policy process that performs configured actions in response to events on a routing platform that trigger system log messages.

events

system events. System changes that can be classified into log event categories and that can be used for tracking purposes.

Evolution-Data Optimized

EV-DO. Telecommunications standard for transmitting data through radio signals.

exact

Junos OS routing policy match type that represents only the route specified in a route filter.

exceeded action

In a rate-limit profile, an action that drops, transmits, marks (IP and IPv6), or marks-exp (MPLS) when traffic flow exceeds the rate. The mark value is not supported for hierarchical rate limits, and the transmit values conditional, unconditional, and final are supported only on hierarchical rate limits.

exception packet

IP packet that is not processed by the normal packet flow through the Packet Forwarding Engine. Exception packets include local delivery information, expired TTL packets, and packets with an IP option specified.

exchange

OSPF adjacency state in which two neighboring routers are actively sending database description packets to each other to exchange their database contents.

Exchange Carriers Standards Association

ECSA. Organization created after the divestiture of the Bell System to represent the interests of interexchange carriers.

exclusive or

XOR. Logical operator (exclusive disjunction) in which the operation yields the result of true when one, and only one, of its operands is true.

Exec mode

CLI mode assigned to a user that determines which functions that user can perform when logged in to the system. See also Global Configuration mode, Privileged Exec mode, privileged level, User Exec mode

EXP bits

Experimental bits, also known as the class-of-service (CoS) bits, located in each MPLS label and used to encode the CoS value of a packet as it traverses an LSP.

EXP-inferredPSC-LSP

E-LSP. One of two types of LSPs used by MPLS to support differentiated services. The EXP field of the MPLS shim header is used to determine the per-hop behavior applied to the packet. See also L-LSP, shim header.

explicit path

Also known as signaled path. In traffic engineering, a specific, defined path determined using RSVP signaling. The Explicit Route Object carried in the packets contains the explicit path information.

Explicit Route Object

ERO. Extension to RSVP that allows an RSVP PATH message to traverse an explicit sequence of routers that is independent of conventional shortest-path IP routing.

explicit routing

Subset of constraint-based routing where the constraint is an explicit route: the route the LSP takes is defined by the ingress node.

explicit shared shaper

Type of shared shaper in which you select the active constituents in a scheduler profile. A subset of the interface traffic is shaped to the shared rate. See also implicit shared shaper, shared shaping.

export

Placing of routes from the routing table into a routing protocol.

export map

Route map applied to a VRF to modify or filter routes exported from the VRF to the global BGP VPN routing information base (RIB) in the parent virtual router (VR). See also import map.

export rules

When you have two or more virtual routers on a security device, you can configure export rules that define which routes on one virtual router are allowed to learned by another virtual router. See also import rules.

ExStart

OSPF adjacency state in which the neighboring routers negotiate to determine which router is in charge of the synchronization process.

Extensible Authentication Protocol

EAP. Industry standard for network access that acts as a transport for multiple authentication methods or types. Defined by RFC 2284, PPP Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP).

Extensible Markup Language

XML. Used for defining a set of markers, called tags, that define the function and hierarchical relationships of the parts of a document or data set.

Extensible Stylesheet Language for Transformations

XSLT. Standard for processing XML data developed by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). XSLT performs XML-to-XML transformations, turning an input XML hierarchy into an output XML hierarchy. The XSLT specification is on the W3C Web site at http://www.w3c.org/TR/xslt.

exterior gateway protocol

EGP. Distributes routing information to routers that connect separate autonomous systems. See also IGP, BGP.

External Border Gateway Protocol, external BGP

EBGP. Configuration in which sessions are established between routers in different autonomous systems (ASs).

External Data Representation Standard

XDR. Standard for the description and encoding of data. XDR can be used to transfer data between computers.

external metric

Cost included in a route when OSPF exports route information from external autonomous systems. There are two types of external metrics: Type 1 and Type 2. Type 1 external metrics are equivalent to the link-state metric; that is, the cost of the route, used in the internal autonomous system. Type 2 external metrics are greater than the cost of any path internal to the autonomous system.

external neighbors

Two BGP routers that are peers, and reside in two different autonomous systems.

extranet

Private network that connects two or more intranets, allowing secure sharing of a part of a business’s information with users outside the company, for example, allowing two or more companies or users to share resources and communicate over the Internet in their own virtual space. This technology greatly enhances business-to-business communications.

### F

FA

forwarding adjacency. RSVP LSP tunnel through which one or more other RSVP LSPs can be tunneled.

fabric schedulers

Identify a packet as high or low priority based on its forwarding class, and associate schedulers with the fabric priorities.

facilities data link

FDL. Type of message that can be used to determine the status of a line and to display statistics for the remote end of a connection.

facility

Group of system log messages that either are generated by the same software process (such as accounting statistics) or that concern a similar condition or activity (such as authentication attempts.)

failover

Process by which a standby or secondary system component automatically takes over the functions of an active or primary component when the primary component fails or is temporarily shut down or removed for servicing. During failover, the system continues to perform normal operations with little or no interruption in service. See also GRES, switchover.

false positive

Any situation in which benign traffic causes an IDS (intrusion detection system) to generate an alert. Also known as false alert.

far-end alarm and control

FEAC. T3 signal used to send alarm or status information from the far-end terminal back to the near-end terminal, and to initiate T3 loopbacks at the far-end terminal from the near-end terminal.

Fast Ethernet

Term encompassing a number of Ethernet standards that carry traffic at the nominal rate of 100 Mbps, instead of the original Ethernet speed of 10 Mbps. See also Ethernet, Gigabit Ethernet.

fast port

Fast Ethernet port on a J4300 Services Router, and either a Fast Ethernet port or DS3 port on a J6300 Services Router. Only enabled ports are counted. A two-port Fast Ethernet PIM with one enabled port counts as one fast port. The same PIM with both ports enabled counts as two fast ports.

fast reroute

Mechanism for automatically rerouting traffic on an LSP if a node or link in an LSP fails, thus reducing the loss of packets traveling over the LSP.

FBF

filter-based forwarding. Filter that classifies packets to determine their forwarding path within a router. FBF is used to redirect traffic for analysis.

FCS

frame check sequence. Calculation added to a frame for error control. FCS is used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and other data-link layer protocols.

FDDI

Fiber Distributed Data Interface. Set of ANSI protocols for sending digital data over fiber-optic cable. FDDI networks are token-passing networks, and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps (100 million bits). FDDI networks are typically used as backbones for wide area networks.

FDL

facilities data link. Type of message that can be used to determine the status of a line and to display statistics for the remote end of a connection.

FEAC

far-end alarm and control. T3 signal used to send alarm or status information from the far-end terminal back to the near-end terminal, and to initiate T3 loopbacks at the far-end terminal from the near-end terminal.

FEB

Forwarding Engine Board. In M5 and M10 routers, provides route lookup, filtering, and switching to the destination port.

FEC

forwarding equivalence class. Set of packets with similar or identical characteristics that are forwarded in the same manner, on the same path, with the same forwarding treatment, and using the same MPLS label. FECs are defined in the base LDP specification and can be extended through the use of additional parameters. FECs are also represented in other label distribution protocols.

FECN

forward explicit congestion notification. In a Frame Relay network, a header bit transmitted by the source device requesting that the destination device slow down its requests for data. FECN and BECN minimize the possibility that packets will be discarded when more packets arrive than can be handled. See also BECN.

Federal Information Processing Standards

FIPS. Defines, among other things, security levels for computer and networking equipment. FIPS is usually applied to military environments.

FIB

forwarding information base. In the JunosE Software, the IP routing table. Referred to in the context of BGP.

Fiber Distributed Data Interface

FDDI. Set of ANSI protocols for sending digital data over fiber-optic cable. FDDI networks are token-passing networks, and support data rates of up to 100 Mbps (100 million bits). FDDI networks are typically used as backbones for wide area networks.

field-programmable gate array

FPGA. Semiconductor device that contains programmable logic components and interconnects. Also a category of hardware classifier.

field-replaceable unit

FRU. Router component that customers can replace onsite.

FIFO

first in, first out. Scheduling method in which the first data packet stored in the queue is the first data packet removed from the queue. All Junos OS interface queues operate in this mode by default.

file system synchronization mode

Default behavior mode for E Series routers that contain redundant SRP modules, and available only to SRP modules. Characteristics of this mode include:

- Files and data in nonvolatile storage (NVS) remain synchronized between the primary (active) SRP module and standby SRP module.
- SRP modules reload all line modules and restart from saved configuration files.
- If the active SRP module switches over to the standby SRP, the router cold-restarts as follows: all line modules are reloaded; user connections are lost; forwarding through the chassis stops until the router SRP module recovers; the standby SRP module boots from the last known good configuration from NVS.

See also high availability mode, switchover.

File Transfer Protocol

FTP. Application protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol stack. Used for transferring files between network nodes. FTP is defined in RFC 959, File Transfer Protocol.

filter

Process or device that screens packets based on certain characteristics, such as source address, destination address, or protocol, and forwards or discards packets that match the filter. Filters are used to control data packets or local packets. See also packet.

filter-based forwarding

FBF. Filter that classifies packets to determine their forwarding path within a router. FBF is used to redirect traffic for analysis.

FIPS

Federal Information Processing Standards. Defines, among other things, security levels for computer and networking equipment. FIPS is usually applied to military environments.

firewall

Security gateway positioned between two networks, usually between a trusted network and the Internet; a means of controlling access to a network to protect it from misuse and malicious intent from other users (for example, denial-of-service attacks). A firewall ensures that all traffic that crosses it conforms to the organization’s security policy. Firewalls track and control communications, deciding whether to pass, reject, discard, encrypt, or log them. Firewalls also can be used to secure sensitive portions of a local network.

firewall action

Action performed by a security device when the device receives traffic that matches the direction, source, destination, and service. Firewall actions include permit, deny, reject.

firewall filter

At the firewall, a policy that evaluates the context of connections and permits or denies traffic based on the context, updating this information dynamically. Context includes IP source and destination addresses, port numbers, TCP sequencing information, and TCP connection flags. The context established in the first packet of a TCP session must match the context contained in all subsequent packets if a session is to remain active. See also stateful firewall filter, stateless firewall filter.

firmware

Instructions and data programmed directly into the circuitry of a hardware device for the purpose of controlling the device. Firmware is used for vital programs that must not be lost when the device is powered off.

first in, first out

FIFO. Scheduling method in which the first data packet stored in the queue is the first data packet removed from the queue. All Junos OS interface queues operate in this mode by default.

flap damping

Method of reducing the number of update messages sent between BGP peers, thereby reducing the load on those peers without adversely affecting the route convergence time for stable routes. See also damping.

flapping

route flapping. Condition of network instability where a route is announced and withdrawn repeatedly, often as the result of an intermittently failing link.

flexible bandwidth allocation

Technique to temporarily provide additional capacity on a link to handle bursts in data, videoconferencing, or other variable bit rate applications. Also known as bandwidth on demand.

Flexible PIC Concentrator

FPC. An interface concentrator on which physical interface cards (PICs) are mounted. An FPC is inserted into a slot in a Juniper Networks router. See also PIC.

floating static route

Route with an administrative distance greater than the administrative distance of the dynamically learned versions of the same route. The static route is used only when the dynamic routes are no longer available. When a floating static route is configured on an interface with a dialer filter, the interface can be used for backup.

flood and prune

Method of forwarding multicast data packets in a dense-mode network. Flooding and pruning occur every 3 minutes.

flooding

Distribution and synchronization of the link-state database between OSPF routers.

flow

Stream of routing information and packets that are handled by the Routing Engine and the Packet Forwarding Engine. The Routing Engine handles the flow of routing information between the routing protocols and the routing tables and between the routing tables and the forwarding tables, as well as the flow of local packets from the router physical interfaces to the Routing Engine. The Packet Forwarding Engine handles the flow of data packets into and out of the router physical interfaces.

flow collection interface

Interface that combines multiple cflowd records into a compressed ASCII data file and exports the file to an FTP server for storage and analysis, allowing users to manipulate the output from traffic monitoring operations.

flow control action

Junos OS syntax used in a routing policy or firewall filter. It alters the default logical processing of the policy or filter when a set of match conditions is met.

flow monitoring

Application that monitors the flow of traffic and enables lawful interception of packets transiting between two routers. Traffic flows can be passively monitored by an offline router or actively monitored by a router participating in the network.

flow tracking

Method of reducing false positives, it correlates multiple TCP (Transmission Control Protocol) or UDP (User Datagram Protocol) connections into a single flow to determine the validity of the traffic.

flow-tap application

Uses Dynamic Tasking Control Protocol (DTCP) requests to intercept IPv4 packets in an active monitoring router and send a copy of packets that match filter criteria to one or more content destinations. Flow-tap configurations can be used in flexible trend analysis for detecting new security threats and for lawfully intercepting data.

flowd

Flow-based packet forwarding process that applies ingress interface filters and policers to packets entering the device. The flowd establishes the state of the packet's session and manages the packet as it transits the security flow and associated features, applying output filtering and traffic shaping before transmitting the packet out the egress interface.

forward explicit congestion notification

FECN. In a Frame Relay network, a header bit transmitted by the source device requesting that the destination device slow down its requests for data. FECN and BECN minimize the possibility that packets will be discarded when more packets arrive than can be handled. See also BECN.

forwarding adjacency

FA. RSVP LSP tunnel through which one or more other RSVP LSPs can be tunneled.

forwarding classes

Defined set associated with each received packet on a router. These classes affect the forwarding, scheduling, and marking policies applied as the packet transits a routing platform. The forwarding class plus the loss priority define the per-hop behavior. Also known as ordered aggregates in the IETF Differentiated Services architecture.

Forwarding Engine Board

FEB. In M5 and M10 routers, provides route lookup, filtering, and switching to the destination port.

forwarding equivalence class

FEC. Set of packets with similar or identical characteristics that are forwarded in the same manner, on the same path, with the same forwarding treatment, and using the same MPLS label. FECs are defined in the base LDP specification and can be extended through the use of additional parameters. FECs are also represented in other label distribution protocols.

forwarding information base

FIB, forwarding table. In the JunosE Software, the IP routing table. Referred to in the context of BGP.

forwarding table

Table of best routes to all destinations reachable by the router. For each destination, the table has only the single best route to the destination selected from the IP routing table. The Junos OS routing protocol process installs active routes from its routing tables into the Routing Engine forwarding table. The kernel copies this forwarding table into the Packet Forwarding Engine, which determines which interface transmits the packets.

forwarding table entry

FTE. Of all destinations reachable by the router, the single best route to a given destination selected from the IP routing table.

FPC

Flexible PIC Concentrator. An interface concentrator on which physical interface cards (PICs) are mounted. An FPC is inserted into a slot in a Juniper Networks router. See also PIC.

FPGA

field-programmable gate array. Semiconductor device that contains programmable logic components and interconnects. Also a category of hardware classifier.

FQDN

fully qualified domain name. The hostname and domain name for a specific system.

fractional E1

Interface that contains one or more of the 32 DS0 time slots that can be reserved from an E1 interface. (The first time slot is reserved for framing.)

fractional interface

Interface that contains one or more DS0 time slots reserved from an E1 or T1 interface, allowing service providers to provision part of the interface to one customer and the other part to another customer. The individual fractional interfaces connect to different destinations, and customers pay for only the bandwidth fraction used and not for the entire E1 or T1 interface. Fractional interfaces can be configured on both channelized PICs and PIMs and unchannelized, regular E1 and T1 PICs and PIMs.

fractional T1, fractional T1 channel

Interface that contains one or more of the 24 DS0 time slots that can be reserved from a T1 interface. A DS0 portion of a 24-DS0 T1 line. Fractional T1s enable you to separate out one DS0 line or combine several lines into bundles (usually in multilink PPP).

fragmentation

In TCP/IP, the process of breaking packets into the smallest maximum size packet data unit (PDU) supported by any of the underlying networks. Required when IP must transmit a large packet through a network that transmits smaller packets, or when the MTU size of the other network is smaller. In the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) reference model, this process is known as segmentation. For Junos OS applications, split Layer 3 packets can then be encapsulated in MLFR or MLPPP for transport.

fragmentation and assembly

- In Frame Relay, a feature that reduces excessive delays of Frame Relay packets by breaking them into smaller fragments that are then interleaved with real-time frames.
- In the Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MLPPP), fragmentation is the process by which a large packet is broken up into multiple smaller fragments for simultaneous transmission across multiple links of an MLPPP bundle. Reassembly is the process by which the destination router reassembles the fragments into the original packets.

frame check sequence

FCS. Calculation added to a frame for error control. FCS is used in HDLC, Frame Relay, and other data-link layer protocols.

Frame Relay

Public, connection-oriented packet service based on the core aspects of the Integrated Services Digital Network. It eliminates all processing at the network layer and greatly restricts data-link layer processing. Frame Relay is an efficient replacement for the older X.25 protocol that does not require explicit acknowledgment of each frame of data. It allows private networks to reduce costs by using shared facilities between the end-point switches of a network managed by a Frame Relay service provider. Individual data-link connection identifiers (DLCIs) are assigned to ensure that each customer receives only its own traffic.

Frame Relay Forum

FRF. Technical committee that promotes Frame Relay by negotiating agreements and developing standards.

Frame Relay LMI

Frame Relay local management interface. Provides the operator with configuration and status information relating to the Frame Relay VCs in operation. LMI specifies a polling mechanism to receive incremental and full-status updates from the network. The router can represent either side of the User-to-Network Interface (UNI) and supports unidirectional LMI. Bidirectional support for the Network-to-Network Interface (NNI) is also supported.

frequency-division multiplexed channel

Signals that are carried at different frequencies and transmitted over a single wire or wireless medium.

FRF

Frame Relay Forum. Technical committee that promotes Frame Relay by negotiating agreements and developing standards.

FRF.15

Implementation of MLFR using multiple virtual connections to aggregate logical bandwidth for end-to-end Frame Relay, defined by the Frame Relay Forum in End-to-End Multilink Frame Relay Implementation Agreement FRF.15.

FRF.16

Implementation of MLFR in which a single logical connection is provided by multiplexing multiple physical interfaces for user-to-network interface and network-to-network interface (UNI/NNI) connections. Defined by the Frame Relay Forum in Multilink Frame Relay UNI/NNI Implementation Agreement FRF.16.1.

FRU

field-replaceable unit. Router component that customers can replace onsite.

FTE

forwarding table entry. Of all destinations reachable by the router, the single best route to a given destination selected from the IP routing table.

FTP

File Transfer Protocol. Application protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol stack. Used for transferring files between network nodes. FTP is defined in RFC 959, File Transfer Protocol.

Full

OSPF adjacency state that represents a fully functional neighbor relationship.

full download

In virtual player functions, an HTTP media delivery method in which the entire media file is downloaded before playback, in contrast with other methods such as progressive download, which partially downloads before initiating playback, or streaming modes that simultaneously download and play back in real time. See also progressive download.

full-duplex mode

Transmission mode that supports transmission and reception of signals in both directions simultaneously. See also duplex mode, half-duplex mode.

full-mesh VPN

VPN in which each site in the VPN can communicate with every other site in that same VPN. See also hub-and-spoke VPN, overlapping VPN.

fully-qualified domain name

FQDN. The hostname and domain name for a specific system.

fwauthd

Firewall authentication process that implements and manages user authentication configuration, and authenticates users who access the firewall.

fxp0

management Ethernet interface. Permanent interface that provides an out-of-band method, such as SSH and telnet, to connect to the routing platform. SNMP can use the management interface to gather statistics from the routing platform. Called fxp0 on some routing platforms. See also permanent interface.

fxp1

Junos OS permanent interface used for communications between the Routing Engine and the Packet Forwarding Engine. This interface is not present in all routers.

fxp2

Junos OS permanent interface used for communications between the Routing Engine and the Packet Forwarding Engine. This interface is not present in all routers.

### G

G-CDR

GGSN call detail record. Collection of charges in ASN.1 format that is eventually billed to a mobile station user.

G-PDU

User data message sent in a path. It consists of a T-PDU plus a GTP header.

G.992.1

ITU-T Rec. G.992.1. International ITU-T standard that defines ADSL. Annex A defines how ADSL works over twisted-pair copper (POTS) lines. Annex B defines how ADSL works over ISDN lines. .

G.SHDSL

symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL). Standard published in 2001 by the ITU-T with recommendation ITU G.991.2. G.SHDSL incorporates features of other DSL technologies such as asymmetrical DSL (ADSL). See also SHDSL, ADSL.

garbage collection timer

Timer used in a distance-vector network that represents the time remaining before a route is removed from the routing table.

gateway

Program or device that converts one protocol or format to another, or acts as a go-between two or more networks that use the same protocols. In this case, the gateway functions as an entry/exit point to the network. Also, an older term for a router.

gateway GPRS support node

GGSN. Router that serves as a gateway between mobile networks and packet data networks.

gateway router

Device that passes DHCP messages between DHCP clients and DHCP servers. Also known as a relay agent.

GBIC

Gigabit Interface Connector. Interface module card used on some security devices for connecting to a fiber optic network.

general community

Convenient way to categorize groups of routes to facilitate the use of routing policies. Also called private community or local-use community.

General Packet Radio Service

GPRS. Packet-switched service that enables high-speed wireless Internet and other data communications, allowing full mobility and wide-area coverage as information is sent and received across a mobile network. Using a packet data service, subscribers are always connected and always online so services are easy and quick to access.

Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching

GMPLS. A protocol that extends the functionality of MPLS to include a wider range of label-switched path (LSP) options for a variety of network devices.

generated route

Summary route that uses an IP address next hop to forward packets in an IP network. A generated route is functionally similar to an aggregated route.

generic routing encapsulation

GRE. General tunneling protocol that can encapsulate many types of packets to enable data transmission through a tunnel. GRE is used with IP to create a virtual point-to-point link to routers at remote points in a network. See also tunneling protocol.

generic token card

GTC. Carries user-specific token cards for authentication.

GGSN

gateway GPRS support node. Router that serves as a gateway between mobile networks and packet data networks.

GGSN call detail record

G-CDR. Collection of charges in ASN.1 format that is eventually billed to a mobile station user.

GI interface

Interface between a GSN and an external network or the Internet.

Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module

GPIM. SRX mid-range services gateway network interface card (NIC) that includes standard GPIMs installed in a single-high, single-wide GPIM slot and has gigabit connectivity to the system backplane.

Gigabit Ethernet

Term describing various technologies for implementing Ethernet networking at a nominal speed of one gigabit per second. Gigabit Ethernet is supported over both optical fiber and twisted-pair cable. Physical layer standards include 1000BASE-T, 1 Gbps over CAT-5e copper cabling, and 1000BASE-SX for short to medium distances over fiber. See also Ethernet, Fast Ethernet.

global AS

Autonomous system (AS) consisting of multiple subautonomous systems (sub-ASs).

Global Configuration mode

Privileged Exec mode from which you can set parameters or enable features. Within Global Configuration mode, you can apply features globally to a router, enable a feature or function, disable a feature or function, and configure a feature or function. See also Privileged Exec mode, User Exec mode.

global domain

Top level, or root domain, that contains all subdomains (logical groupings of devices, policies, and access privileges). See also domain.

global export map

Route map applied to a VRF to modify and filter routes exported by the VRF to the global BGP non-VPN RIB in the parent VR. See also export map, global import map, import map.

global import map

Route map applied to a VRF to modify and filter routes imported to the the BGP RIB of the VRF from the global BGP non-VPN RIB in the parent VR. See also export map, global export map, import map.

global routing table

Database maintained by IP on E Series router SRP modules. Contains at most one route per protocol to each prefix in the table. See also local routing table, forwarding table, routing table.

Global System for Mobile Communications

GSM. A second-generation (2G) mobile wireless networking standard defined by ETSI that uses TDMA technology and operates in the 900-MHz radio band. See also TDMA.

GMPLS

Generalized Multiprotocol Label Switching. A protocol that extends the functionality of MPLS to include a wider range of label-switched path (LSP) options for a variety of network devices.

GMT

Greenwich Mean Time, UTC, (Coordinated Universal Time). Historically referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT), a high-precision atomic time standard that tracks Universal Time (UT) and is the basis for legal civil time all over the Earth. Time zones around the world are expressed as positive and negative offsets from UTC.

Gn interface

Interface between two GSNs within the same Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN).

Gp interface

Interface between two GSNs located in different Public Land Mobile Networks (PLMNs).

GPIM

Gigabit Backplane Physical Interface Module. SRX mid-range services gateway network interface card (NIC) that includes standard GPIMs installed in a single-high, single-wide GPIM slot and has gigabit connectivity to the system backplane.

GPRS

General Packet Radio Service. Packet-switched service that enables high-speed wireless Internet and other data communications, allowing full mobility and wide-area coverage as information is sent and received across a mobile network. Using a packet data service, subscribers are always connected and always online so services are easy and quick to access.

GPRS Roaming Exchange

GRX. Acts as a hub for GPRS connections from roaming users, removing the need for a dedicated link between each GPRS service provider.

GPRS tunneling protocol

GTP. Transports IP packets between an SGSN and a GGSN. See also tunneling protocol.

graceful restart

Process that allows a router whose control plane is undergoing a restart to continue to forward traffic while recovering its state from neighboring routers. Without graceful restart, a control plane restart disrupts services provided by the router. Implementation varies by protocol. Also called nonstop forwarding. See also cold restart, warm restart.

graceful Routing Engine switchover

GRES. In a router that contains a master and a backup Routing Engine, allows the backup Routing Engine to assume mastership automatically, with no disruption of packet forwarding.

graceful switchover

Junos OS feature that allows a change from the primary device, such as a Routing Engine, to the backup device without interruption of packet forwarding.

gratuitous ARP

Broadcast request for a router’s own IP address to check whether that address is being used by another node. Primarily used to detect IP address duplication.

GRE

generic routing encapsulation. General tunneling protocol that can encapsulate many types of packets to enable data transmission through a tunnel. GRE is used with IP to create a virtual point-to-point link to routers at remote points in a network. See also tunneling protocol.

GRE tunnel

IP tunnel that uses GRE-encapsulated IP packets to enable data transmission. The resulting encapsulated packet contains a GRE header and a delivery header. Consequently, the packet requires more processing than an IP packet, and GRE can be slower than native routing protocols. GRE tunnels can be secured with IPsec.

GRES

graceful Routing Engine switchover. In a router that contains a master and a backup Routing Engine, allows the backup Routing Engine to assume mastership automatically, with no disruption of packet forwarding.

group

Collection of related BGP peers that organizes previously created devices into user-defined groups, making it easier for you to configure and manage devices in your domain. Groups enable you to execute certain NSM operations on multiple security devices at the same time.

group address

IP address used as the destination address in a multicast IP packet. The group address functionally represents the senders and interested receivers for a particular multicast data stream.

group expression object

Represents a statement that sets conditions for authentication requirements that enable you to combine multiple external user objects. You can create group expressions using the operator OR, AND, or NOT to combine user objects, user group objects, or other group expressions.

group node

Scheduler node associated with a {port interface, traffic-class group} pair. Because the logical interface is the port, only one such scheduler node can exist for each traffic-class group above the port. This node aggregates all traffic for traffic classes in the group.

group preshared keys

Secure remote access method that uses L2TP/IPsec when connecting to networks that do not use a certificate authority (CA) to issue certificates. A group preshared key is associated with a local IP address in the E Series router and is used to authenticate L2TP/IPsec clients that target this IP address as their VPN server address. Group preshared keys are not fully secure; they open to man-in-the-middle attacks. Digital certificates are preferred instead.

GRX

GPRS Roaming Exchange. Acts as a hub for GPRS connections from roaming users, removing the need for a dedicated link between each GPRS service provider.

GSM

Global System for Mobile Communications. A second-generation (2G) mobile wireless networking standard defined by ETSI that uses TDMA technology and operates in the 900-MHz radio band. See also TDMA.

GTC

generic token card. Carries user-specific token cards for authentication.

GTP

GPRS tunneling protocol. Transports IP packets between an SGSN and a GGSN. See also tunneling protocol.

GTP tunnel

Tunnel in the GTP-U plane defined for each PDP context in the GSNs. A GTP tunnel in the GTP-C plane is defined for all PDP contexts with the same PDP address and APN (for Tunnel Management messages) or for each MS (for messages not related to Tunnel Management). A GTP tunnel is identified in each node with a TEID, an IP address, and a UDP port number. A GTP tunnel is necessary to forward packets between an external network and an MS user.

GTP-C

GGSN tunneling protocol, control. Allows an SGSN to establish packet data network access for a mobile station. See also tunneling protocol.

GTP-C message

Control messages exchanged between GSN pairs in a path to transfer GSN capability information between the pairs, to create, update and delete GTP tunnels, and for path management.

GTP-PDU

GTP Protocol Data Unit. Either a GTP-C message or a GTP-U message.

GTP-U

GGSN tunneling protocol, user plane. Carries mobile station user data packets. See also tunneling protocol.

GTP-U message

GTP-User Data message. Messages exchanged between GSN pairs or GSN/RNC pairs in a path to carry user data packets, and used as signaling messages for path management and error indication.

GUI Server

Manages the system resources in NSM and data that drives NSM functionality. It contains the NSM databases and centralizes information for devices, their configurations, attack and server objects, and policies.

### H

H.323

ITU-T recommendation that describes packet-based multimedia communications over networks that do not guarantee class of service, such as IP networks, providing a widely-used standard for VoIP and conferencing that is modeled on ISDN PRI. It is implemented as an Application Layer Gateway (ALG) that provides secure VoIP communication between terminal hosts, such as IP phones and multimedia devices, in which the gatekeeper devices manage call registration, admission, and call status for VoIP calls. The gatekeepers can reside in the two different zones, or in the same zone.

HA

high availability. Configuring pairs of security devices to ensure service continuity in the event of a network outage or device failure. Used to provide fault detection and correction procedures to maximize the availability of critical services and applications. When applied to the E Series router, high availability provides both hardware-specific and software-specific methods to ensure minimal downtime and ultimately improve the performance of your network. See also high availability mode.

half-duplex mode

Transmission mode that supports transmission and reception of signals in both directions, but not at the same time. See also duplex mode, full-duplex mode.

handshake

Process of exchanging signaling information between two communications devices to establish the method and transmission speed of a connection.

HAR

hierarchical assured rate. Calculation process that dynamically adjusts bandwidth for scheduler nodes—a more powerful and efficient method of configuring assured rates than static assured rates. See also SHA-1, MD5.

hard disk drives

HDD. Refers to system storage media used for caching functions and installation procedures.

hardened system

Secure server with all appropriate security patches and bug fixes. These systems are designed to resist penetration.

Hashed Message Authentication Code

HMAC. Mechanism for message authentication that uses cryptographic hash functions. HMAC can be used with any iterative cryptographic hash function—for example, MD5 or SHA-1—in combination with a secret shared key. The cryptographic strength of HMAC depends on the properties of the underlying hash function. Defined in RFC 2104, HMAC: Keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication.

hashing

Cryptographic technique applied over and over (iteratively) to a message of arbitrary length to produce a hash “message digest” or “signature” of fixed length that is appended to the message when it is sent. In security, it used to validate that the contents of a message have not been altered in transit. The Secure Hash Algorithm (especially SHA-1) and Message Digest 5 (MD5) are commonly used hashes. See also SHA-1, MD5.

HDD

hard disk drives. Refers to system storage media used for caching functions and installation procedures.

HDLC

High-Level Data Link Control. International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standard for a bit-oriented data-link layer protocol on which most other bit-oriented protocols are based.

health monitor

Junos OS extension to the RMON alarm system that provides predefined monitoring for file system, CPU, and memory usage. The health monitor also supports unknown or dynamic object instances such as Junos OS processes.

hello interval

Amount of time an OSPF router continues to send a hello packet to each adjacent neighbor.

hello mechanism

Process used by an RSVP router to enhance the detection of network outages in an MPLS network.

hello messages

Messages used to detect adjacent peers and maintain adjacency.

hello packet

Message sent out to the current network to announce the presence of the current routing instance to the network. Hello packets aid in the discovery of neighbors and in a router being able to connect to other devices on the network. When an OSPF interface is created, the interface sends Hello packets to the network to announce itself.

hello protocol

Establishes and maintains neighbor relationships; communication between neighbors is bidirectional. The hello protocol also dynamically discovers neighboring routers on broadcast or point-to-point networks.

hierarchical assured rate

HAR. Calculation process that dynamically adjusts bandwidth for scheduler nodes—a more powerful and efficient method of configuring assured rates than static assured rates. See also SHA-1, MD5.

hierarchical round-robin

HRR. Scheme for allocating bandwidth to queues in proportion to their weights.

high availability

HA. Configuring pairs of security devices to ensure service continuity in the event of a network outage or device failure. Used to provide fault detection and correction procedures to maximize the availability of critical services and applications. When applied to the E Series router, high availability provides both hardware-specific and software-specific methods to ensure minimal downtime and ultimately improve the performance of your network. See also high availability mode.

high availability mode

Ensures rapid SRP module recovery following a switchover. High availability mode uses an initial bulk file transfer and subsequent, transaction-based mirroring. Also known as stateful SRP switchover. In addition to keeping the contents of NVS, high availability mode keeps state and dynamic configuration data from the SRP memory synchronized between the primary and standby SRP modules.

High Speed Downlink Packet Access

HSDA. Enhanced 3G mobile communications protocol.

high-density Ethernet

Process by which a module allows oversubscription of Ethernet packets. The module manages oversubscription by prioritizing and dropping certain packets.

high-density keepalive mode

Mode whereby, when the keepalive timer expires, the interface first verifies whether any frames were received from the peer in the prior keepalive timeout interval. If so, the interface does not send an LCP echo request (keepalive). Keepalive packets are sent only if the peer is silent (if no traffic was received from the peer during the previous keepalive timeout interval). Also known as smart keepalive. See also low-density keepalive mode.

High-Level Data Link Control

HDLC. International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standard for a bit-oriented data-link layer protocol on which most other bit-oriented protocols are based.

High-Speed Circuit Switched Data

HSCSD. Circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users, at data rates up to 38.4 Kbps.

high-speed serial interface

HSSI. Interface that supports high-speed WAN switching services such as Frame Relay and Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) trunk encapsulation. You can configure an interface to act as data communications equipment (DCE) or data terminal equipment (DTE).

histogram

Vertical graph that represents different amounts by thin, color-coded bands or bars. These bars represent a frequency distribution; heights of the bars represent observed frequencies.

HLR

Home Location Register. Database containing information about a subscriber and the current location of a subscriber’s mobile station.

HMAC

Hashed Message Authentication Code. Mechanism for message authentication that uses cryptographic hash functions. HMAC can be used with any iterative cryptographic hash function—for example, MD5 or SHA-1—in combination with a secret shared key. The cryptographic strength of HMAC depends on the properties of the underlying hash function. Defined in RFC 2104, HMAC: Keyed-Hashing for Message Authentication.

HMAC MD5 authentication

Method for IS-IS that prevents unauthorized routers from injecting false routing information into your network or forming adjacencies with your router. The router creates secure digests of the packets, encrypted according to the HMAC MD5 message-digest algorithms. The digests are inserted into the packets from which they are created. Depending on the commands you issue, the digests can be inserted into hello packets, link-state PDUs, complete sequence number PDUs, and partial sequence number PDUs. Also called MD5 authentication.

hold down

Timer used by distance-vector protocols to prevent the propagation of incorrect routing knowledge to other routers in the network.

hold time

Maximum number of seconds allowed to elapse between successive keepalive or update messages that a BGP system receives from a peer. In OSPF, the maximum amount of time between instances of initiating Shortest Path First (SPF) computations.

Home Location Register

HLR. Database containing information about a subscriber and the current location of a subscriber’s mobile station.

hop count

Number of routers that data packets must traverse between RIP networks. See also RIP metric.

host membership query

Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP) packet sent by a router to determine whether interested receivers exist on a broadcast network for multicast traffic.

host membership report

IGMP packet sent by an interested receiver for a particular multicast group address. Hosts send report messages when they first join a group or in response to a query packet from the local router.

host module

On an M160 router, provides the routing and system management functions of the router. Consists of the Routing Engine and Miscellaneous Control Subsystem (MCS).

host subsystem

On a T640 routing node, provides the routing and system management functions of the router. Consists of a Routing Engine and an adjacent Control Board (CB).

host-specific configuration

Configuration that takes place on a device for which you have created a host-specific autoinstallation configuration file (hostname.conf). The hostname.conf file contains all the information necessary for configuring the named host device. See also hostname.conf.

hostname.conf

Host-specific configuration file for autoinstallation on a device that contains all the information necessary for configuring the device. In the filename, hostname is replaced with the hostname that you are assigning to the device.

hot content

Media content that is often requested. Media Flow Controller caches content hierarchically according to how “hot” it is: short tail video (a few videos requested often by many clients) can be cached closer to the subscriber, while long tail video (videos seldom requested) can be kept deeper in the network.

hot fix

One or more files that update an operational E Series router. Hot fixes can do any of the following: address one or more specific, critical software issues by replacing or adding functionality to one or more software components; enable the delivery of software updates without having to load an entire software release; or deploy debugging code to collect data that facilitates troubleshooting of software issues.

hot standby

In the Junos OS, method used with link services intelligent queuing interfaces (LSQ) to enable rapid switchover between primary and secondary (backup) PICs. See also warm standby.

HRR

hierarchical round-robin. Scheme for allocating bandwidth to queues in proportion to their weights.

HRR scheduler

One part of the integrated scheduler used to extend ATM QoS functionality on all E Series router ASIC-enabled line modules. See also SAR scheduler.

HSCSD

High-Speed Circuit Switched Data. Circuit-switched wireless data transmission for mobile users, at data rates up to 38.4 Kbps.

HSDA

High Speed Downlink Packet AccessEnhanced 3G mobile communications protocol.

HSSI

high-speed serial interface. Interface that supports high-speed WAN switching services such as Frame Relay and Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) trunk encapsulation. You can configure an interface to act as data communications equipment (DCE) or data terminal equipment (DTE).

HTTP

Hypertext Transfer Protocol. Method used to publish and receive information on the Web, such as text and graphic files.

HTTPS

Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer. Similar to HTTP with an added encryption layer that encrypts and decrypts user page requests and pages that are returned by a Web server. Used for secure communication, such as payment transactions.

hub-and-spoke VPN

Type of VPN in which spoke sites in the VPN can communicate only with the hub sites; they cannot communicate with other spoke sites. See also full-mesh VPN, overlapping VPN.

Hypertext Transfer Protocol

HTTP. Method used to publish and receive information on the Web, such as text and graphic files.

Hypertext Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer

HTTPS. Similar to HTTP with an added encryption layer that encrypts and decrypts user page requests and pages that are returned by a Web server. Used for secure communication, such as payment transactions.

### I

I-DAS

integrated DHCP access server. Feature that enables you to use RADIUS start and stop attributes to track user events such as the lifetime of an IP address.

I-frame

Information frame used to transfer data in sequentially numbered logical link control protocol data units (LPDUs) between link stations.

I-SID

24-bit service instance identifier field carried inside an I-TAG. The I-SID defines the service instance to which the frame is mapped.

I-TAG

Field defined in the IEEE 802.1ah provider MAC encapsulation header that carries the service instance information (I-SID) associated with the frame.

I/O adapter

IOA, Input/output adapter. Physical interface that pairs with line modules to provide connectivity to E120 and E320 routers. See also I/O module.

I/O Manager ASIC

Juniper Networks ASIC responsible for segmenting data packets into 64-byte J-cells and for queuing result cells before transmission.

I/O module

- Physical interface that pairs with line modules to provide connectivity to an ERX router. See also IOA.
- In Juniper IDP series, it contains the traffic interfaces that receive and send network traffic and is a field-replaceable unit (FRU).

IANA

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority. Regulatory group that maintains all assigned and registered Internet numbers, such as IP and multicast addresses. See also NIC.

IAPP

Inter Access Point Protocol. IEEE 802.11F recommendation that describes optional extensions to IEEE 802.11, which defines wireless access-point communications among multivendor systems.

IBGP

Internal Border Gateway Protocol. BGP configuration in which sessions are established between routers in the same autonomous system (AS). See also EBGP.

IBGP session

Session between two BGP speakers that are in the same autonomous system (AS). IBGP requires that BGP speakers within an autonomous system be fully meshed, meaning that there must be a BGP session between each pair of peers within the AS. IBGP does not require that all the peers be physically connected. See also EBGP session.

ICMP

Internet Control Message Protocol. Network layer protocol that provides a query and response system for a router or destination host to report an error in data traffic processing to the original source of the packet. Used in router discovery, ICMP allows router advertisements that enable a host to discover addresses of operating routers on the subnet. An ICMP echo request is also known as a ping.

ICMP flood

Type of Denial of Service attack that sends ICMP pings so large or so numerous that they overload a system with echo requests, causing the system to expend all its resources responding until it can no longer process valid network traffic. Also known as ping flood or smurf attack.

ICMP Router Discovery Protocol

IRDP. Used by DHCP clients that enables a host to determine the address of a router that it can use as a default gateway.

IDE

Integrated Drive Electronics. Type of hard disk on a Routing Engine.

IDEA

International Data Encryption Algorithm. One of the methods at the heart of Pretty Good Privacy (PGP), it uses a 128-bit key. IDEA is patented by Ascom Tech AG and is popular in Europe.

IDI

initial domain identifier. Part of an ATM address format that contains the address fields describing the address allocation and issuing authority.

Idle

Initial BGP neighbor state in which the local router refuses all incoming session requests.

IDP

- initial domain part. Portion of a CLNS address that consists of the AFI and IDI. See also AFI, IDI.
- Intrusion Detection and Prevention. Name of a Juniper product line of security devices that run the IDP OS (operating system).

IDS

intrusion detection service. Inspects all inbound and outbound network activity and identifies suspicious patterns that might indicate a network or system attack from someone attempting to break into or compromise a system.

IEC

International Electrotechnical Commission. International standards organization that deals with electrical, electronic, and related technologies. See ISO.

IEEE

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers. International professional society for electrical engineers.

IEEE 802.1p

IEEE standard for a Layer 2 frame structure that supports VLAN identification and CoS traffic classification.

IEEE 802.3af

IEEE standard that defines a method for powering network devices through an Ethernet cable. Also known as Power over Ethernet (PoE), this standard enables remote devices (such as VoIP telephones) to operate without a separate, external power source.

IETF

Internet Engineering Task Force. International community of network designers, operators, vendors, and researchers concerned with the evolution of the Internet architecture and the smooth operation of the Internet.

IFD

physical interface. (A Juniper Networks internal use acronym.) Port on a Physical Interface Card (PIC) or Physical Interface Module (PIM).

IFF

protocol families. (A Juniper Networks internal use acronym.) Grouping of logical properties within an interface configuration, for example, the inet, inet4, and mpls protocol families.

IFL

logical interface. (A Juniper Networks internal use acronym.) On a physical interface, the configuration of one or more units which include all addressing, protocol information, and other logical interface properties that enable the physical interface to function.

IGMP

Internet Group Management Protocol. Host-to-router signaling protocol for IPv4 to report multicast group memberships to neighboring routers and determine whether group members are present during IP multicasting. Similarly, multicast routers, such as E Series routers, use IGMP to discover which of their hosts belong to multicast groups and to determine whether group members are present.

IGMP proxy

Method by which a router issues IGMP host messages on behalf of hosts that the router discovered through standard IGMP interfaces. The router acts as a proxy for its hosts.

IGP

interior gateway protocol. Distributes routing information to routers within an autonomous system, such as IS-IS, OSPF, or RIP. See also EGP.

IKE

Internet Key Exchange. Part of IPsec that provides ways to exchange keys for encryption and authentication securely over an unsecured medium such as the Internet. IKE enables a pair of security gateways to:

- Dynamically establish a secure tunnel over which security gateways can exchange tunnel and key information.
- Set up user-level tunnels or SAs, including tunnel attribute negotiations and key management. These tunnels can also be refreshed and terminated on top of the same secure channel.

IKE employs Diffie-Hellman methods and is optional in IPsec (the shared keys can be entered manually at the endpoints).

IKE endpoint

IP address of the entity that is one of two endpoints in an IKE/ISAKMP SA.

IKE policies

Policies that define a combination of security parameters to be used during the IKE SA negotiation. IKE policies are configured on both security gateway peers, and there must be at least one policy on the local peer that matches a policy on the remote peer. If that is not the case, the two peers are not able to successfully negotiate the IKE SA, and no data flow is possible.

IKE proposal object

In NSM, a representation of an IKE proposal, which is a set of encryption keys and authentication algorithms used to negotiate a VPN connection.

iked

IKE process that implements tunnel management for IPsec VPNs, provides authentication of endpoint entities, and generates keys for packet authentication and encryption.

ILEC

incumbent local exchange carrier. Any commercial telecom company that was in business after the breakup of AT&T in 1984 and before the Telecommunications Act of 1996.

ILMI

Integrated Local Management Interface. Specification developed by the ATM Forum that incorporates network management capabilities into the ATM user-to-network interface (UNI) and provides bidirectional exchange of management information between UNI management entities (UMEs).

IMEI

International Mobile Station Equipment Identity. Unique code used to identify an individual mobile station to a GSM network.

implicit shared shaper

Type of shared shaper in which the system automatically selects the active constituents. A shared-shaping rate is configured on the best-effort node or queue, and QoS locates the other constituents automatically. See also explicit shared shaper, shared shaping.

import

Installation of routes from the routing protocols into a routing table.

import map

Route map applied to a VRF to modify and filter routes imported to the BGP RIB of the VRF from the global BGP VPN RIB in the parent VR. See also export map, global import map.

import rules

When you have two or more virtual routers on a security device, you can configure import rules on one virtual router that define which routes are allowed to be learned from another virtual router. If you do not configure any import rules for a virtual router, all routes that are exported to that virtual router are accepted. See also export rules.

IMSI

International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Information that identifies a particular subscriber to a GSM network.

IMT-2000

International Mobile Telecommunications-2000. Global standard for third-generation (3G) wireless communications, defined by a set of interdependent ITU Recommendations. IMT-2000 provides a framework for worldwide wireless access by linking the diverse systems of terrestrial and satellite-based networks.

in-device policy management

In NSM, mode of policy management performed on a single device, using the NSM Device Editor. If this method is selected to manage a J Series or SRX Series device, then the NSM Policy Manager, the Object Manager, and the VPN Manager are all disabled for that device.

inactive constituent

Constituent that is ignored by the shared shaper mechanism. See also active constituent, constituent.

InARP

Inverse Address Resolution Protocol. Way of determining the IP address of the device at the far end of a circuit.

inbound traffic (IPsec)

In the context of a secure interface, already secured traffic arriving on that interface (identified based on its SPI). This traffic is cleared and checked against the security parameters set for that interface.

incumbent local exchange carrier

ILEC. Any commercial telecom company that was in business after the breakup of AT&T in 1984 and before the Telecommunications Act of 1996.

independent control

MPLS label distribution method whereby the LSR sending the label acts independently of its downstream peer. It does not wait for a label from the downstream LSR before it sends a label to peers. See also ordered control.

inet.0

Default Junos OS routing table for IPv4 unicast routers.

inet.1

Default Junos OS routing table for storing the multicast cache for active data streams in the network.

inet.2

Default Junos OS routing table for storing unicast IPv4 routes specifically used to prevent forwarding loops in a multicast network.

inet.3

Default Junos OS routing table for storing the egress IP address of an MPLS label-switched path.

inet.4

Default Junos OS routing table for storing information generated by the Multicast Source Discovery Protocol (MSDP).

inet6.0

Default Junos OS routing table for storing unicast IPv6 routes.

infinity metric

Metric value used in distance-vector protocols to represent an unusable route. For RIP, the infinity metric is 16.

Infranet Controller

Policy management component of a Juniper Networks UAC solution.

Infranet Enforcer

Policy enforcement point or firewall within a Juniper Networks UAC solution.

ingest

Data that has been placed on a Media Flow Controller and analyzed and queued for deployment.

ingress

Inbound, referring to packets entering a device.See also egress.

ingress router

In MPLS, the first router in a label-switched path (LSP). See also egress router.

Init

OSPF adjacency state in which the local router has received a hello packet but bidirectional communication is not yet established.

initial domain identifier

IDI. Part of an ATM address format that contains the address fields describing the address allocation and issuing authority.

initial domain port

IDP. Portion of a CLNS address that consists of the AFI and IDI. See also AFI, IDI.

input policy

Policy that evaluates a condition before the normal route lookup. See also output policy, policy, secondary input policy.

input/output adapter

IOA. Physical interface that pairs with line modules to provide connectivity to E120 and E320 routers. See also I/O module.

input/output module

IOA. Physical interface that pairs with line modules to provide connectivity to E120 and E320 routers. See also I/O adapter.

insert

Junos OS command that allows a user to reorder terms in a routing policy or a firewall filter, or to change the order of a policy chain.

inside global address

In a NAT context, IP translated address of an inside host as seen by an outside host and network.

inside local address

In a NAT context, configured IP address that is assigned to a host on the inside network.

inside network

In a NAT context, the local portion of a network that uses private, not publicly routable, IP addresses that you want to translate.

inside source translation

Commonly used NAT configuration, in which an inside host sends a packet to the outside network and the NAT router translates the source information. Then, in the inbound direction, the NAT router restores the original information. For outbound traffic, the NAT router translates the inside local address into the inside global address.

instance.inetflow.0

Routing table that shows route flows through BGP.

Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

IEEE. International professional society for electrical engineers.

Integrated DHCP access server

I-DAS. Feature that enables you to use RADIUS start and stop attributes to track user events such as the lifetime of an IP address.

Integrated Drive Electronics

IDE. Type of hard disk on a Routing Engine.

Integrated IS-IS

Extended version of IS-IS that supports the routing of datagrams by means of IP or CLNS. Without the extensions, IS-IS routes datagrams only by means of CLNS.

Integrated Local Management Interface

ILMI. Specification developed by the ATM Forum that incorporates network management capabilities into the ATM user-to-network interface (UNI) and provides bidirectional exchange of management information between UNI management entities (UMEs).

integrated routing and bridging

IRB. Provides simultaneous support for Layer 2 (L2) bridging and Layer 3 (L3) routing within the same bridge domain. Packets arriving on an interface of the bridge domain are L2 switched or L3 routed based on the destination MAC address. Packets addressed to the router’s MAC address are routed to other L3 interfaces.

integrated scheduler

QoS scheduler that provides extended ATM QoS functionality. The integrated scheduler consists of two schedulers in series—the hierarchical round robin (HRR) scheduler and the segmentation and reassembly (SAR) scheduler.

Integrated Services Digital Network

ISDN. Set of digital communications standards that enable the transmission of information over existing twisted-pair telephone lines at higher speeds than standard analog telephone service. An ISDN interface provides multiple B-channels (bearer channels) for data and one D-channel for control and signaling information. See also B-channel, D-channel.

intelligent queuing

IQ. M Series and T Series routing platform interfaces that offer granular quality-of-service (QoS) capabilities; extensive statistics on packets and bytes that are transmitted, received, or dropped; and embedded diagnostic tools.

Inter Access Point Protocol

IAPP. IEEE 802.11F recommendation that describes optional extensions to IEEE 802.11, which defines wireless access-point communications among multivendor systems.

inter-AS routing

Routing of packets among different autonomous systems (ASs). See also EBGP.

inter-AS services

Services that support VPNs across AS boundaries.

interactive traffic

Network traffic that indicates human involvement in a normally automated process, such as a user typing commands. It appears different from other traffic because one end of the connection is manually controlled. For example, in an automated process, TCP packets can be batched and sent in bulk. However, in a connection between a program and a user, packets are sent when they become available; characters display as they are typed (not after the word is complete). Interactive programs transmit several short IP packets containing individual keystrokes and their echoes, reflecting the real-time actions of a user (or attacker).

intercluster reflection

In a BGP route reflection, the redistribution of routing information by a route reflector system to all nonclient peers (BGP peers not in the cluster). See also route reflection.

interface alarm

Alarm triggered by the state of a physical link on a fixed or installed PIM, such as a link failure or a missing signal. Interface alarms are triggered by conditions on a T1 (DS1), Fast Ethernet, serial, or T3 (DS3) physical interface or by conditions on the sp-0/0/0 adaptive services interface for stateful firewall filter, NAT, IDP, or IPsec services. To enable an interface alarm, you must explicitly set an alarm condition.

interface cost

Value added to all received routes in a distance-vector network before they are placed into the routing table. The Junos OS uses a cost of 1 for this value.

interface label space

Configurable pool of labels from which multiple smaller pools (ranges) of labels can be created. Interfaces are configured to use labels only from a particular pool.

interface preservation

Addition to the SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) functionality that helps promote redundancy of the link PICs used in LSQ configurations. If the active SONET PIC fails, links from the standby PIC are used without causing a link renegotiation. Also called link-state replication.

interface routes

Routes that are in the routing table because an interface has been configured with an IP address. Also called direct routes.

interface sampling

Packet sampling method used by packet capture, in which entire IPv4 packets flowing in the input or output direction, or both directions, are captured for analysis.

interface set

A logical group of interfaces that describe the characteristics of a set of service VLANs, logical interfaces, or customer VLANs, including the members of the set and the name of the traffic control profiles. See also S-VLAN.

interface specifier

Label used in JunosE Software to identify both the physical location (such as chassis slot and port number) of a particular interface type on the router and the logical interface, such as a channelized T3 interface. Used in conjunction with an interface type to uniquely identify the interface on the router. See also interface type.

interface type

Label used in JunosE Software to identify the type of interface you are configuring on the router. For example, gigabitEthernet indicates a Gigabit Ethernet interface. Used in conjunction with an interface specifier to uniquely identify the interface on the router. See also interface specifier.

interfaces

Physical and logical channels on the router that define how data is transmitted to and received from lower layers in the protocol stack. See also subinterface.

interior gateway protocol

IGP. Distributes routing information to routers within an autonomous system, such as IS-IS, OSPF, or RIP. See also EGP.

intermediate system

In IS-IS, the network entity that sends and receives packets and can also route packets. A router in OSI internetworking. See also ES.

Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System

IS-IS. Link-state, interior gateway routing protocol for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first (SPF) algorithm to determine routes.

Internal Border Gateway Protocol

IBGP. BGP configuration in which sessions are established between routers in the same autonomous system (AS). See also EBGP.

International Data Encryption Algorithm

IDEA. One of the methods at the heart of Pretty Good Privacy (PGP), it uses a 128-bit key. IDEA is patented by Ascom Tech AG and is popular in Europe.

International Electrotechnical Commission

IEC. International standards organization that deals with electrical, electronic, and related technologies. See ISO.

International Mobile Station Equipment Identity

IMEI. Unique code used to identify an individual mobile station to a GSM network.

International Mobile Subscriber Identity

IMSI. Information that identifies a particular subscriber to a GSM network.

International Mobile Telecommunications- 2000

IMT-2000. Global standard for third-generation (3G) wireless communications, defined by a set of interdependent ITU Recommendations. IMT-2000 provides a framework for worldwide wireless access by linking the diverse systems of terrestrial and satellite-based networks.

International Organization for Standardization

ISO. Worldwide federation of standards bodies that promotes international standardization and publishes international agreements as International Standards.

International Special Committee on Radio Interference

CISPR. An International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) committee whose principal task is to prepare standards that offer protection of radio reception from interference sources at the higher end of the frequency range (from 9 kHz and above), such as electrical appliances of all types; the electricity supply system; industrial, scientific, and electromedical RF; broadcasting receivers (sound and TV); and IT equipment (ITE).

International Telecommunication Union— Telecommunication Standardization

ITU-T. Group supported by the United Nations that makes recommendations and coordinates the development of telecommunications standards for the entire world. Formerly known as the CCITT.

International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee

Now known as ITU-T (Telecommunication Standardization Sector), organization that coordinates standards for telecommunication on behalf of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). The ITU is a United Nations specialized agency. ITU-T is a subcommittee of ITU. See also ITU-T, CCITT.

Internet Assigned Numbers Authority

IANA. Regulatory group that maintains all assigned and registered Internet numbers, such as IP and multicast addresses. See also NIC.

Internet Control Message Protocol

ICMP. Network layer protocol that provides a query and response system for a router or destination host to report an error in data traffic processing to the original source of the packet. Used in router discovery, ICMP allows router advertisements that enable a host to discover addresses of operating routers on the subnet. An ICMP echo request is also known as a ping.

Internet Engineering Task Force

IETF. International community of network designers, operators, vendors, and researchers concerned with the evolution of the Internet architecture and the smooth operation of the Internet.

Internet Group Management Protocol

IGMP. Host-to-router signaling protocol for IPv4 to report multicast group memberships to neighboring routers and determine whether group members are present during IP multicasting. Similarly, multicast routers, such as E Series routers, use IGMP to discover which of their hosts belong to multicast groups and to determine whether group members are present.

Internet Key Exchange

IKE. Part of IPsec that provides ways to exchange keys for encryption and authentication securely over an unsecured medium such as the Internet. IKE enables a pair of security gateways to:

- Dynamically establish a secure tunnel over which security gateways can exchange tunnel and key information.
- Set up user-level tunnels or SAs, including tunnel attribute negotiations and key management. These tunnels can also be refreshed and terminated on top of the same secure channel.

IKE employs Diffie-Hellman methods and is optional in IPsec (the shared keys can be entered manually at the endpoints).

Internet Processor ASIC

Juniper Networks ASIC responsible for using the forwarding table to make routing decisions within the Packet Forwarding Engine. The Internet Processor ASIC also implements firewall filters.

Internet Protocol

IP. Used for sending data from one point to another on the Internet, it provides the functions necessary to deliver blocks of data (datagrams) from a source to a destination over an interconnected system of networks, where sources and destinations are identified by fixed length addresses. See also IP address, IPv6.

Internet Protocol Control Protocol

IPCP. Establishes and configures IP over the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

Internet Protocol over Asynchronous Transfer Mode

IPoA. Interface stacking configuration supported on E Series routers. An IPoA interface is IP over ATM 1483 over ATM AAL5 over ATM.

Internet Protocol Security

IPsec. Provides security to IP flows through the use of authentication and encryption:

- Authentication verifies that data is not altered during transmission and ensures that users are communicating with the individual or organization that they believe they are communicating with.
- Encryption makes data confidential by making it unreadable to everyone except the sender and intended recipient.

  The secure aspects of IPsec are usually implemented in three parts: the authentication header (AH), the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP), and the Internet Key Exchange (IKE).

Internet Protocol version 4

IPv4. Network Layer (Layer 3) connectionless protocol for the routing of datagrams through gateways connecting networks and subnetworks. It is used on packet switched internetworks, for example, Ethernet.

Internet Protocol version 6

IPv6. Also known as IPng (for IP next generation), IPv6 is the next planned version of the IP address system, to eventually supersede IP version 4 (IPv4). While IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses, IPv6 uses 128-bit addresses, which increases the number of possible addresses exponentially. For example, IPv4 allows 4,294,967,296 addresses to be used (2^32). IPv6 allows for over 340,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 IP addresses. It can be installed as a normal software upgrade in Internet devices and is interoperable with the current IPv4.See also IP address.

Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol

ISAKMP. Allows the receiver of a message to obtain a public key and use digital certificates to authenticate the sender’s identity. ISAKMP is key exchange independent; that is, it supports many different key exchanges. See also IKE, Oakley.

Internet service provider

ISP. Company that provides access to the Internet and related services.

Internet-based Over-the-Air

IOTA. Activation method used by cellular network providers such as Sprint for CDMA EV-DO 3G wireless modem cards. See also Over-the-Air Service Provisioning, OTASP.

interprovider services

inter-AS services. Services that support VPNs across AS boundaries.

interprovider VPN

VPN that provides connectivity between separate autonomous systems (ASs) with separate border edge routers. It is used by VPN customers who have connections to several different ISPs, or different connections to the same ISP in different geographic regions, each of which has a different AS.

intra-AS routing

Routing of packets within a single autonomous system (AS). See also IBGP.

Intrusion Detection and Prevention

IDP. Name of a Juniper product line of security devices that run the IDP OS (operating system).

intrusion detection service

IDS. Inspects all inbound and outbound network activity and identifies suspicious patterns that might indicate a network or system attack from someone attempting to break into or compromise a system.

Inverse Address Resolution Protocol

InARP. Way of determining the IP address of the device at the far end of a circuit.

IOA

Input/output adapter. Physical interface that pairs with line modules to provide connectivity to E120 and E320 routers. See also I/O module.

IOTA

Internet-based Over-the-Air. Activation method used by cellular network providers such as Sprint for CDMA EV-DO 3G wireless modem cards. See also Over-the-Air Service Provisioning, OTASP.

IP

Internet Protocol. Used for sending data from one point to another on the Internet, it provides the functions necessary to deliver blocks of data (datagrams) from a source to a destination over an interconnected system of networks, where sources and destinations are identified by fixed length addresses. See also IP address, IPv6.

IP address

Unique decimal dot format address that devices use to identify and communicate with each other across a network. IPv4 uses 32-bit (4 byte) addresses in a dotted-decimal notation (for example, 192.168.50.4). IPv6 uses 128-bit addresses in a hexadecimal notation of eight 16-bit components separated by colons (for example, 2001:DB8:0:0:8:822:210C:447F). See also IPv6.

IP address classes

Four classes that lend themselves to different network configurations, depending on the desired ratio of networks to hosts:

- Class A—The leading bit is set to 0, a 7-bit number, and a 24-bit local host address. Up to 125 class A networks can be defined, with up to 16,777,214 hosts per network.
- Class B—The two highest-order bits are set to 1 and 0, a 14-bit network number, and a 16-bit local host address. Up to 16,382 class B networks can be defined, with up to 65,534 hosts per network.
- Class C—The three leading bits are set to 1, 1, and 0, a 21-bit network number, and an 8-bit local host address. Up to 2,097,152 class C networks can be defined, with up to 254 hosts per network.
- Class D—The four highest-order bits are set to 1, 1, 1, and 0. Class D is used as a multicast address.

IP address pool

Collection of IP addresses maintained by the DHCP server for assignment to DHCP clients and associated with a subnet on either a logical or a physical interface.

IP Control Protocol

IPCP. Establishes and configures IP over the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

IP defragmentation and TCP reassembly

Method of reducing false positives, it reconstructs fragmented traffic. See also TCP/IP.

IP gateway

IP gateway is a program or a special-purpose device that transfers IP datagrams from one network to another until the final destination is reached. Also called a router.

IP multicast

Internet transmission method that enables a device to send packets to a group of hosts, rather than to a list of individual hosts. Routers use multicast routing algorithms to determine the best route and transmit datagrams throughout the network.

IP pool object

IP pool object represents a range of IP addresses. Use IP pool objects to configure DHCP servers for your managed devices.

IP reassembly

Method of encapsulating and de-encapsulating packets as they enter and leave a tunnel.

IP Security

IPsec. Provides security to IP flows through the use of authentication and encryption:

- Authentication verifies that data is not altered during transmission and ensures that users are communicating with the individual or organization that they believe they are communicating with.
- Encryption makes data confidential by making it unreadable to everyone except the sender and intended recipient.

  The secure aspects of IPsec are usually implemented in three parts: the authentication header (AH), the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP), and the Internet Key Exchange (IKE).

IP spoofing

Mimicking the source address of an IP packet. Every IP packet includes the destination address (where the packet is going) and the source address (where the packet came from). The routers that provide Internet communication between distant computers determine the best route for the IP packet using only the destination address and typically ignore the source address. An attacker can fake the source address of a malicious IP packet by modifying the packet headers so that the packet appears to come from a trusted system.

IP sweep

Denial-of-service attack in which attackers send ICMP echo requests (or pings) to different destination addresses and wait for replies that indicate the IP address of a target. If a remote host pings 10 addresses in 0.3 seconds, the security device flags the event as an IP sweep attack and drops the connection to prevent replies. An IP sweep is similar to a port scan attack.

IP television

IPTV. System using the Internet Protocol to deliver digital television service over a network.

IP tracking

Method of monitoring configured IP addresses to see if they respond to ping or ARP requests. You can configure IP tracking with NSRP to determine device or VSD group failover, or to determine if the interface is up or down.

IP tunnels

Secure method of transporting datagrams between routers separated by networks that do not support all the protocols that those routers support. To configure an IP tunnel, you must first configure a TSM interface.

IP version 4

Internet Protocol version 4, IPv4. Network Layer (Layer 3) connectionless protocol for the routing of datagrams through gateways connecting networks and subnetworks. It is used on packet switched internetworks, for example, Ethernet.

IP version 6

Internet Protocol version 6, IPv6. Also known as IPng (for IP next generation), IPv6 is the next planned version of the IP address system, to eventually supersede IP version 4 (IPv4). While IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses, IPv6 uses 128-bit addresses, which increases the number of possible addresses exponentially. For example, IPv4 allows 4,294,967,296 addresses to be used (2^32). IPv6 allows for over 340,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 IP addresses. It can be installed as a normal software upgrade in Internet devices and is interoperable with the current IPv4. See also IP address.

IPCP

Internet Protocol Control Protocol. Establishes and configures IP over the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

IPoA

Internet Protocol over Asynchronous Transfer Mode. Interface stacking configuration supported on E Series routers. An IPoA interface is IP over ATM 1483 over ATM AAL5 over ATM.

IPsec

Internet Protocol Security. Provides security to IP flows through the use of authentication and encryption:

- Authentication verifies that data is not altered during transmission and ensures that users are communicating with the individual or organization that they believe they are communicating with.
- Encryption makes data confidential by making it unreadable to everyone except the sender and intended recipient.

  The secure aspects of IPsec are usually implemented in three parts: the authentication header (AH), the Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP), and the Internet Key Exchange (IKE).

IPsec endpoint

ISM. IPsec service module. Receives data from and transmits data to line modules that have ingress and egress ports. Does not pair with a corresponding I/O module that provides ingress and egress ports.

IPsec service module

IP address of the entity that is one of two endpoints in an IPsec SA.

IPTV

IP television. System using the Internet Protocol to deliver digital television service over a network.

IPv4

Internet Protocol version 4. Network Layer (Layer 3) connectionless protocol for the routing of datagrams through gateways connecting networks and subnetworks. It is used on packet switched internetworks, for example, Ethernet.

IPv6

Internet Protocol version 6. Also known as IPng (for IP next generation), IPv6 is the next planned version of the IP address system, to eventually supersede IP version 4 (IPv4). While IPv4 uses 32-bit addresses, IPv6 uses 128-bit addresses, which increases the number of possible addresses exponentially. For example, IPv4 allows 4,294,967,296 addresses to be used (2^32). IPv6 allows for over 340,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000 IP addresses. It can be installed as a normal software upgrade in Internet devices and is interoperable with the current IPv4. See also IP address.

IQ

intelligent queuing. M Series and T Series routing platform interfaces that offer granular quality-of-service (QoS) capabilities; extensive statistics on packets and bytes that are transmitted, received, or dropped; and embedded diagnostic tools.

IRB

integrated routing and bridging. Provides simultaneous support for Layer 2 (L2) bridging and Layer 3 (L3) routing within the same bridge domain. Packets arriving on an interface of the bridge domain are L2 switched or L3 routed based on the destination MAC address. Packets addressed to the router’s MAC address are routed to other L3 interfaces.

IRDP

ICMP Router Discovery Protocol. Used by DHCP clients that enables a host to determine the address of a router that it can use as a default gateway.

IS-IS

Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System. Link-state, interior gateway routing protocol for IP networks that uses the shortest-path-first (SPF) algorithm to determine routes.

ISAKMP

Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol. Allows the receiver of a message to obtain a public key and use digital certificates to authenticate the sender’s identity. ISAKMP is key exchange independent; that is, it supports many different key exchanges. See also IKE, Oakley.

ISDN

Integrated Services Digital Network. Set of digital communications standards that enable the transmission of information over existing twisted-pair telephone lines at higher speeds than standard analog telephone service. An ISDN interface provides multiple B-channels (bearer channels) for data and one D-channel for control and signaling information. See also B-channel, D-channel.

ISDN BRI

ISDN Basic Rate Interface. ISDN interface intended for home and small enterprise applications, it consists of two 64-Kbps B-channels to carry voice or data, and one 16-Kbps D-channel for control and signaling. See also B-channel, D-channel.

ISM

IPsec service module. Receives data from and transmits data to line modules that have ingress and egress ports. Does not pair with a corresponding I/O module that provides ingress and egress ports.

ISO

International Organization for Standardization. Worldwide federation of standards bodies that promotes international standardization and publishes international agreements as International Standards.

ISP

Internet service provider. Company that provides access to the Internet and related services.

IT power system

In an IT power system, the distribution system has no connection to earth or has only a high impedance connection. In such systems, an insulation monitoring device is used to monitor the impedance.

ITU-T

International Telecommunication Union—Telecommunication Standardization (formerly known as the CCITT). Group supported by the United Nations that makes recommendations and coordinates the development of telecommunications standards for the world.

ITU-T G.991.2

International standard recommendation that describes a data transmission method for SHDSL for data transport in telecommunications access networks. The standard also describes the functionality required for interoperability of equipment from various manufacturers.

ITU-T G.992.1

International standard recommendation that describes ADSL. Annex A defines how ADSL works over twisted-pair copper (POTS) lines. Annex B defines how ADSL works over ISDN lines.

ITU-T G.993.2

International standard recommendation that describes a data transmission method for VDSL2 transceivers.

ITU-T G.994.1

International standard recommendation that describes the types of signals, messages, and procedures exchanged between DSL equipment when the operational modes of equipment need to be automatically established and selected.

ITU-T G.997.1

International standard recommendation that describes the physical layer management for ADSL transmission systems, including the means of communication on a transport transmission channel defined in the physical layer recommendations. The standard also describes the content and syntax of network elements for configuration, fault management, and performance management.

ITU-T H.248

International standard recommendation that describes communication between a gateway controller and a media gateway.

ITU-T H.323

International standard recommendation that describes packet-based multimedia communications over networks that do not guarantee class of service, such as IP networks, providing a widely-used standard for VoIP and conferencing that is modeled on ISDN PRI. It is implemented as an Application Layer Gateway (ALG) that provides secure VoIP communication between terminal hosts, such as IP phones and multimedia devices, in which the gatekeeper devices manage call registration, admission, and call status for VoIP calls. The gatekeepers can reside in the two different zones, or in the same zone.

### J

J-cell

64-byte data unit used within the Packet Forwarding Engine. All IP packets processed by a Juniper Networks router are segmented into J-cells.

J-Flow

Method of collecting IP traffic flow statistics from routing devices. J-Flow does not require any special protocol for connection setup, and does not require any external changes to networked traffic, packets, or any other devices in the network.

J-Web

Graphical Web browser interface to the Junos OS on routing platforms. With the J-Web interface, you can monitor, configure, diagnose, and manage the routing platform from a PC or laptop that has Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or HTTP over Secure Sockets Layer (HTTPS) enabled.

jbase

Junos OS package containing updates to the kernel.

jbundle

Junos OS package containing all possible software package files.

JCS

Juniper Control System. OEM blade server customized to work with Juniper Networks routers. The JCS chassis holds up to 12 single Routing Engines (or 6 redundant Routing Engine pairs). The JCS 1200 chassis enables the control plane and forwarding plane of a single interconnected platform to be scaled independently.

JCS management module (MM)

Chassis management hardware and software used to access and configure the Juniper Control System (JCS) platform.

JCS switch module

Hardware device that connects Routing Engines in the Juniper Control System (JCS) chassis to a Juniper Networks router and controls traffic between the two devices. For redundancy, the JCS chassis can include two JCS switch modules.

JDBC

Java Database Connectivity. API that provides a standard means of database-independent connectivity between the Java platform and a wide range of databases.

jdocs

Junos OS package containing the documentation set.

jitter

Small random variation introduced into the value of a timer to prevent multiple timer expirations from becoming synchronized. In real-time applications such as VoIP and video, variation in the rate at which packets in a stream are received that can cause quality degradation.

jkernel

Junos OS package containing the basic components of the software.

Job Manager

Module of the NSM user interface that tracks the status of major administrative tasks, such as importing or updating a device, as commands travel to the device and back to the management server.

join message

PIM message sent hop by hop upstream toward a multicast source or the RP of the domain. It requests that multicast traffic be sent downstream to the router originating the message.

jpfe

Junos OS package containing the embedded OS software for operating the Packet Forwarding Engine.

jroute

Junos OS package containing the software used by the Routing Engine.

JSF

Juniper Services Framework.

JSRP

Junos Services Redundancy Protocol. A process that controls chassis clustering of Junos OS devices.

Juniper Control System

JCS. OEM blade server customized to work with Juniper Networks routers. The JCS chassis holds up to 12 single Routing Engines (or 6 redundant Routing Engine pairs). The JCS 1200 chassis enables the control plane and forwarding plane of a single interconnected platform to be scaled independently.

### K

kB

See kilobyte, KiB. Represents approximately 1000 bytes, depending on whether a decimal (kB) or a binary (KiB) system of measurement is being used. When dealing with network capacity, the decimal version (kB) is the standard, with each kB representing 1000 bytes. However, in storage devices, the binary value of 1024 bytes is used, and sometimes expressed using the abbreviation KiB, although this term is not yet standard in common usage. When precise calculations of storage or network capacity are required, it is important to use an appropriate value for kilobytes.

keepalive

Signal sent at predefined intervals to determine that the connection between two links or routers is still active (up). Parameters important to keepalive include time, interval, and retry.

keepalive message

Sent between network devices to inform each other that they are still active. Keepalive messages are used to identify inactive or failed connections.

kernel

Basic software component of the Junos OS. The kernel operates the various processes used to control the router’s operations.

kernel forwarding table

Table of best routes to all destinations reachable by the router. For each destination, the table has only the single best route to the destination selected from the IP routing table. The Junos OS routing protocol process installs active routes from its routing tables into the Routing Engine forwarding table. The kernel copies this forwarding table into the Packet Forwarding Engine, which determines which interface transmits the packets. Also known as forwarding table.

key

Commonly used way to protect the integrity and privacy of information is to rely upon the use of secret information for signing and encryption. These pieces of secret information are known as keys.

key management

Method used in a security system to create and manage security keys, including selection, exchange, storage, certification, expiration, revocation, changing, and transmission of keys. Most of the work in managing information security systems lies in the key management.

key management daemon

kmd. Process that provides IPsec authentication services for encryption PICs.

KiB

kilobyte, kB. Represents approximately 1000 bytes, depending on whether a decimal (kB) or a binary (KiB) system of measurement is being used. When dealing with network capacity, the decimal version (kB) is the standard, with each kB representing 1000 bytes. However, in storage devices, the binary value of 1024 bytes is used, and sometimes expressed using the abbreviation KiB, although this term is not yet standard in common usage. When precise calculations of storage or network capacity are required, it is important to use an appropriate value for kilobytes.

kilobyte

kB, KiB. Represents approximately 1000 bytes, depending on whether a decimal (kB) or a binary (KiB) system of measurement is being used. When dealing with network capacity, the decimal version (kB) is the standard, with each kB representing 1000 bytes. However, in storage devices, the binary value of 1024 bytes is used, and sometimes expressed using the abbreviation KiB, although this term is not yet standard in common usage. When precise calculations of storage or network capacity are required, it is important to use an appropriate value for kilobytes.

kmd

Key management daemon. Process that provides IPsec authentication services for encryption PICs.

### L

L-LSP

label-only-inferred-PSC LSP. One of two types of LSPs employed by MPLS to support differentiated services. The per-hop behavior applied to the packet is determined from the packet label and the EXP field of the MPLS shim header. See also E-LSP, shim header.

L2C

Layer 2 control. Also known as Access Node Control Protocol, ANCP. Based on a subset of the General Switch Management Protocol (GSMP) in which IGMP is no longer terminated or proxied at the access node. Instead, IGMP passes through the access node transparently.

L2TP

Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol. Procedure for secure communication of data across a Layer 2 network that enables users to establish PPP sessions between tunnel endpoints. L2TP uses profiles for individual user and group access to ensure secure communication that is as transparent as possible to both end users and applications. See also tunneling protocol.

L2TP access concentrator

LAC. Device that receives packets from a remote client and forwards them to an L2TP network server (LNS) on a remote network.

L2TP dial-out

Method for corporate virtual private networks (VPNs) that use a Broadband Remote Access Server (B-RAS) to dial out to remote offices that have only narrowband dial-up access.

L2TP network server

LNS. Node that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel endpoint and is a peer to the LAC. The logical termination point of a PPP connection that is being tunneled from the remote system by the LAC.

L2TP tunnel switching

Router configuration that enables you to switch packets between one session terminating at an L2TP LNS and another session originating at an L2TP LAC. A tunnel-switched LAC differs from a conventional LAC because it uses two interface columns: one for the incoming session (LNS) and one for the outgoing session (LAC). The router forwards traffic from the incoming session to the outgoing session and vice versa.

Label Distribution Protocol

LDP. A protocol for distributing labels in non-traffic-engineered applications. LDP allows routers to establish label-switched paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information directly to data-link layer switched paths.

label edge router

LER. Label-switching router serving as an ingress node or an egress node.

label object

RSVP message object that contains the label value allocated to the next downstream router.

label pop operation

Function performed by an MPLS router in which the top label in a label stack is removed from the data packet.

label push operation

Function performed by an MPLS router in which a new label is added to the top of the data packet.

label request object

RSVP message object that requests that each router along the path of an LSP allocate a label for forwarding.

label swap operation

Function performed by an MPLS router in which the top label in a label stack is replaced with a new label before the data packet is forwarded to the next-hop router.

label switching

Multiprotocol Label Switching, MPLS. Mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that functions by assigning short labels to network packets that describe how to forward them through the network. See also traffic engineering, TE.

label values

20-bit field in an MPLS header used by routers to forward data traffic along an MPLS label-switched path.

label-switched interface

LSI. Logical interface supported by the Junos OS that provides VPN services (such as VPLS and Layer 3 VPNs) normally provided by a Tunnel Services PIC.

label-switched path

LSP. Sequence of routers that cooperatively perform MPLS operations for a packet stream; the path traversed by a packet that is routed by MPLS. An LSP is a unidirectional, point-to-point, half-duplex connection carrying information downstream from the ingress (first) router to the egress (last) router. The ingress and egress routers cannot be the same router.

label-switching router

LSR, label-switching router. Router on which MPLS is enabled and that can process label-switched packets; an MPLS node that can forward Layer 3 packets based on their labels.

LAC

L2TP access concentrator. Device that receives packets from a remote client and forwards them to an L2TP network server (LNS) on a remote network.

LACP

Link Aggregation Control Protocol. Mechanism for exchanging port and system information to create and maintain LAG bundles.

LAG

link aggregation group. Two or more network links bundled together to appear as a single link. Distributes MAC clients across the link layer interface and collects traffic from the links to present to the MAC clients of the LAG. Also known as a bundle.

LAN

local area network. Covers a local area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings such as a campus.

LAN PHY

Local Area Network Physical Layer Device. Allows 10-Gigabit Ethernet wide area links to use existing Ethernet applications. See also PHY and WAN PHY.

land attack

Denial-of-service attack in which the attacker may send spoofed SYN packets containing the IP address of the target as both the destination and source IP address, creating an empty connection. These connections flood the target system, overwhelming it.

latency

Delay in the transmission of a packet through a network from beginning to end.

launch pad

In NSM, an otherwise blank user interface pane that provides access to commonly used functionality within the associated NSM module.

Layer 1

Also known as physical layer. First and lowest level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer defines all the electrical and physical specifications for devices and provides the transmission of bits over the network medium. It includes the physical media: cables, microwaves, and networking equipment such as hubs and repeaters.

Layer 2

Second level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data between network entities by splitting data into frames to send on the physical layer and receiving acknowledgment frames. It performs error checking and retransmits frames not received correctly. In general, it controls the flow of information across the link, providing an error-free virtual channel to the network layer. Also known as data link layer. See also OSI.

Layer 2 circuits

Collection of transport modes that accept a stream of ATM cells, convert them to an encapsulated Layer 2 format, then tunnel them over an MPLS or IP backbone, where a similarly configured routing platform segments these packets back into a stream of ATM cells, to be forwarded to the virtual circuit configured for the far-end routing platform. Layer 2 circuits are designed to transport Layer 2 frames between provider edge (PE) routing platforms across a Label Distribution Protocol (LDP)-signaled MPLS backbone. See also AAL5 mode, cell-relay mode, standard AAL5 mode, trunk mode.

Layer 2 control

L2C. Also known as Access Node Control Protocol, ANCP. Based on a subset of the General Switch Management Protocol (GSMP) in which IGMP is no longer terminated or proxied at the access node. Instead, IGMP passes through the access node transparently.

Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol

L2TP. Procedure for secure communication of data across a Layer 2 network that enables users to establish PPP sessions between tunnel endpoints. L2TP uses profiles for individual user and group access to ensure secure communication that is as transparent as possible to both end users and applications. See also tunneling protocol.

Layer 2 VPN

Provides a private network service among a set of customer sites using a service provider’s existing MPLS and IP network. A customer’s data is separated from other data using software rather than hardware. In a Layer 2 VPN, the Layer 3 routing of customer traffic occurs within the customer’s network.

Layer 3

Also known as network layer. The third level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer performs the basic task of routing data across the network (getting packets of data from source to destination).

Layer 3 VPN

Provides a private network service among a set of customer sites using a service provider’s existing MPLS and IP network. A customer’s routes and data are separated from other routes and data using software rather than hardware. In a Layer 3 VPN, the Layer 3 routing of customer traffic occurs within the service provider’s network.

Layer 4

Also known as transport layer. The fourth level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer provides communication between applications residing in different hosts and reliable transparent data transfer between end users. It is the first layer to address reliability.

Layer 5

Also known as application layer, session layer. The fifth and highest level in the five-layer TCP/IP stack. This layer is used by most programs for network communication. Data is passed from the program in an application-specific format, then encapsulated into a transport layer protocol.

Layer 6

Also known as presentation layer. The sixth level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design. This layer transforms data to provide a standard interface for the application layer.

Layer 7

Also known as application layer. The seventh and highest level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design that manages communication between application processes. This layer is the main interface for users to interact with application programs such as electronic mail, database managers, and file-server software. See also OSI.

LCC

line-card chassis. Term used by the Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) to refer to a T640 routing node in a routing matrix.

LCP

Link Control Protocol. Traffic controller used to establish, configure, and test data-link connections for the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

LDAP

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol. Software protocol used for locating resources on a public or private network.

LDP

Label Distribution Protocol. A protocol for distributing labels in non-traffic-engineered applications. LDP allows routers to establish label-switched paths (LSPs) through a network by mapping network-layer routing information directly to data-link layer switched paths.

LDP MD5 authentication

Method of providing protection, using a shared secret (password), against spoofed TCP segments that can be introduced into the connection streams for LDP sessions. Authentication is configurable for both directly connected and targeted peers. Any given pair of peers must share the same password.

leaf node

Terminating node of a multicast distribution tree. A router that is a leaf node only has receivers and does not forward multicast packets to other routers.

learning domain

MAC address database where MAC addresses are added based on the normalized VLAN tags.

lease

Period of time during which an IP address is allocated, or bound, to a DHCP client. A lease can be temporary (dynamic binding) or permanent (static binding).

LER

label edge router. Label-switching router serving as an ingress node or an egress node.

level 1 routing

Refers to routing within an area; a level 1 router:

- (or intermediate system) tracks all the individual links, routers, and end systems within a level 1 area.
- does not know the identity of routers or destinations outside its area.
- forwards all traffic for destinations outside its area to the nearest level 2 router within its area.

level 2 routing

Refers to routing between areas; a level 2 router:

- knows the level 2 topology and which addresses are reachable through each level 2 router.
- tracks the location of each level 1 area.
- is not concerned with the topology within any level 1 area (for example, the details internal to each level 1 area).
- can identify when a level 2 router is also a level 1 router within the same area.
- is the only router type that can exchange packets with external routers located outside its routing domain.

LFI

link fragmentation and interleaving. Method that reduces excessive delays by fragmenting long packets into smaller packets and interleaving them with real-time frames. For example, short delay-sensitive packets, such as packetized voice, can race ahead of larger delay-insensitive packets, such as common data packets.

LFM

link fault management. Method used to detect problems on links and spans on an Ethernet network defined in IEEE 802.3ah. See also OAM.

liblicense

Library that includes messages generated for routines for software license management.

libpcap

Implementation of the pcap application programming interface. Used by a program to capture packets traveling over a network. See also pcap.

Lightweight Directory Access Protocol

LDAP. Software protocol used for locating resources on a public or private network.

limited operational environment

Term used to describe the restrictions placed on FIPS-certified equipment. See FIPS.

line layer

For a channelized OCx/STMx interface, the layer that manages the transport of SONET/SDH payloads, which are embedded in a sequence of STS/STM frames in the physical medium. This layer is responsible for multiplexing and synchronization. See also path layer, section layer.

line loopback

Method of troubleshooting a problem with physical transmission media in which a transmission device in the network sends the data signal back to the originating router.

line module

LM. Acts as a frame forwarding engine for the physical interfaces (I/O modules and IOAs) and processes data from different types of network connections.

line module redundancy

Configuration in which an extra line module in a group of identical line modules provides redundancy if one of the modules fails. The process by which the router switches to the spare line module is called switchover. The requirements for line module redundancy depend on the type of router that you have.

line-card chassis

LCC. Term used by the Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) to refer to a T640 routing node in a routing matrix.

link

Communication path between two neighbors. A link is up when communication is possible between the two end points.

Link Aggregation Control Protocol

LACP. Mechanism for exchanging port and system information to create and maintain LAG bundles.

link aggregation group

802.3ad link aggregation, LAG. Two or more network links bundled together to appear as a single link. Distributes MAC clients across the link layer interface and collects traffic from the links to present to the MAC clients of the LAG. Also known as a bundle.

Link Control Protocol

LCP. Traffic controller used to establish, configure, and test data-link connections for the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

link fault management

LFM. Method used to detect problems on links and spans on an Ethernet network defined in IEEE 802.3ah. See also OAM.

link fragmentation and interleaving

LFI. Method that reduces excessive delays by fragmenting long packets into smaller packets and interleaving them with real-time frames. For example, short delay-sensitive packets, such as packetized voice, can race ahead of larger delay-insensitive packets, such as common data packets.

Link Integrity Protocol

LIP. Runs on the member links of a Multilink Frame Relay (MLFR) bundle. Several types of LIP messages allow member links to join and leave the bundle.

link layer

Data Link Layer. The second level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data between network entities by splitting data into frames to send on the physical layer and receiving acknowledgment frames. It performs error checking and retransmits frames not received correctly. In general, it controls the flow of information across the link, providing an error-free virtual channel to the network layer. See also OSI.

Link Management Protocol

LMP. Part of GMPLS, a protocol used to define a forwarding adjacency between peers and to maintain and allocate resources on the traffic engineering links.

link protection

Method of establishing bypass label-switched paths (LSPs) to ensure that traffic going over a specific interface to a neighboring router can continue to reach the router if that interface fails. The bypass LSP uses a different interface and path to reach the same destination.

link services intelligent queuing interfaces

LSQ. Interfaces configured on the Adaptive Services PIC or ASM that support MLPPP and MLFR traffic and also fully support Junos OS class-of-service (CoS) components.

link-state

link-state routing. One of two main classes of routing protocols used in packet-switched networks for computer communications; the other main class is distance-vector. The basic concept of link-state routing is that every node constructs a map of the connectivity of the network, determining which nodes are connected to which other nodes. Each node then independently calculates the best next hop from it to every possible destination in the network, using the Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm. The collection of best next hops forms the node's routing table. Examples of link-state routing protocols include OSPF and IS-IS.

link-state acknowledgment

OSPF data packet used to inform a neighbor that a link-state update packet has been successfully received.

link-state advertisement

LSA. OSPF data structure that is advertised in a link-state update packet. Each LSA uniquely describes a portion of the OSPF network, containing information about neighbors and path costs. LSAs are used by the receiving routers to maintain their routing tables.

link-state database

LSDB. Contains all routing knowledge in a link-state network. Each router runs the SPF algorithm against this database to locate the best network path to each destination in the network.

link-state PDU

LSP. Packet that contains information about the state of adjacencies to neighboring systems.

link-state protocol

LSP. Routing protocol, such as OSPF and IS-IS, where each router shares information with other routers (by flooding information about itself to every reachable router in the routing area) to determine the best path. Link-state protocols use characteristics of the route such as speed and cost, as well as current congestion, to determine the best path. In link-state routing, every node receives a map of the connectivity of the network, then independently calculates the best next hop for every possible destination in the network. The collection of best next hops forms the routing table for the node. Link state information is transmitted only when something has changed in the network. See also routing table.

link-state replication

Addition to the SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS) functionality that helps promote redundancy of the link PICs used in LSQ configurations. If the active SONET PIC fails, links from the standby PIC are used without causing a link renegotiation. Also called interface preservation.

link-state request list

List generated by an OSPF router during the exchange of database information while forming an adjacency. Advertised information by a neighbor that the local router does not contain is placed in this list.

link-state request packet

OSPF data packet used by a router to request database information from a neighboring router.

link-state routing

One of two main classes of routing protocols used in packet-switched networks for computer communications; the other main class is distance-vector. The basic concept of link-state routing is that every node constructs a map of the connectivity of the network, determining which nodes are connected to which other nodes. Each node then independently calculates the best next hop from it to every possible destination in the network, using the Shortest Path First (SPF) algorithm. The collection of best next hops forms the node's routing table. Examples of link-state routing protocols include OSPF and IS-IS.

link-state update

OSPF data packet that contains one of multiple LSAs. It is used to advertise routing knowledge into the network.

linktrace message

LTM. Used by one maintenance end point (MEP) to trace the path to another MEP or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the same domain. It is needed for loopback (ping). All MIPs respond with a linktrace response to the originating MEP. After decreasing the TTL by one, MIPs forward the linktrace message until the destination MIP/MEP is reached. If the destination is a MEP, every MIP along a given maintenance association responds to the originating MEP. The originating MEP can then determine the MAC address of all MIPs along the maintenance association and their precise location with respect to the originating MEP. See also MIP, MEP.

Linktrace Protocol

Protocol used for path discovery between a pair of maintenance points. Linktrace messages are triggered by an administrator using the traceroute command to verify the path between a pair of maintenance end points (MEPs) under the same maintenance association. Linktrace messages can also be used to verify the path between an MEP and a maintenance intermediate point (MIP) under the same maintenance domain. The operation of IEEE 802.1ag linktrace request and response messages is similar to the operation of Layer 3 traceroute commands.

linktrace response

LTR. Also known as link trace message, LTM. Used by one maintenance end point (MEP) to trace the path to another MEP or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the same domain. It is needed for loopback (ping). All MIPs respond with a linktrace response to the originating MEP. After decreasing the TTL by one, MIPs forward the linktrace message until the destination MIP/MEP is reached. If the destination is a MEP, every MIP along a given maintenance association responds to the originating MEP. The originating MEP can then determine the MAC address of all MIPs along the maintenance association and their precise location with respect to the originating MEP.

LIP

Link Integrity Protocol. Runs on the member links of a Multilink Frame Relay (MLFR) bundle. Several types of LIP messages allow member links to join and leave the bundle.

LLC

logical link control. Data-link layer protocol used on a LAN. The LLC is responsible for managing communications links and handling frame traffic. LLC1 provides connectionless data transfer, and LLC2 provides connection-oriented data transfer. See also data link layer, OSI.

LLC frame

Unit of data that contains specific information about the LLC layer and identifies line protocols associated with the layer. Also called LLC.

LM

line module. Acts as a frame forwarding engine for the physical interfaces (I/O modules and IOAs) and processes data from different types of network connections.

LMI

Local Management Interface. Enhancements to the basic Frame Relay specifications, providing support for the following:

- A keepalive mechanism that verifies the flow of data.
- A multicast mechanism that provides a network server with a local DLCI and multicast DLCI.
- In Frame Relay networks, global addressing that gives DLCIs global instead of local significance.
- A status mechanism that provides a switch with ongoing status reports on known DLCIs.

LMP

Link Management Protocol. Part of GMPLS, a protocol used to define a forwarding adjacency between peers and to maintain and allocate resources on the traffic engineering links.

LNS

L2TP network server. Node that acts as one side of an L2TP tunnel endpoint and is a peer to the LAC. The logical termination point of a PPP connection that is being tunneled from the remote system by the LAC.

lo0

loopback interface. Logical interface that emulates a physical interface on the security device, but is always available because it is independent of any physical interfaces. When configured with an address, the loopback interface is the default address for the routing platform and any unnumbered interfaces. See also unnumbered interface.

load balancing

Method used to distribute workload to processors to improve the throughput of concurrent connections. Basically, it installs all next-hop destinations for an active route in the forwarding table. You can use load balancing across multiple paths between routers. The behavior of load balancing depends on the version of the Internet Processor ASIC in the router. Also called per-packet load balancing.

loading

OSPF adjacency state in which the local router sends link-state request packets to its neighbor and waits for the appropriate link-state updates from that neighbor.

local address pool alias

Alternate name for an existing local address pool. It consists of an alias name and a pool name.

local address server

Server that allocates IP addresses from a pool of addresses stored locally on the router. A local address server is defined in the context of a virtual router. Local address servers exist as long as the virtual router exists or until you remove them by deleting all configured pools.

local area network

LAN. Covers a local area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings such as a campus.local area network. Covers a local area, like a home, office, or small group of buildings such as a campus.

Local Area Network Physical Layer Device

LAN PHY. Allows 10-Gigabit Ethernet wide area links to use existing Ethernet applications. See also PHY and WAN PHY.

local ATM passthrough

Ability of the router to emulate packet-based ATM switching. Useful for customers who run IP in most of their network but still have to carry a small amount of native ATM traffic.

local authentication server

AAA server that enables the E Series router to provide local PAP and CHAP user authentication for subscribers. The router also provides limited authorization, using the IP address, IP address pool, and operational virtual router parameters. When a subscriber logs in to the E Series router that is using local authentication, the subscriber is authenticated against user entries in a local user database; the optional parameters are assigned to subscribers after the subscriber is authenticated.

local loopback

Ability to loop the data back toward the router on supported line modules. Also sends an alarm indication signal out toward the network.

Local Management Interface

LMI. Enhancements to the basic Frame Relay specifications, providing support for the following:

- A keepalive mechanism that verifies the flow of data.
- A multicast mechanism that provides a network server with a local DLCI and multicast DLCI.
- In Frame Relay networks, global addressing that gives DLCIs global instead of local significance.
- A status mechanism that provides a switch with ongoing status reports on known DLCIs.

local packet

Chunk of data destined for or sent by the Routing Engine.

local preference

Optional BGP path attribute (LOCAL_PREF) carried in internal BGP update packets that indicates the degree of preference for an external route.

local RIB

Logical software table that contains BGP routes used by the local router to forward data packets.

local routing table

Database local to the protocol that contains all the routes known by that protocol to the prefixes in the table. Also known as a routing information base, or RIB. See also global routing table, routing table.

local significance

Concept used in an MPLS network where the label values are unique only between two neighbor routers.

local-use community

Convenient way to categorize groups of routes to facilitate the use of routing policies. Also called private community or general community.

lockout

Object state during which the object cannot be edited.

log

Grouping of log entries, which are the systematic recording of specific types of data processing events.

log category

Term to describe the log type, such as alarm, config, traffic, and so on.

log ID

Unique identifier label for a log, derived from a combination of the date and log number.

Log Investigator

Module of the NSM user interface that has tools for analyzing log entries in depth. Use the Log Investigator to manipulate and change constraints on log information, correlate log entries visually and rapidly, and filter log entries while maintaining the broader picture.

Log Viewer

Module of the NSM user interface that displays the entries of traffic logs for devices on your network.

logical interface

On a physical interface, the configuration of one or more units which include all addressing, protocol information, and other logical interface properties that enable the physical interface to function.

logical link control

LLC. Data-link layer protocol used on a LAN. The LLC is responsible for managing communications links and handling frame traffic. LLC1 provides connectionless data transfer, and LLC2 provides connection-oriented data transfer. See also data link layer, OSI.

logical operator

Characters used in a firewall filter to represent a Boolean AND or OR operation.

logical router

Also called logical system. Logical routing device that is partitioned from an M Series or T Series routing platform. Each logical system independently performs a subset of the tasks performed by the main router and has a unique routing table, interfaces, policies, and routing instances.

logical system

Logical routing device that is partitioned from an M Series, MX Series, or T Series routing platform. Each logical system independently performs a subset of the tasks performed by the main router and has a unique routing table, interfaces, policies, and routing instances.

longer

Junos OS routing policy match type that represents all routes more specific than the given subnet, but not the given subnet itself. It is similar to a mathematical greater-than operation.

loopback

Also called local loopback, network loopback, remote loopback. Ability to loop the data back toward the router on supported line modules. Also sends an alarm indication signal out toward the network.

loopback address

IP address type used by a node to send a packet to itself (specially designated for the software loopback interface of a device). The loopback interface has no hardware associated with it and is not physically connected to a network.

loopback interface

lo0. Logical interface that emulates a physical interface on the security device, but is always available because it is independent of any physical interfaces. When configured with an address, the loopback interface is the default address for the routing platform and any unnumbered interfaces. See also unnumbered interface.

loose hop

In the context of traffic engineering, a path that can use any router or any number of other intermediate (transit) points to reach the next address in the path. (Definition from RFC 791, modified to fit LSPs.) See also strict hop.

loose-source routing

MPLS routing method that specifies a set of hops that the packet must traverse. The specified hops do not need to be adjacent, and the routing does not need to include every hop in the path. See also strict-source routing.

loss-priority map

Maps the loss priority of incoming packets based on code point values.

low-density keepalive mode

Mode in which, when the keepalive timer expires, the interface always sends an LCP echo request, regardless of whether the peer is silent. See also high-density keepalive mode.

lower-speed IQ interfaces

E1, NxDS0, and T1 interfaces configured on an IQ PIC.

LPDU

LLC protocol data unit. Unit of data that contains specific information about the LLC layer and identifies line protocols associated with the layer (LLC frame) on a DLSw network.

LSA

link-state advertisement. OSPF data structure that is advertised in a link-state update packet. Each LSA uniquely describes a portion of the OSPF network, containing information about neighbors and path costs. LSAs are used by the receiving routers to maintain their routing tables.

LSDB

link-state database. Computerized representation of the topology of an autonomous system. See also AS.

LSI

label-switched interface. Logical interface supported by the Junos OS that provides VPN services (such as VPLS and Layer 3 VPNs) normally provided by a Tunnel Services PIC.

LSP

- label-switched path. Sequence of routers that cooperatively perform MPLS operations for a packet stream; the path traversed by a packet that is routed by MPLS. An LSP is a unidirectional, point-to-point, half-duplex connection carrying information downstream from the ingress (first) router to the egress (last) router. The ingress and egress routers cannot be the same router.
- link-state PDU (protocol data unit). In IS-IS, a broadcast by link-state protocols containing information about neighbors and path costs that is used to maintain routing tables. See also link-state advertisement.
- link-state protocol. Routing protocol, such as OSPF and IS-IS, where each router shares information with other routers (by flooding information about itself to every reachable router in the routing area) to determine the best path. Link-state protocols use characteristics of the route such as speed and cost, as well as current congestion, to determine the best path. In link-state routing, every node receives a map of the connectivity of the network, then independently calculates the best next hop for every possible destination in the network. The collection of best next hops forms the routing table for the node. Link state information is transmitted only when something has changed in the network. See also routing table.

LSP priority level

Relative importance of an LSP that determines which LSPs can preempt other LSPs. Priorities are in the range 0–7 in order of decreasing priority.

LSQ

link services intelligent queuing interfaces. Interfaces configured on the Adaptive Services PIC or ASM that support MLPPP and MLFR traffic and also fully support Junos OS class-of-service (CoS) components.

LSR

label-switching router. Router on which MPLS is enabled and that can process label-switched packets; an MPLS node that can forward Layer 3 packets based on their labels.

LTM

linktrace message. Used by one maintenance end point (MEP) to trace the path to another MEP or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the same domain. It is needed for loopback (ping). All MIPs respond with a linktrace response to the originating MEP. After decreasing the TTL by one, MIPs forward the linktrace message until the destination MIP/MEP is reached. If the destination is a MEP, every MIP along a given maintenance association responds to the originating MEP. The originating MEP can then determine the MAC address of all MIPs along the maintenance association and their precise location with respect to the originating MEP.

LTR

linktrace response. Also known as linktrace message, LTM. Used by one maintenance end point (MEP) to trace the path to another MEP or maintenance intermediate point (MIP) in the same domain. It is needed for loopback (ping). All MIPs respond with a linktrace response to the originating MEP. After decreasing the TTL by one, MIPs forward the linktrace message until the destination MIP/MEP is reached. If the destination is a MEP, every MIP along a given maintenance association responds to the originating MEP. The originating MEP can then determine the MAC address of all MIPs along the maintenance association and their precise location with respect to the originating MEP.

### M

MA

maintenance association. Combined set of nodes (MEPs and MIPs) within a maintenance domain. See also LTR, linktrace message, LTR, linktrace response.

MAC

- media access control (address). A unique code assigned to every piece of hardware that connects to the network. In the OSI seven-layer networking model defined by the IEEE, MAC is the lower sublayer of the data link layer. The MAC sublayer governs protocol access to the physical network medium. By using the MAC addresses that are assigned to all ports on a router, multiple devices on the same physical link can uniquely identify one another at the data link layer. See also MAC address.
- Message Authentication Code. In cryptography, a short piece of information used to authenticate a message. A MAC algorithm accepts as input a secret key and an arbitrary-length message to be authenticated, and outputs a MAC, or a tag. Sometimes called message integrity code (MIC) to distinguish the MAC function from the MAC (media access control) address.

MAC address

media access control address. Serial number permanently stored in a device adapter to uniquely identify the device. See also MAC.

MAC address validation

Verification process performed on each incoming packet to prevent spoofing on IP Ethernet-based interfaces, including bridged Ethernet interfaces.

magic number

Randomly generated number that identifies one end of a point-to-point connection. Each side negotiates its magic number, taking note of the other’s magic number. If both sides discover that the magic numbers they are negotiating are the same, each side attempts to change its magic number. If they are not successful, and the magic numbers remain the same, the session terminates because of the loopback that is detected.

main mode

Mode of IKE phase 1 negotiations that protects the identities of the peers during negotiations and enables greater proposal flexibility than aggressive mode. Main mode is more time-consuming than aggressive mode because more messages are exchanged between peers. (Six messages are exchanged in main mode.) See also aggressive mode.

maintenance association

MA. Combined set of nodes (MEPs and MIPs) within a maintenance domain. See also LTR, linktrace message, LTR, linktrace response.

maintenance association end point

MEP, maintenance end point. End point (beginning or ending) of a maintenance domain. See also LTR, linktrace message, LTR, linktrace response.

maintenance association ID

Identifier associated with the maintenance association.

maintenance association intermediate point

MIP. Intermediate node within the maintenance domain. See also LTM, linktrace message, LTR, linktrace response.

maintenance data link

MDL. Type of message that can be used to determine the status of a line and to display statistics for the remote end of a connection.

maintenance domain

Part of the network where connectivity fault detection is performed.

maintenance end point

MEP. End point (beginning or ending) of a maintenance domain. See also LTM.

maintenance point

MP. A MEP or a MIP is a maintenance point.

MAM

maximum allocation bandwidth constraints model. In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, a constraint model that divides the available bandwidth among the different classes. Sharing of bandwidth among the class types is not allowed.

management daemon

mgd. Junos OS process responsible for managing all user access to the router.

management Ethernet interface

Permanent interface that provides an out-of-band method, such as SSH and telnet, to connect to the routing platform. SNMP can use the management interface to gather statistics from the routing platform. Called fxp0 on some routing platforms. See also permanent interface.

Management Information Base

MIB. Definition of an object that can be managed by SNMP.

Management Module, JCS

JCS Management Module. Chassis management hardware and software used to access and configure the Juniper Control System (JCS) platform.

Manual Commit Mode

Feature of JunosE Software where configuration changes affect only the current system configuration (the running configuration), without affecting the CLI prompt.

manual secure IP interfaces

Interfaces that use a preconfigured set of SA parameters to secure traffic flowing through a secure IP interface. If these are not used, the interface drops all traffic it receives. The router keeps statistics for dropped traffic. Both peer security gateways must contain a manually provisioned secure IP tunnel. See also signaled secure IP interface.

map tag

Unique string used to identify a route map.

mapped IP address

MIP. Direct one-to-one mapping of traffic destined for one IP address to another IP address.

mapping agent

Router used in an auto-RP multicast network to select the rendezvous point for all multicast group addresses. The rendezvous point is then advertised to all other routers in the domain.

martian address

Network address about which all information is ignored.

martian route

Network routes about which all information is ignored. The Junos OS does not allow martian routes in the inet.0 routing table.

MAS

mobile network access subsystem. GSN application subsystem that contains the access server.

mask

Also called subnet mask. Number of bits of the network address used to separate the network information from the host information in a Class A, Class B, or Class C IP address, allowing the creation of subnetworks. In binary notation, a series of 1s followed by a series of contiguous 0s. The 1s represent the network number; the 0s represent the host number. Use of masks can divide networks into subnetworks by extending the network portion of the address into the host portion. Subnetting increases the number of subnetworks and reduces the number of hosts.

master

Router in control of the OSPF database exchange during an adjacency formation.

master router

VRRP router that takes the responsibility of forwarding packets sent to the IP addresses associated with the virtual router, and that answers ARP requests for these IP addresses. If the IP address owner is available, it always becomes the master. See also backup router.

match

Logical concept used in a routing policy or firewall filter, it denotes the criteria used to find a route or IP packet before an action is performed.

match clause

Portion of a route map that specifies the attribute values that determine whether a route matches the route map. A route that has the same attribute values passes the match condition. Routes that pass all the match conditions match the route map.

match policy list

Similar to a route map but contains only match clauses and no set clauses. See also policy list.

match type

Junos OS syntax used in a route filter to better describe the routes that should match the policy term.

MAU

medium attachment unit. Small device that converts signals between an attachment unit interface (AUI) and coaxial cable.

maximum allocation bandwidth constraints model

MAM. In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, a constraint model that divides the available bandwidth among the different classes. Sharing of bandwidth among the class types is not allowed.

maximum received reconstructed unit

MRRU. Similar to the maximum transmission unit (MTU), but is specific to link services interfaces such as MLPPP. See also MTU.

maximum transmission unit

MTU. Size in bytes of the largest protocol data unit that can be passed on in a link. The standard MTU for an Ethernet link is 1500.

MB

megabyte, MiB. Represents approximately 1,000,000 bytes, depending on whether a decimal (MB) or a binary (MiB) system of measurement is being used. In storage devices, the standard value for one megabyte (MB) is 1,000,000 bytes. For computer memory, however, one megabyte is typically 1,048,576 (1024 x 1024) bytes. When precise calculations of storage capacity or memory capacity are required, it is important to use an appropriate value for megabytes.

Mb

megabit, Mbit. Unit used in measuring digital transmission (data transfer rates), one megabit is equal to 1,000,000 bits. Not to be confused with megabytes, the megabit base unit is an 8-bit-sized byte, so one megabit is equal to 125,000 bytes.

MBGP

Multicast Border Gateway Protocol, MP-BGP. Also called Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol. Extensions to BGP that permit the configuration of a multicast routing topology within and between BGP ASs. A BGP unicast routing protocol that allows different types of addresses (known as address families) to be distributed in parallel. This allows information about the topology of IP multicast-capable routers to be exchanged separately from the topology of normal unicast routers.

Mbit

megabit, Mb. Unit used in measuring digital transmission (data transfer rates), one megabit is equal to 1,000,000 bits. Not to be confused with megabytes, the megabit base unit is an 8-bit-sized byte, so one megabit is equal to 125,000 bytes.

MBone

multicast backbone. Interconnected set of subnetworks and routers that support the delivery of IP multicast traffic. The MBone is a virtual network that is layered on top of sections of the physical Internet.

MCC

Mobile Country Code. Used to identify the country in which a mobile station is located. The MCC is part of the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number, which uniquely identifies a particular subscriber in a mobile network.

MCS

Miscellaneous Control Subsystem. On the M40e and M160 routers, provides control and monitoring functions for router components and SONET clocking for the router.

MD5

Message Digest 5. One-way hashing algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash used for generating message authentication signatures. MD5 is used in AH and ESP. See also hashing, SHA-1.

MD5 authentication

HMAC MD5 authentication. Method for IS-IS that prevents unauthorized routers from injecting false routing information into your network or forming adjacencies with your router. The router creates secure digests of the packets, encrypted according to the HMAC MD5 message-digest algorithms. The digests are inserted into the packets from which they are created. Depending on the commands you issue, the digests can be inserted into hello packets, link-state PDUs, complete sequence number PDUs, and partial sequence number PDUs.

MDL

maintenance data link. Type of message that can be used to determine the status of a line and to display statistics for the remote end of a connection.

MDRR

modified deficit round robin. Method for selecting queues to be serviced. See also queue.

MDT

multicast distribution tree. Path between the sender (host) and the multicast group (receiver or listener).

mean time between failures

MTBF. Measure of hardware component reliability.

MED

multiple exit discriminator. Optional BGP path attribute consisting of a metric value that is used to determine the exit point to a destination when all other factors determining the exit point are equal.

media access control (address)

MAC address. A unique code assigned to every piece of hardware that connects to the network. In the OSI seven-layer networking model defined by the IEEE, MAC is the lower sublayer of the data link layer. The MAC sublayer governs protocol access to the physical network medium. By using the MAC addresses that are assigned to all ports on a router, multiple devices on the same physical link can uniquely identify one another at the data link layer.

Media Gateway Control Protocol

MGCP. Text-based, application layer protocol used for call set up and control. The protocol is based on a master/slave call control architecture: the media gateway controller (call agent) maintains call control intelligence, and media gateways carry out the instructions from the call agent.

Media Gateway Controller

MGC. Avaya media server that controls the parts of the call state that pertain to connection control for media channels in a media gateway. The MGC is the controlling entity in an ITU-T H.248 relationship.

mediation device

Device that receives mirrored traffic from E Series routers during packet mirroring. Also called the analyzer device.

medium attachment unit

MAU.medium attachment unit. Small device that converts signals between an attachment unit interface (AUI) and coaxial cable.

megabit

Mbit or Mb. Unit used in measuring digital transmission (data transfer rates), one megabit is equal to 1,000,000 bits. Not to be confused with megabytes, the megabit base unit is an 8-bit-sized byte, so one megabit is equal to 125,000 bytes.

megabyte

MB or MiB. Represents approximately 1,000,000 bytes, depending on whether a decimal (MB) or a binary (MiB) system of measurement is being used. In storage devices, the standard value for one megabyte (MB) is 1,000,000 bytes. For computer memory, however, one megabyte is typically 1,048,576 (1024 x 1024) bytes. When precise calculations of storage capacity or memory capacity are required, it is important to use an appropriate value for megabytes.

member AS

Name of the autonomous system being included in a BGP confederation.

MEP

maintenance end point. End point (beginning or ending) of a maintenance domain. See also LTM, link trace message.

mesh

Network topology in which devices are organized in a manageable, segmented manner with many, often redundant, interconnections between network nodes.

message aggregation

Extension to the Resource Reservation Protocol (RSVP) specification that allows neighboring routers to bundle up to 30 RSVP messages into a single protocol packet.

Message Authentication Code

MAC. In cryptography, a short piece of information used to authenticate a message. A MAC algorithm accepts as input a secret key and an arbitrary-length message to be authenticated, and outputs a MAC, or a tag. Sometimes called message integrity code (MIC) to distinguish the MAC function from the MAC (media access control) address.

Message Digest 5

MD5. One-way hashing algorithm that produces a 128-bit hash used for generating message authentication signatures. MD5 is used in AH and ESP. See also hashing, SHA-1.

metric

Value associated with a route that the virtual router uses to select the active route when there are multiple routes to the same destination network with the same preference value. The metric value for connected routes is always 0. The default metric value for static routes is 1, but you can specify a different value when defining a static route.

MGC

Media Gateway Controller. Avaya media server that controls the parts of the call state that pertain to connection control for media channels in a media gateway. The MGC is the controlling entity in an ITU-T H.248 relationship.

MGCP

Media Gateway Control Protocol. Text-based, application layer protocol used for call set up and control. The protocol is based on a master/slave call control architecture: the media gateway controller (call agent) maintains call control intelligence, and media gateways carry out the instructions from the call agent.

mgd

management daemon. Junos OS process responsible for managing all user access to the router.

MiB

megabyteMB. Represents approximately 1,000,000 bytes, depending on whether a decimal (MB) or a binary (MiB) system of measurement is being used. In storage devices, the standard value for one megabyte (MB) is 1,000,000 bytes. For computer memory, however, one megabyte is typically 1,048,576 (1024 x 1024) bytes. When precise calculations of storage capacity or memory capacity are required, it is important to use an appropriate value for megabytes.

MIB

Management Information Base. Definition of an object that can be managed by SNMP.

MIC

Modular Interface Card. Network interface–specific card that can be installed on an MPC in the router.

Microcom Networking Protocol

MNP. Protocol that provides error correction and data compression for asynchronous modem transmission

midplane

Hardware component that physically separates front and rear cavities inside the chassis, distributes power from the power supplies, and transfers packets and signals between router components that plug into it. See also redundancy midplane.

Mini-Physical Interface Module

Mini-PIM. Circuit board designed for use with Juniper Networks devices. The board enables easy addition or modification of physical interfaces on a device.

Mini-PIM

Mini-Physical Interface Module. Circuit board designed for use with Juniper Networks devices. The board enables easy addition or modification of physical interfaces on a device.

MIP

- maintenance intermediate point. Intermediate node within the maintenance domain. See also LTM, linktrace message, LTR, linktrace response.
- mapped Internet Protocol (IP) address. Direct one-to-one mapping of traffic destined for one IP address to another IP address.

mirrored interface

Statically or dynamically configured interface on which traffic is being mirrored during packet mirroring on E Series routers.

mirrored user

User whose traffic is being mirrored during packet mirroring on E Series routers.

Miscellaneous Control Subsystem

MCS. On the M40e and M160 routers, provides control and monitoring functions for router components and SONET clocking for the router.

MLD

Multicast Listener Discovery. Protocol that manages the membership of hosts and routers in multicast groups. An IPv6 protocol that hosts use to report their multicast group memberships to neighboring routers. Similarly, multicast routers, such as E Series routers, use MLD to discover which of their hosts belong to multicast groups.

MLD proxy

Method by which the router issues MLD host messages on behalf of hosts that the router discovered through standard MLD interfaces. The router acts as a proxy for its hosts.

MLFR

Multilink Frame Relay. Logically ties together individual circuits, creating a bundle. The logical equivalent of MLPPP, MLFR is used for Frame Relay traffic instead of PPP traffic. FRF.15 and FRF.16 are two implementations of MLFR.

MLPPP

Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol. Enables you to bundle multiple PPP links into a single logical link between two network devices to provide an aggregate amount of bandwidth. The technique is often called bonding or link aggregation. Defined in RFC 1990. See also PPP.

MM

Juniper Control System (JCS) management module.

MMF

multimode fiber. Optical fiber supporting the propagation of multiple frequencies of light. MMF is used for relatively short distances because the modes tend to disperse over longer lengths (called modal dispersion). For longer distances, single-mode fiber (sometimes called monomode) is used. See also single-mode fiber.

MNC

Mobile Network Code. Unique identifier assigned to a mobile operator/carrier. It is used in conjunction with the MCC to specify carrier and country.

MNP

Microcom Networking Protocol. Protocol that provides error correction and data compression for asynchronous modem transmission.

Mobile Country Code

MCC. Used to identify the country in which a mobile station is located. The MCC is part of the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) number, which uniquely identifies a particular subscriber in a mobile network.

mobile network access subsystem

MAS. GSN application subsystem that contains the access server.

Mobile Network Code

MNC. Unique identifier assigned to a mobile operator/carrier. It is used in conjunction with the MCC to specify carrier and country.

mobile point-to-point control subsystem

MPS. GSN application subsystem that controls all functionality associated with a particular connection.

Mobile Station

MS. Mobile device, such as a cellular phone or a mobile personal digital assistant (PDA).

Mobile Station Integrated Services Digital Network Number

MSISDN. Number that callers use to reach a mobile services subscriber.

Mobile Switching Center

MSC. Provides origination and termination functions to calls from a mobile station user.

mobile transport subsystem

MTS. GSN application subsystem that implements all the protocols used by the GSN.

modeling

In NSM, process of creating a non-deployed device configuration.

modified deficit round robin

MDRR. Method for selecting queues to be serviced. See also queue.

Modular Interface Card

MIC. Network interface–specific card that can be installed on an MPC in the router.

Modular Port Concentrator

MPC. Interface concentrator on which modular interface cards (MICs) are mounted. An MPC is inserted into a slot in a Juniper Networks router. See also MIC.

module

In NSM, first-level element in the NSM navigation tree.

mOhm

Unit of mechanical mobility for sound waves. The reciprocal of the mechanical ohm unit of impedance.

MP-BGP

Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol. Also called Multicast Border Gateway Protocol. Extensions to BGP that enable it to carry routing information for multiple network layer protocols instead of only for IP, including the ability to carry multicast routing information.

MPC

Modular Port Concentrator. Interface concentrator on which modular interface cards (MICs) are mounted. An MPC is inserted into a slot in a Juniper Networks router. See also MIC.

MPLS

Multiprotocol Label Switching. Mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that functions by assigning short labels to network packets that describe how to forward them through the network. Also called label switching. See also traffic engineering, TE.

MPLS edge node

MPLS node that connects an MPLS domain with a node outside the domain that either does not run MPLS or is in a different domain.

MPLS egress node

MPLS edge node that handles traffic as it leaves an MPLS domain.

MPLS EXP classifier

Class-of-service (CoS) behavior classifier for classifying packets based on the MPLS experimental bit. See also EXP bits.

MPLS FEC

Set of packets that are all forwarded in the same manner by a given LSR.

MPLS forwarding table

Maps MPLS labels to next hops. MPLS looks up the outermost label in a received packet in the forwarding table to determine what labels to push on the packet's label stack and where to send the packet.

MPLS ingress node

Edge node that handles traffic as it enters an MPLS domain.

MPLS node

Router running MPLS; it is aware of MPLS control protocols, operates one or more Layer 3 routing protocols, and is capable of forwarding packets based on labels. Optionally, an MPLS node can be capable of forwarding native Layer 3 packets.

MPLS traffic engineering

Ability to establish LSPs according to particular criteria (constraints) in order to meet specific traffic requirements rather than relying on the path chosen by the conventional IGP. The constraint-based IGP examines the available network resources and calculates the shortest path for a particular tunnel that has the resources required by that tunnel. Traffic engineering enables you to make the best use of your network resources by reducing overuse and underuse of certain links.

MPS

mobile point-to-point control subsystem. GSN application subsystem that controls all functionality associated with a particular connection.

mroute

Multicast traffic flow entry used for forwarding multicast traffic.

MRRU

maximum received reconstructed unit. Similar to the maximum transmission unit (MTU), but is specific to link services interfaces such as MLPPP. See also MTU.

MS

Mobile Station. Mobile device, such as a cellular phone or a mobile personal digital assistant (PDA).

MSA

Multisource Agreement. Definition of a fiber-optic transceiver module that conforms to the 10-Gigabit Ethernet standard. See also XENPAK module.

MSC

Mobile Switching Center. Provides origination and termination functions to calls from a mobile station user.

MSDP

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol. Used to connect multicast routing domains to allow the domains to discover multicast sources from other domains. It typically runs on the same router as the PIM sparse mode rendezvous point (RP).

MSIN

Mobile Subscriber Identification Number. A unique number to identify subscribers in a mobile network, used within the International Mobile Subcriber Identity (IMSI).

MSISDN

Mobile Station Integrated Services Digital Network Number. Number that callers use to reach a mobile services subscriber.

MST

multiple spanning-tree. A region or area within the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP). Spanning-tree protocols are used to prevent loops in bridge configurations. Unlike other types of STPs, MSTP can block ports selectively by VLAN. See also MSTP, RSTP.

MSTI

multiple spanning-tree instance. One of a number of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST region. The MSTI provides a simple and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST configuration table used by the MST bridges of that MST region. See also CIST, common and internal spanning tree.

MSTP

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol. Spanning tree protocol used to prevent loops in bridge configurations. Unlike other types of STPs, MSTP can block ports selectively by VLAN. See also RSTP.

MTBF

mean time between failures. Measure of hardware component reliability.

MTS

mobile transport subsystem. GSN application subsystem that implements all the protocols used by the GSN.

MTU

maximum transmission unit. Size in bytes of the largest protocol data unit that can be passed on in a link. The standard MTU for an Ethernet link is 1500.

multicast

Operation of sending network traffic from one network node to multiple network nodes.

multicast address

Type of IPv4 and IPv6 address used for sending packets to multiple destinations. Improves network efficiency by enabling a host to transmit a packet to a targeted group of receivers.

multicast backbone

MBone. Interconnected set of subnetworks and routers that support the delivery of IP multicast traffic. The MBone is a virtual network that is layered on top of sections of the physical Internet.

Multicast Border Gateway Protocol

MBGP, P-BGP. Also called Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol. Extensions to BGP that permit the configuration of a multicast routing topology within and between BGP ASs. A BGP unicast routing protocol that allows different types of addresses (known as address families) to be distributed in parallel. This allows information about the topology of IP multicast-capable routers to be exchanged separately from the topology of normal unicast routers.

multicast distribution tree

MDT. Path between the sender (host) and the multicast group (receiver or listener).

Multicast Listener Discovery

MLD. Protocol that manages the membership of hosts and routers in multicast groups. An IPv6 protocol that hosts use to report their multicast group memberships to neighboring routers. Similarly, multicast routers, such as E Series routers, use MLD to discover which of their hosts belong to multicast groups.

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol

MSDP. Used to connect multicast routing domains to allow the domains to discover multicast sources from other domains. It typically runs on the same router as the PIM sparse mode rendezvous point (RP).

multicast-scope number

Number used for configuring the multicast scope. Configuring a scope number constrains the scope of a multicast session. The number value can be any hexadecimal number from 0 through F. The multicast-scope value is a number from 0 through 15, or a specified keyword with an associated prefix range. For example, link-local (value=2), corresponding prefix 224.0.0.0/24.

multiclass LSP

In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, a multiclass label-switched path (LSP) functions like a standard LSP, but also allows you to reserve bandwidth for multiple class types. The experimental (EXP) bits of the MPLS header are used to distinguish between class types.

multiclass MLPPP

Enables multiple classes of service when you use MLPPP. Defined in RFC 2686, The Multi-Class Extension to Multi-Link PPP.

multifield classifier

Method for classifying traffic flows. Unlike a behavior aggregate (BA) classifier, a multifield classifier examines multiple fields in the packet to apply class-of-service (CoS) settings. Examples of fields that a multifield classifier examines include the source and destination address of the packet, as well as the source and destination port numbers of the packet. See also BA classifier, classification.

multihoming

Network topology that uses multiple connections between customer and provider devices to provide redundancy.

Multilink Frame Relay

MLFR. Logically ties together individual circuits, creating a bundle. The logical equivalent of MLPPP, MLFR is used for Frame Relay traffic instead of PPP traffic. FRF.15 and FRF.16 are two implementations of MLFR.

Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol

MLPPP. Enables you to bundle multiple PPP links into a single logical link between two network devices to provide an aggregate amount of bandwidth. The technique is often called bonding or link aggregation. Defined in RFC 1990, The PPP Multilink Protocol (MP). See also PPP.

multimode fiber

MMF. Optical fiber supporting the propagation of multiple frequencies of light. MMF is used for relatively short distances because the modes tend to disperse over longer lengths (called modal dispersion). For longer distances, single-mode fiber (sometimes called monomode) is used. See also single-mode fiber.

multinetting

Method for adding more than one IP address to an IP interface—that is, a primary address and one or more secondary addresses.

multiple exit discriminator

MED. Optional BGP path attribute consisting of a metric value that is used to determine the exit point to a destination when all other factors determining the exit point are equal.

Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol

MSTP. Spanning tree protocol used to prevent loops in bridge configurations. Unlike other types of STPs, MSTP can block ports selectively by VLAN. See also RSTP.

multiple spanning-tree instance

MSTI. One of a number of spanning trees calculated by MSTP within an MST region. The MSTI provides a simple and fully connected active topology for frames classified as belonging to a VLAN that is mapped to the MSTI by the MST configuration table used by the bridges of that MST region. See also CIST, common and internal spanning tree.

multipoint connection

Single-source end system connected to multiple destination end systems. Multipoint indicates a nonbroadcast multiaccess (NBMA) interface.

Multiprotocol Border Gateway Protocol

MP-BGP. Also called Multicast Border Gateway Protocol. Extensions to BGP that enable it to carry routing information for multiple network layer protocols instead of only for IP, including the ability to carry multicast routing information.

Multiprotocol Label Switching

MPLS. Mechanism for engineering network traffic patterns that functions by assigning short labels to network packets that describe how to forward them through the network. Also called label switching. See also traffic engineering, TE.

multisource agreement

MSA. Specification of a fiber-optic transceiver module that conforms to the 10-Gigabit Ethernet standard. See also XENPAK module.

munged QoS profile

Set of rules used for a given forwarding interface. This set results from a process in which rules from all the QoS profiles are combined.

### N

n-selector

Last byte of a nonclient peer address.

named path

Junos OS syntax that specifies a portion of or the entire network path that should be used as a constraint in signaling an MPLS label-switched path.

namespace

In Media Flow Controller, a defined collection of delivery policies for different categories of content or domains.

NAPT

Network Address Port Translation. Method that translates the addresses and transport identifiers of many private hosts into a few external addresses and transport identifiers to make efficient use of globally registered IP addresses. NAPT extends the level of translation beyond that of basic NAT. See also NAT.

NAS

network access server. Device that provides connections to a single user, to a network or subnetwork, and to interconnected networks. In reference to TACACS+, the NAS is the E Series router.

NAT

Network Address Translation. Method of concealing a set of host addresses on a private network behind a pool of public addresses. Using NAT allows conservation of registered IP addresses within private networks, simplifies IP address management through a form of transparent routing, and increases network privacy by hiding internal IP addresses from external networks. It can be used as a security measure to protect the host addresses from direct targeting in network attacks. See also bidirectional NAT, traditional NAT, twice NAT.

NAT object

Global object that contains references to device-specific NAT configurations, enabling multiple devices to share a single object. In NSM, use the Device Manager to configure NAT for each device, then create a global NAT object that includes the device-specific NAT configuration. Use global NAT objects in security policies and VPNs; when you update a device, that device automatically replaces the global NAT object with its device-specific NAT configuration.

NAT passthrough mode

NAT mode in which the router does not check UDP checksums. Used when a NAT device can change the IP address while the UDP header is encrypted, and then the UDP checksum cannot be recalculated. Using this mode for a single remote user does not compromise security, because IPsec protects UDP with an authentication algorithm far stronger than UDP checksums. However, NAT passthrough mode does not support secure access to the router by multiple remote users at locations such as hotels or airports where a NAT device resides between the router and the remote users. Additionally, this mode does not provide secure access for groups of remote users at corporate locations where a NAT device resides between the company’s intranet and the public IP network. See also NAT-T.

NAT-T

Network Address Translation traversal. IETF standard that allows secure router access for multiple remote hosts behind a NAT device. See also NAT passthrough mode.

National Institute of Standards and Technology

NIST. Nonregulatory U.S. federal agency whose mission is to develop and promote measurement, standards, and technology.

NBMA

nonbroadcast multiaccess. Network that connects two or more devices but does not permit broadcast or multicast addressing. See also BMA.

NCP

Network Control Protocol. Traffic controller used to establish and configure different network layer protocols for the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

NDP

Neighbor Discovery Protocol. Used by IPv6 nodes on the same link to discover each other’s presence, determine each other’s link-layer addresses, find routers, and maintain reachability information about the paths to active neighbors. NDP is defined in RFC 2461 and is equivalent to the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) used with IPv4. See also ARP.

NEBS

Network Equipment Building System. Set of guidelines originated by Bell Laboratories in the 1970s to assist equipment manufacturers in designing products that were compatible with the telecom environment.

neighbor

Adjacent system reachable by traversing a single subnetwork; an immediately adjacent router. Also called a peer. See also adjacency.

Neighbor Discovery

Method for determining the link layer addresses of neighbors that reside on attached links and overriding invalid cache entries. Neighbor Discovery is not a true protocol, but routers and hosts (nodes) use Neighbor Discovery messages to determine the link-layer addresses of neighbors that reside on attached links and to overwrite invalid cache entries. Hosts also use it to find neighboring routers that can forward packets on their behalf, and to actively track the ability to reach neighbors.

neighboring routers

Routers that have interfaces to a common network.

nested profile assignment

Profile that references another profile that configures attributes for a dynamic upper-interface encapsulation type.

NET

network entity title. An ISO network address used by CLNS networks; an identifier of a network entity in an end system or intermediate system. A NET consists of an area address (routing domain), system identifier, and selector.

NetBIOS

network basic input/output system. Application programming interface (API) used by programs on a LAN. NetBIOS provides a uniform set of commands for requesting the lower-level services required to manage names, conduct sessions, and send datagrams between nodes on a network.

netmask

32-bit mask that divides an IP address into subnets and specifies the available hosts in a network.

NetScreen Gatekeeper Protocol

NSGP. Juniper Networks proprietary peer-to-peer protocol that enables a security device to act as a server for voice-over-IP (VoIP) traffic.

NetScreen Redundancy Protocol

NRSP. Proprietary protocol that provides configuration, run time object (RTO) redundancy, and a device failover mechanism for security devices in a high availability (HA) cluster.

network access server

NAS. Device that provides connections to a single user, to a network or subnetwork, and to interconnected networks. In reference to TACACS+, the NAS is the E Series router.

Network Address Port Translation

NAPT. Method that translates the addresses and transport identifiers of many private hosts into a few external addresses and transport identifiers to make efficient use of globally registered IP addresses. NAPT extends the level of translation beyond that of basic NAT. See also NAT.

Network Address Translation

NAT. Also called Network Address Translator. Method of concealing a set of host addresses on a private network behind a pool of public addresses. Using NAT allows conservation of registered IP addresses within private networks, simplifies IP address management through a form of transparent routing, and increases network privacy by hiding internal IP addresses from external networks. It can be used as a security measure to protect the host addresses from direct targeting in network attacks. See also bidirectional NAT, traditional NAT, twice NAT.

Network Address Translation traversal

NAT-T. IETF standard that allows secure router access for multiple remote hosts behind a NAT device. See also NAT passthrough mode.

Network and Security Manager

NSM. Juniper Networks product for centralized management of security appliances designed to reduce the cost of managing security by minimizing repetitive tasks and delegating administrative responsibilities, among other features.

network basic input/output system

NetBIOS. Application programming interface (API) used by programs on a LAN. NetBIOS provides a uniform set of commands for requesting the lower-level services required to manage names, conduct sessions, and send datagrams between nodes on a network.

Network Control Protocol

NCP. Traffic controller used to establish and configure different network layer protocols for the Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

network element

In SNMP, a hardware device, such as a PC or a router. Also known as a managed device.

network entity title

NET. An ISO network address used by CLNS networks; an identifier of a network entity in an end system or intermediate system. A NET consists of an area address (routing domain), system identifier, and selector.

Network Equipment Building System

NEBS. Set of guidelines originated by Bell Laboratories in the 1970s to assist equipment manufacturers in designing products that were compatible with the telecom environment.

Network File System

A protocol that allows a user on a client computer to access files over a network similarly to how local storage is accessed by providing transparent remote access to shared files across networks. It is a standard defined in several RFCs, first appearing in RFC 1094, NFS: Network File System Protocol Specification.

network interface

Interface, such as an Ethernet or SONET/SDH interface, that primarily provides traffic connectivity. See also PIC, services interface.

network layer

Third level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer performs the basic task of routing data across the network (getting packets of data from source to destination).

network layer reachability information

NLRI. Information carried in BGP packets and used by MBGP.

network link advertisement

OSPF link-state advertisement flooded throughout a single area by designated routers to describe all routers attached to the network.

network loopback

Ability to loop data toward the network before the data reaches the frame.

network LSA

OSPF link-state advertisement sent by the designated router on a broadcast or NBMA segment. It advertises the subnet associated with the designated router’s segment.

network management station

NMS, network management system. System that enables a user to configure and monitor network elements.

network management system

NMS, network management station. System that enables a user to configure and monitor network elements.

network mask

Also known as subnet mask. Number of bits of the network address used to separate the network information from the host information in a Class A, Class B, or Class C IP address, allowing the creation of subnetworks. In binary notation, a series of 1s followed by a series of contiguous 0s. The 1s represent the network number; the 0s represent the host number. Use of masks can divide networks into subnetworks by extending the network portion of the address into the host portion. Subnetting increases the number of subnetworks and reduces the number of hosts.

network service access point

NSAP. Network connection identified with a hierarchical network address, specifying the point at which network services are made available to a transport layer entity in the OSI reference model. A valid NSAP address is unique and unambiguously identifies a single system. Also called ISO address.

network service access point identifier

NSAPI. Unique NSAP identifier that unambiguously identifies a single system.

network summary LSA

OSPF link-state advertisement sent by an ABR to advertise internal OSPF routing knowledge across an area boundary. See also ABR.

Network Time Protocol

NTP. Used to synchronize the system clocks of hosts on the Internet to Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). A router can update its clock automatically by configuring it as a Network Time Protocol (NTP) client. Using NTP enables the system to record accurate times of events. You can view the log file of events to monitor the status of the network.

network-to-network interface

NNI. Makes connections possible between users connected to different Frame Relay networks. These separate Frame Relay networks can be considered as subnetworks within a complete network service.

network.conf

Default configuration file for autoinstallation, in which you specify IP addresses and associated hostnames for devices on the network.

NFS

Network File System. A protocol that allows a user on a client computer to access files over a network similarly to how local storage is accessed by providing transparent remote access to shared files across networks. It is a standard defined in several RFCs, first appearing in RFC 1094,NFS: Network File System Protocol Specification.

NIC

Network Information Center. Internet authority responsible for assigning Internet-related numbers, such as IP addresses and autonomous system (AS) numbers. See also IANA.

NIST

National Institute of Standards and Technology. Nonregulatory U.S. federal agency whose mission is to develop and promote measurement, standards, and technology.

NLRI

network layer reachability information. Information carried in BGP packets and used by MBGP.

NMS

network management system; network management station. System that enables a user to configure and monitor network elements.

NNI

network-to-network interface. Makes connections possible between users connected to different Frame Relay networks. These separate Frame Relay networks can be considered as subnetworks within a complete network service.

non-PPP equal access

Method of allowing remote access in which the router provides IP addresses to subscribers’ computers through the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP). This method is particularly convenient for broadband (cable and DSL) environments or environments that use bridged Ethernet over ATM, because network operators can support one central system rather than an individual PPPoE client on each subscriber’s computer.

nonbroadcast multiaccess

NBMA. Network that connects two or more devices but does not permit broadcast or multicast addressing. See also BMA.

nonbroadcast network

Network that has no broadcast capability but supports more than two routers.

nonce

Random value used to detect and protect against replay attacks (IPsec).

nonclient peer

In a BGP route reflection, a BGP peer that is not a member of a cluster. See also client peer.

nonstop forwarding

nonstop forwarding. Also called graceful restart. Process that allows a router whose control plane is undergoing a restart to continue to forward traffic while recovering its state from neighboring routers. Without graceful restart, a control plane restart disrupts services provided by the router. Implementation varies by protocol. See also cold restart, warm restart.

nonstop routing

NSR. High availability feature that allows a routing platform with redundant Routing Engines to preserve routing information on the backup Routing Engine and switch over from the primary Routing Engine to the backup Routing Engine without alerting peer nodes that a change has occurred. NSR uses the graceful Routing Engine switchover (GRES) infrastructure to preserve interface, kernel, and routing information.

nonvolatile storage

NVS. Memory that retains stored information even when power is lost to the device.

not-so-stubby area

NSSA. In OSPF, a type of stub area in which external routes can be flooded.

notification

In SNMP, a message that indicates a status change (equivalent to a trap).

notification cell

Junos OS data structure generated by the Distribution Buffer Manager ASIC that represents the header contents of an IP packet. The Internet Processor ASIC uses the notification cell to perform a forwarding table lookup.

Notification message

BGP message that informs a neighbor about an error condition, and then in some cases terminates the BGP peering session.

NRSP

NetScreen Redundancy Protocol. Proprietary protocol that provides configuration, run time object (RTO) redundancy, and a device failover mechanism for security devices in a high availability (HA) cluster.

NSAP

network service access point. Network connection identified with a hierarchical network address, specifying the point at which network services are made available to a transport layer entity in the OSI reference model. A valid NSAP address is unique and unambiguously identifies a single system. Also called ISO address.

NSAPI

network service access point identifier. Unique NSAP identifier that unambiguously identifies a single system.

nsd

Network security process that interprets, executes, and manages the configuration of extended interface attributes, policies, zones, address books, firewall screens, NAT, and other network security treatments.

NSF

nonstop forwarding. Also called graceful restart. Process that allows a router whose control plane is undergoing a restart to continue to forward traffic while recovering its state from neighboring routers. Without graceful restart, a control plane restart disrupts services provided by the router. Implementation varies by protocol. See also cold restart, warm restart.

NSGP

NetScreen Gatekeeper Protocol. Juniper Networks proprietary peer-to-peer protocol that enables a security device to act as a server for voice-over-IP (VoIP) traffic.

NSM

Network and Security Manager. Juniper Networks product for centralized management of security appliances designed to reduce the cost of managing security by minimizing repetitive tasks and delegating administrative responsibilities, among other features.

NSR

nonstop routing. High availability feature that allows a routing platform with redundant Routing Engines to preserve routing information on the backup Routing Engine and switch over from the primary Routing Engine to the backup Routing Engine without alerting peer nodes that a change has occurred. NSR uses the graceful Routing Engine switchover (GRES) infrastructure to preserve interface, kernel, and routing information.

NSSA

not-so-stubby area. In OSPF, a type of stub area in which external routes can be flooded.

NTP

Network Time Protocol. Used to synchronize the system clocks of hosts on the Internet to Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). A router can update its clock automatically by configuring it as a Network Time Protocol (NTP) client. Using NTP enables the system to record accurate times of events. You can view the log file of events to monitor the status of the network.

null interface

Method on a router for handling undesired traffic. The null interface is always up, cannot be deleted, and cannot forward or receive traffic. It acts as a data sink; you can avoid the overhead involved with using access lists by directing undesired network traffic to the null interface.

Null Register message

PIM message sent by the first-hop router to the rendezvous point (RP). The message informs the RP that the local source is still actively sending multicast packets into the network. See also RP.

numeric range match conditions

Use of numeric values (protocol and port numbers) in the header of an IP packet to match criteria in a firewall filter.

NVS

nonvolatile storage. Memory that retains stored information even when power is lost to the device.

NVS card

Nonvolatile storage memory card on an SRP module that stores system software, configuration files, and core dumps.

### O

Oakley

Key determination protocol based on the Diffie-Hellman algorithm that provides added security, including authentication. Oakley was the key-exchange algorithm mandated for use with the initial version of ISAKMP, although other algorithms can be used. Oakley describes a series of key exchanges called modes, and details the services provided by each, for example, Perfect Forward Secrecy for keys, identity protection, and authentication. See also ISAKMP.

OAM

Operation, Administration, and Maintenance. ATM Forum specification for monitoring ATM virtual connections, verifying that the connection is up and that the router is operational. A set of Ethernet connectivity specifications and functions providing connectivity monitoring, fault detection and notification, fault verification, fault isolation, loopback, and remote defect identification. The primary specifications defining Ethernet OAM are IEEE 902.3ah link-fault management (LFM) and IEEE 902.1ag Ethernet connectivity-fault management (CFM). See also CFM, LFM.

object

Represents reusable information, such as network addresses, individual users and user groups, and commonly used configuration data. In NSM, objects are shared objects, meaning they are shared between the global domain and all subdomains. Objects are the building blocks of the NSM management system.

Object Manager

Module of the NSM user interface that lets you create and manage the objects used in your NSM system.

objects table (mteObjectsTable)

SNMP term for a table that defines objects to add to event messages. You can create a list of user-specified objects and bind them to a trigger event. This can provide a snapshot of other values on a router when the trigger occurs. You can bind objects to a specific trigger, a type of test (for example, existence or Boolean tests), or a type of event (for example, rising or falling events). One of the three parts of the Event MIB. See also event table (mteEventTable), trigger table (mteTriggerTable).

OC

optical carrier. In SONET, the OC level indicates the transmission rate of digital signals on optical fiber.

OC12

SONET line with a transmission speed of 622 Mbps using fiber-optic cables.

OC3

SONET line with a transmission speed of 155.52 Mbps (payload of 150.336 Mbps) using fiber-optic cables. For SDH interfaces, OC3 is also known as STM1.

ODBC

Open Database Connectivity. Standard or open application programming interface (API) for accessing a database.

OIF

outgoing interface. Used by multicast functions within a router to determine which egress ports to use for forwarding multicast groups.

OIR

online insertion and removal. Ability to install or remove certain modules (SRE, NIC, and so on) on the SRX mid-range services gateway without having to power off the device. Each OIR-capable model will have an OFFLINE button that is pressed to take the module offline for removal.

one-rate rate-limit profile

Profile in which, when the committed rate is exceeded, the rate limiter drops a single packet and then resumes transmission up to a configurable burst window. See also rate-limit profile, two-rate rate-limit profile.

op script

operational script. Extensible Stylesheet Language for Transformations (XSLT) script written to automate network troubleshooting and network management. Op scripts can perform any function available through Junos XML protocol remote procedure calls (RPCs).

opaque LSAs

LSAs that provide a generalized way of extending OSPF. The router generates opaque LSAs to carry traffic engineering information, accepts them from other routers, and floods them accordingly. OSPF uses the traffic engineering information to build a database from which paths can be computed for MPLS label-switched paths.

Open Database Connectivity

ODBC. Standard or open application programming interface (API) for accessing a database.

Open message

BGP message that allows two neighbors to negotiate the parameters of the peering session.

Open Shortest Path First

OSPF. Dynamic routing protocol intended to operate within a single Autonomous System. It advertises the states of local network links within the AS and makes routing decisions based on the shortest-path-first (SPF) algorithm (also referred to as the Dijkstra algorithm). OSPF is a link-state routing protocol, similar to the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing protocol. OSPF was designed expressly for the TCP/IP Internet environment, including explicit support for classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and the tagging of externally derived routing information. See also AS.

Open Systems Interconnection

OSI. Standard reference model for how messages are transmitted between two points on a network.

OpenConfirm

BGP neighbor state that shows that a valid Open message was received from the remote peer.

OpenSent

BGP neighbor state that shows that an Open message was sent to the remote peer and the local router is waiting for an Open message to be returned.

operation script

op script. Extensible Stylesheet Language for Transformations (XSLT) script written to automate network troubleshooting and network management. Op scripts can perform any function available through Junos XML protocol remote procedure calls (RPCs).

Operation, Administration, and Maintenance

OAM. ATM Forum specification for monitoring ATM virtual connections, verifying that the connection is up and that the router is operational. A set of Ethernet connectivity specifications and functions providing connectivity monitoring, fault detection and notification, fault verification, fault isolation, loopback, and remote defect identification. The primary specifications defining Ethernet OAM are IEEE 902.3ah link-fault management (LFM) and IEEE 902.1ag Ethernet connectivity-fault management (CFM). See also CFM, LFM.

operational mode

Junos OS mode that allows a user to view statistics and information about the router’s current operating status.

operational virtual router

For a secure IP tunnel, the VR in which a secure IP tunnel exists. See also transport virtual router.

optical carrier

See OC.optical carrier. In SONET, the OC level indicates the transmission rate of digital signals on optical fiber.

ordered control

MPLS label distribution method whereby an LSR does not advertise a label for a FEC unless it is the egress LSR for the FEC, or until it has received a label for the FEC from its downstream peer. In this manner, the entire LSP is established before MPLS begins to map data onto the LSP, preventing inappropriate (early) data mapping from occurring on the first LSR in the path. JunosE Software does not support ordered control when LDP or BGP is the signaling protocol. See also downstream-on-demand, independent control.

ORF

outbound route filter, outbound route filtering. BGP capability that enables a BGP speaker to send its inbound route filter to a peer, which then installs that filter to apply after its own outbound route filter. The BGP peer then sends to the BGP speaker only routes desired by that speaker, thus minimizing the number of unwanted routing updates sent.

origin

In BGP, attribute that describes the source of the route.

orlonger

Junos OS routing policy match type that represents all routes more specific than the given subnet, including the given subnet itself. It is similar to a mathematical greater-than-or-equal-to operation.

OSI

Open Systems Interconnection. Standard reference model for how messages are transmitted between two points on a network.

OSPF

Open Shortest Path First. Dynamic routing protocol intended to operate within a single Autonomous System. It advertises the states of local network links within the AS and makes routing decisions based on the shortest-path-first (SPF) algorithm (also referred to as the Dijkstra algorithm). OSPF is a link-state routing protocol, similar to the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) routing protocol. OSPF was designed expressly for the TCP/IP Internet environment, including explicit support for classless interdomain routing (CIDR) and the tagging of externally derived routing information. See also AS.

OSPF hello packet

Message sent by each OSPF router to each adjacent router. It is used to establish and maintain the router’s neighbor relationships.

OTASP

Over-the-Air Service Provisioning. Activation method used by cellular network providers such as Verizon for CDMA EV-DO 3G wireless modem cards. See also IOTA, Internet-based Over-the-Air.

outbound route filter (filtering)

ORF. BGP capability that enables a BGP speaker to send its inbound route filter to a peer, which then installs that filter to apply after its own outbound route filter. The BGP peer then sends to the BGP speaker only routes desired by that speaker, thus minimizing the number of unwanted routing updates sent.

outbound traffic (IPsec)

In the context of a secure interface, the clear traffic forwarded to the interface (either by policy or by routing) that is typically secured according to security parameters set for that interface.

outgoing interface

OIF. Used by multicast functions within a router to determine which egress ports to use for forwarding multicast groups.

output policy

Policy that is applied to packets before they leave an interface. See also input policy, policy, secondary input policy.

outside global address

In a NAT context, a configured, publicly routable IP address assigned to a host on the outside network.

outside local address

In a NAT context, a translated IP address of an outside host as it appears to the inside network.

outside network

In a NAT context, the public portion of a network that uses legitimate, publicly routable IP addresses to which you want private hosts to connect.

outside source information

Information used in NAT configuration only when addresses of external hosts might create a conflict on a private network. When an outside host sends a packet inbound to the inside network, the NAT router translates the source information and, in the outbound direction, restores the original information. For inbound traffic, the NAT router translates the outside global address into the outside local address.

Over-the-Air Service Provisioning

OTASP. Activation method used by cellular network providers such as Verizon for CDMA EV-DO 3G wireless modem cards. See also IOTA, Internet-based Over-the-Air.

overlapping VPN

When a site is a member of more than one VPN; often used to provide centralized services. The central site might contain DNS servers or WWW servers or management stations that need to be reachable from multiple VPNs. Overlapping IPv4 and IPv6 VPNs are supported by the same route-target mechanism. See also full-mesh VPN, hub-and-spoke VPN.

overlay network

Network design in which a logical Layer 3 topology (IP subnets) is operating over a logical Layer 2 topology (ATM PVCs). Layers in the network do not have knowledge of each other, and each layer requires separate management and operation.

oversubscription

Method that allows provisioning of more bandwidth than the line rate of the physical interface. See also bandwidth oversubscription.

### P

P router

provider core router. Router within a service provider core that connects directly to PE routers or other P routers and does not connect directly to a customer edge (CE) device. See also PE router.

P2MP LSP

point-to-multipoint LSP. RSVP-signaled LSP with a single source and multiple destinations.

package

Collection of files that make up a Junos OS component.

packet

Fundamental unit of information (message or fragment of a message) carried in a packet-switched network, for example, the Internet. See also PSN.

packet aging

Occurs when packets in the output buffer are overwritten by newly arriving packets. This happens because the available buffer size is greater than the available transmission bandwidth.

packet capture

- Packet sampling method, in which entire IPv4 packets flowing through a router are captured for analysis. Packets are captured in the Routing Engine and stored as libpcap-formatted files on the router. Packet capture files can be opened and analyzed offline with packet analyzers such as tcpdump or Ethereal. See also traffic sampling.
- J-Web packet sampling method for quickly analyzing router control traffic destined for or originating from the Routing Engine. You can either decode and view packets in the J-Web interface as they are captured, or save them to a file and analyze them offline with packet analyzers such as Ethereal. J-Web packet capture does not capture transient traffic.
- A logging option in the IDP Series. You can enable packet capture for traffic that matches your security policy rule.

packet classification

Also called classification. Process of taking in a single data stream and sorting it into multiple output substreams. In class of service (CoS), the examination of an incoming packet that associates the packet with a particular CoS servicing level. There are two kinds of classifiers: behavior aggregate and multifield. See also BA classifier, multifield classifier.

packet data protocol

PDP. Network protocol, such as IP, used by packet data networks connected to a GPRS network.

packet detection

For GRE tunnel interfaces, event when the router receives a packet with a source IP address that is not in the demultiplexer table, which triggers dynamic creation of subscriber interfaces. In this case, the primary IP interface must be in autoconfiguration mode. Packet detection is the only method of dynamically creating subscriber interfaces on GRE tunnel interfaces; you cannot use a DHCP local server or DHCP external server.

packet filtering

A router/firewall process that uses access control lists (ACL) to restrict flow of information based on characteristics such as source/destination IP address, protocol, or port used. Generally, packet-filtering routers do not track sessions except when doing NAT (which tracks the session for NAT purposes).

Packet Forwarding Engine

Portion of the router that processes packets by forwarding them between input and output interfaces.

packet loss priority

PLP. Used to determine the random early detection (RED) drop profile when a packet is queued. You can set it by configuring a classifier or policer. The system supports two PLP designations: low and high.

packet loss priority bit

PLP bit. Used to identify packets that have experienced congestion or are from a transmission that exceeded a service provider’s customer service license agreement. This bit can be used as part of a router’s congestion control mechanism and can be set by the interface or by a filter.

packet mirroring

JunosE Software feature that enables sending a copy of a packet to an external host for analysis. Packet mirroring has many uses, including traffic debugging and troubleshooting user networking problems. With it you can mirror traffic traversing a specific interface or traffic that is to or from a particular user. Packet mirroring is always transparent to users and does not affect the delivery of the original traffic. In some cases, the means and authority for conducting packet mirroring can depend on the regulations of specific countries. See also CLI-based packet mirroring, RADIUS-based packet mirroring.

packet or cell switching

Transmission of packets from many sources over a switched network.

packet over SONET

POS. Communications protocol for transmitting packets over SDH or SONET, which are both circuit switched protocols.

packet over SONET/SDH

Serial transmission of data over SONET frames through the use of a protocol such as PPP.

Packet Transfer Mode

PTM. Method of transporting packet-based services based on the EFM IEEE 802.3ah standard.

packet-switched network, packet-switching network

PSN. Uses the addressing information in packets to switch packets from one physical network to another, moving each packet toward its final destination.

PADI

PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation packet. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) initiation packet that is broadcast by the client to start the discovery process.

PADM

PPPoE Active Discovery Message. Control message that servers send to clients.

PADN

PPPoE Active Discovery Network. Message that a PPPoE server sends to a client. The information sent associates the PPPoE sessions with a set of routes. The client can use this set of routes to determine which session to use based on the destination IP address.

PADO

PPPoE Active Discovery Offer packet. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) offer packet that is sent to the client by one or more access concentrators in reply to a PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) packet.

PADR

PPPoE Active Discovery Request packet. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) packet sent by the client to one selected access concentrator to request a session.

PADS

PPPoE Active Discovery Session Confirmation packet. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) packet sent by the selected access concentrator to confirm the session.

PADT

PPPoE Active Discovery Termination packet. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) packet sent by either the client or the access concentrator to terminate a session.

PAP

Password Authentication Protocol. Security protocol that uses password protection to authenticate a user to a network or host. See also CHAP, Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol.

partial sequence number PDU (protocol data unit)

PSNP. Packet that contains only a partial list of the LSPs in the IS-IS link-state database; a PDU sent by designated router to acknowledge and request link-state information..

passive flow monitoring

Technique to intercept and observe specified data network traffic by using a routing platform such as a monitoring station that is not participating in the network.

passive interface

Interface that only advertises its IP address in its LSPs. It does not send or receive IS-IS packets.

passive peers

BGP peers from which a BGP speaker accepts inbound BGP connections but never initiates an outbound BGP connection to the peers. This passive status conserves CPU and TCP connection resources when the neighbor does not exist.

Password Authentication Protocol

PAP. Security protocol that uses password protection to authenticate a user to a network or host. See also CHAP, Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol.

PAT

Port Address Translation. Translation of the original source port number in a packet to a different, randomly designated port number.

path attribute

Information about a BGP route, such as the route origin, AS path, and next-hop router.

path layer

For a channelized OCx/STMx interface, the layer that maps the user payload into a SONET/SDH format suitable for the line layer. This layer transports the actual network services (such as T3s) between SONET/SDH multiplexing devices and provides end-to-end transmission. See also line layer, section layer.

PathErr message

RSVP message indicating that an error has occurred along an established path LSP. The message is advertised upstream toward the ingress router and does not remove any RSVP soft state from the network.

PathTear message

RSVP message indicating that the established LSP and its associated soft state should be removed by the network. The message is advertised downstream hop by hop toward the egress router.

PBB

provider backbone bridge, PBBN, provider backbone bridge network. Defined in IEEE 802.1ah, PBBs offer a scalable solution for building large bridged networks by improving MAC address scalability and service instance scalability.

PBBN

provider backbone bridge network, PBB, provider backbone bridge. Defined in IEEE 802.1ah, PBBs offer a scalable solution for building large bridged networks by improving MAC address scalability and service instance scalability.

PBX

private branch exchange. Telephone system that enables telephone extensions within the system to connect with each other as well as with the public telephone system.

PC Card

Previously known as a PCMCIA Card. Removable storage media that ships with each router and contains a copy of the Junos OS. The PC Card is based on standards published by the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association (PCMCIA).

pcap

Software library for packet capturing. See also libpcap.

PCI

Peripheral Component Interconnect. Standard, high-speed bus for connecting computer peripherals. Used on the Routing Engine.

PCI Express

Peripheral Component Interconnect Express. Next-generation, higher-bandwidth bus for connecting computer peripherals. A PCI Express bus uses point-to-point bus topology with a shared switch rather than the shared bus topology of a standard PCI bus. The shared switch on a PCI Express bus provides centralized traffic routing and management and can prioritize traffic. On some devices, PCI Express slots are backward compatible with PCI and can accept Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) intended for either PCI Express or PCI slots.

PCMCIA

Personal Computer Memory Card International Association. Industry group that promotes standards for credit card-size memory and I/O devices.

PCR

peak cell rate. Maximum allowable rate, measured in cells per second, at which cells can be transported along a connection in an ATM network.

PDH

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy. Developed to carry digitized voice more efficiently. Evolved into the North America, European, and Japanese Digital Hierarchies, in which only a discrete set of fixed rates is available, namely, NxDS0 (DS0 is a 64-Kbps rate).

PDL

progressive download. An HTTP media delivery mode in which the media file is played while it is being downloaded, unlike the full download method whereby the media file is downloaded completely before playback can begin.

PDP

- packet data protocol. Network protocol, such as IP, used by packet data networks connected to a GPRS network.
- policy decision point. The COPS server, which makes policy decisions for itself and for clients that request decisions. The SRC (formerly called SDX) application is the PDP.

PDP context

In the mobile wireless network, indicates a logical association between an MS (Mobile Station) and PDN (Public Data Network) running across a GPRS network; a user session on a GPRS network. The context defines aspects such as Routing, QoS (Quality of Service), Security, Billing, and so on.

PDU

protocol data unit. OSI term equivalent to packet, containing protocol control information and, possibly, user data. Also refers to a specific layer of the OSI seven-layer model and a specific protocol.

PE

PE router. Router in the service provider’s network that is connected to a customer edge (CE) device and participates in a virtual private network (VPN). See also P router.

PE router

provider edge router. Router in the service provider’s network that is connected to a customer edge (CE) device and participates in a virtual private network (VPN). See also P router.

peak cell rate

PCR. Maximum allowable rate, measured in cells per second, at which cells can be transported along a connection in an ATM network.

peak information rate

PIR. The PIR must be equal to or greater than the CIR, and both must be configured to be greater than 0. Packets that exceed the PIR are marked red, which corresponds to high loss priority. See also CIR, trTCM.

PEC

policing equivalence classes. In traffic policing, a set of packets that are treated the same way by the packet classifier.

peer

Immediately adjacent router with which a protocol relationship has been established. Also called a neighbor. See BGP peer, neighbor.

peering

Practice of exchanging Internet traffic with directly connected peers according to commercial and contractual agreements.

PEM

- Privacy Enhanced Mail. Technique for securely exchanging electronic mail over a public medium.
- Power Entry Module. Distributes DC power within the router chassis. Supported on M40e, M160, M320, and T Series routing platforms.

pending state

State of an SRP module to which the system transitions when an unsupported application is configured. When a transition to the pending state occurs, the system generates SNMP traps and log messages. How the router behaves depends on which high availability state the application is in when it shifts to a pending state.

penultimate hop popping

PHP. Mechanism used in an MPLS network that allows the transit router before the egress router to perform a label pop operation and forward the remaining data (often an IPv4 packet) to the egress router. See also UHP.

penultimate router

Last transit router before the egress router in an MPLS label-switched path.

PEP

policy enforcement point. COPS client that enforces policy decisions. The JunosE Software COPS interface is a PEP.

per-hop behavior

PHB. Traffic conditioning applied to traffic at each node in a differentiated services domain. The PHB provides the scheduling behavior and drop probability required by the traffic.

Perfect Forward Secrecy

PFS. Protocol derived from an encryption system that changes encryption keys often and ensures that no two sets of keys have any relation to each other. If one set of keys is compromised, only communications using those keys are at risk. An example of a system that uses PFS is Diffie-Hellman. PFS provides added security, but requires extra processing for a new key exchange on every key refresh.

Peripheral Component Interconnect

PCI. Standard, high-speed bus for connecting computer peripherals. Used on the Routing Engine.

Peripheral Component Interconnect Express

PCI Express. Next-generation, higher-bandwidth bus for connecting computer peripherals. A PCI Express bus uses point-to-point bus topology with a shared switch rather than the shared bus topology of a standard PCI bus. The shared switch on a PCI Express bus provides centralized traffic routing and management and can prioritize traffic. On some devices, PCI Express slots are backward compatible with PCI and can accept Physical Interface Modules (PIMs) intended for either PCI Express or PCI slots.

permanent interface

Interface that is always present in the routing platform. See also management Ethernet interface, transient interface.

permanent virtual channel (or circuit or connection)

PVC. Also called permanent virtual connection when referring to ATM. Software-defined logical connection in a network; a virtual circuit that is permanently established. PVCs save bandwidth associated with circuit establishment and teardown in situations where certain virtual circuits must exist all the time. See also SVC, switched virtual connection (or circuit).

persistent change

Configuration change generated by a commit script and copied to the candidate configuration, often a result of using a template. Persistent changes remain in the candidate configuration unless you explicitly delete them. See also transient change.

persistent tunnel

Tunnel that is configured to remain available. Persistent tunnels have only local significance; that is, they apply only to the end of the tunnel where they are set. If the other end of the tunnel chooses to terminate the tunnel, the tunnel is removed.

Personal Computer Memory Card International Association

PCMCIA. Industry group that promotes standards for credit card-size memory and I/O devices.

PFC

Protocol Field Compression. Normally, PPP-encapsulated packets are transmitted with a two-byte protocol field. For example, IPv4 packets are transmitted with the protocol field set to 0x0021, and MPLS packets are transmitted with the protocol field set to 0x0281. For all protocols with identifiers from 0x0000 through 0x00ff, PFC enables routers to compress the protocol field to one byte, as defined in RFC 1661, The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). PFC allows you to conserve bandwidth by transmitting less data. See also ACFC.

PFS

Perfect Forward Secrecy. Protocol derived from an encryption system that changes encryption keys often and ensures that no two sets of keys have any relation to each other. If one set of keys is compromised, only communications using those keys are at risk. An example of a system that uses PFS is Diffie-Hellman. PFS provides added security, but requires extra processing for a new key exchange on every key refresh.

PGM

Pragmatic General Multicast. Protocol layer that can be used between the IP layer and the multicast application on sources, receivers, and routers to add reliability, scalability, and efficiency to multicast networks.

PGP

Pretty Good Privacy. Strong cryptographic technique invented by Philip Zimmerman in 1991.

PHB

per-hop behavior. Traffic conditioning applied to traffic at each node in a differentiated services domain. The PHB provides the scheduling behavior and drop probability required by the traffic.

PHP

penultimate hop popping. Mechanism used in an MPLS network that allows the transit router before the egress router to perform a label pop operation and forward the remaining data (often an IPv4 packet) to the egress router. See also UHP.

PHY

PHY can be either of the following:

- Special electronic integrated circuit or functional block of a circuit that performs encoding and decoding between a pure digital domain (on-off) and a modulation in the analog domain. See also LAN PHY and WAN PHY.
- Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) physical layer. Layer 1 of the OSI model that defines the physical link between devices.

physical interface

A port on a Physical Interface Card (PIC) or Physical Interface Module (PIM).

Physical Interface Card

PIC. Network interface–specific card that can be installed on an FPC in the router.

Physical Interface Module

PIM. Network interface card installed in a device to provide physical connections to a LAN or WAN. PIMs can be fixed or removable and interchangeable. The PIM receives incoming packets from the network and transmits outgoing packets to the network. Each PIM is equipped with a dedicated network processor that forwards incoming data packets to and receives outgoing data packets from the Routing Engine. During this process, the PIM performs framing and line-speed signaling for its medium type—for example, E1, serial, Fast Ethernet, or ISDN.

physical layer

First and lowest level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer defines all the electrical and physical specifications for devices and provides the transmission of bits over the network medium. It includes the physical media: cables, microwaves, and networking equipment such as hubs and repeaters.

Physical Layer Convergence Procedure

PLCP. A protocol defined by IEEE 802.6 that is used for DS3 transmission of ATM. ATM cells are encapsulated in a frame defined by the PLCP, which is defined by the DS3 M-frame.

physical server

The server machine itself, which can run multiple server applications. See also real server.

PIB

Policy Information Base. Collection of sets of attributes that represent configuration information for a device.

PIC

Physical Interface Card. Network interface-specific card that can be installed on an FPC in the router.

PIC I/O Manager ASIC

Juniper Networks ASIC responsible for receiving and transmitting information on the physical media. It performs media-specific tasks within the Packet Forwarding Engine.

PIM

PIM can be either of the following:

- Protocol Independent Multicast. PIM dense mode is a flood-and-prune protocol. PIM sparse mode routes to multicast groups that use join messages to receive traffic. PIM sparse-dense mode allows some multicast groups to be dense groups (flood-and-prune) and some groups to be sparse groups (join and leave).
- Physical Interface Module. Network interface card installed in a device to provide physical connections to a LAN or WAN. PIMs can be fixed or removable and interchangeable. The PIM receives incoming packets from the network and transmits outgoing packets to the network. Each PIM is equipped with a dedicated network processor that forwards incoming data packets to and receives outgoing data packets from the Routing Engine. During this process, the PIM performs framing and line-speed signaling for its medium type—for example, E1, serial, Fast Ethernet, or ISDN.

PIM dense mode

Protocol Independent Multicast dense mode. Uses a reverse-path multicast, flood-and-prune mechanism. See also dense mode.

PIM sparse mode

Protocol Independent Multicast sparse mode. A sparse mode multicast protocol, which uses shared trees. In a shared tree, sources forward multicast datagrams to a directly connected router, the designated router. The designated router encapsulates the datagram and unicasts it to an assigned rendezvous point router, which then forwards the datagram to members of multicast groups. See also sparse mode.

PIM sparse mode remote neighbors

Neighbors that are used to run multicast services over BGP/MPLS virtual private networks.

PIM sparse-dense mode

Protocol Independent Multicast sparse-dense mode. Used to send data when a rendezvous point (RP) is not known for a group. However, if the router discovers an RP or you configure an RP statically, PIM sparse mode takes over.

PIM SSM

Protocol Independent Multicast source-specific multicast. Extension of the PIM protocol where a client can receive multicast traffic directly from the source. PIM SSM uses PIM sparse mode functionality to create a shortest-path tree (SPT) between the client and the source, but builds the SPT without using a rendezvous point.

ping of death

Intentionally oversized or irregular ICMP packet that can trigger a denial-of-service condition, freezing, or other adverse system reactions.

pipe (and short-pipe) model

Tunneling model whereby any traffic conditioning (in a pure JunosE environment, a change in traffic class/color combination) that is applied when traffic goes through the tunnel has no effect on the EXP bits coding in the inner header. That is, when traffic exits an LSP (when a label is popped) or when traffic enters an LSP, the inner header’s EXP bits coding is not changed. The pipe and short-pipe models differ in the header that the tunnel egress uses when it determines the PHB of an incoming packet. With the short-pipe model, the tunnel egress uses an inner header used for forwarding. With the pipe model, the outermost label is always used. Because of this, you cannot use PHP with the pipe model. See also uniform model.

PIR

peak information rate. The PIR must be equal to or greater than the CIR (committed information rate), and both must be configured to be greater than 0. Packets that exceed the PIR are marked red, which corresponds to high loss priority. See also CIR, trTCM.

PKCS

Public-Key Cryptography Standards. Series of standards established by RSA Laboratories.

PKCS10

PKCS #10. Digital format of messages sent to request certification of a public key.

PKI

public key infrastructure. Hierarchy of trust that enables users of a public network to securely and privately exchange data through the use of public and private cryptographic key pairs that are obtained and shared with peers through a trusted authority.

plaintext

Unencrypted form of encrypted text. Also known as cleartext.

platform label space

Large, single, unconfigurable pool of labels that can be shared by the platform—all MPLS interfaces on a given virtual router. See also interface label space.

player

Any media player software used for playing back digital video data from files of appropriate formats such as MPEG, AVI, RealVideo, Flash, QuickTime, and so on. In addition to VCR-like functions such as playing, pausing, stopping, rewinding, and forwarding, some common functions include zooming/full screen, audio channel selection, subtitle selection, and frame capturing.

PLCP

Physical Layer Convergence Procedure. A protocol defined by IEEE 802.6 that is used for DS3 transmission of ATM. ATM cells are encapsulated in a frame defined by the PLCP, which is defined by the DS3 M-frame.

Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy

PDH. Developed to carry digitized voice more efficiently. Evolved into the North America, European, and Japanese Digital Hierarchies, in which only a discrete set of fixed rates is available, namely, NxDS0 (DS0 is a 64-Kbps rate).

PLMN

Public Land Mobile Network. Telecommunications network for mobile stations.

PLP

packet loss priority. Used to determine the random early detection (RED) drop profile when a packet is queued. You can set it by configuring a classifier or policer. The system supports two PLP designations: low and high.

PLP bit

packet loss priority bit. Used to identify packets that have experienced congestion or are from a transmission that exceeded a service provider’s customer service license agreement. This bit can be used as part of a router’s congestion control mechanism and can be set by the interface or by a filter.

PLR

point of local repair. Ingress router of a backup tunnel or a detour LSP.

PoE

Power over Ethernet. PoE supports the implementation of the IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at standards; this implementation allows both data and electrical power to pass over a copper Ethernet LAN cable.

point of local repair

PLR.. Ingress router of a backup tunnel or a detour LSP.

point of presence

POP. Physical access point to the Internet. The location of the servers, routers, and ATM switches used to provide access to the Internet. The demarcation point between two networks (for example, between a LAN and a WAN).

point-to-multipoint connection

Unidirectional connection in which a single source system transmits data to multiple destination end systems. Point-to-multipoint is one of two fundamental connection types. See also point-to-point connection.

point-to-multipoint LSP

P2MP LSP. RSVP-signaled LSP with a single source and multiple destinations. .

point-to-multipoint network

Nonbroadcast network where OSPF treats connections between routers as point-to-point links. There is no election of a designated router and no LSA generated for the network. A router in a point-to-multipoint network sends Hello packets to all neighbors with which it can directly communicate.

point-to-point circuits

In IS-IS, circuits that have less overhead than broadcast circuits, because they do not use designated routers, the link-state database has no representation of the pseudonode or network LSA, and they do not require periodic database synchronization. However, if more than two routers are connected on the LAN media, routing information in the network is reduced. See also broadcast circuits.

point-to-point connection

Unidirectional or bidirectional connection between two end systems. Point-to-point is one of two fundamental connection types. See also point-to-multipoint connection.

point-to-point network

Joins two routers over a Wide Area Network (WAN), for example, two security devices connected by an IPsec VPN tunnel. On point-to-point networks, the OSPF router dynamically detects neighbor routers by sending Hello packets to the multicast address 224.0.0.5.

Point-to-Point Protocol

PPP. Link-layer protocol that provides multiprotocol encapsulation. PPP is used for link-layer and network-layer configuration. Provides a standard method for transporting multiprotocol datagrams over point-to-point links. Defined in RFC 1661, The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet

Allows multiple users at a site to share the same digital subscriber line, cable modem, or wireless connection to the Internet. You can configure PPPoE client instances, including the username and password, on any or all interfaces on some security devices. See also PPPoE.

Point-to-Point Protocol process

pppd. Point-to-Point Protocol process (daemon) that processes packets that use PPP.

poison reverse

Method used in distance-vector networks to avoid routing loops. Each router advertises routes back to the neighbor it received them from with an infinity metric assigned.

policer

Filter that limits traffic of a certain class to a specified bandwidth or burst size. Packets exceeding the policer limits are discarded, or assigned to a different forwarding class, a different loss priority, or both.

policing

Method of applying rate limits on bandwidth and burst size for traffic on a particular interface.

policing equivalence classes

PEC. In traffic policing, a set of packets that are treated the same way by the packet classifier.

policy

Condition and action attached to an interface that cause the router to handle packets passing through the interface in a certain way. See also input policy, output policy, secondary input policy.

policy chain

Application of multiple routing policies in a single location. The policies are evaluated in a predefined manner and are always followed by the default policy for the specific application location.

policy decision point

PDP, policy decision point. The COPS server, which makes policy decisions for itself and for clients that request decisions. The SRC (formerly called SDX) application is the PDP.

policy enforcement point

PEP. A COPS client that enforces policy decisions. The JunosE Software COPS interface is a PEP.

Policy Information Base

PIB. Collection of sets of attributes that represent configuration information for a device.

policy list

In policy management, a set of rules, each of which specifies a policy action.

policy management

Feature that allows network service providers to implement packet forwarding and routing specifically tailored to their customer’s requirements. Using policy management, customers can implement policies that selectively cause packets to take different paths.

policy routing

Routing method that redefines a classified packet flow to a destination port or IP address.

policy rule

Policy action optionally combined with a classification. A set of policy rules defines what specialized treatment to apply to classified traffic flows.

pop

Removal of the last label, by a router, from a packet as it exits an MPLS domain.

POP

point of presence. Physical access point to the Internet. The location of the servers, routers, and ATM switches used to provide access to the Internet. The demarcation point between two networks (for example, between a LAN and a WAN).

Port Address Translation

PAT. Translation of the original source port number in a packet to a different, randomly designated port number.

port mapping

Translation of the original destination port number in a packet to a different, predetermined port number.

port mirroring

Method in which a copy of an IPv4 packet is sent from the routing platform to an external host address or a packet analyzer for analysis.

port mode

Feature on some security devices that allows you to select one of several different sets of port, interface, and zone bindings on the device. Changing the port mode removes any existing configurations on the device and requires a system reset.

port scan

Attack in which a single source address attempts to connect to every port on a single machine, in an attempt to provide attackers with information about your network configuration.

port shaping

Method for shaping the aggregate traffic through a port or channel to a rate that is less than the line or port rate.

POS

packet over SONET. Communications protocol for transmitting packets over SDH or SONET, which are both circuit switched protocols.

Power Entry Module

Distributes DC power within the router chassis. Supported on M40e, M160, M320, and T Series routing platforms.

Power over Ethernet

PoE. PoE supports the implementation of the IEEE 802.3af and IEEE 802.3at standards; this implementation allows both data and electrical power to pass over a copper Ethernet LAN cable.

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol. Link-layer protocol that provides multiprotocol encapsulation. PPP is used for link-layer and network-layer configuration. Provides a standard method for transporting multiprotocol datagrams over point-to-point links. Defined in RFC 1661.

pppd

Point-to-Point Protocol process (daemon) that processes packets that use PPP.

PPPoE

Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet. Network protocol that encapsulates PPP frames in Ethernet frames and connects multiple hosts over a simple bridging access device to a remote access concentrator.

PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation packet

PADI. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) initiation packet that is broadcast by the client to start the discovery process.

PPPoE Active Discovery Message

PADM. Control message that servers send to clients.

PPPoE Active Discovery Network

PADN. Message that a PPPoE server sends to a client. The information sent associates the PPPoE sessions with a set of routes. The client can use this set of routes to determine which session to use based on the destination IP address.

PPPoE Active Discovery Offer packet

PADO. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) offer packet that is sent to the client by one or more access concentrators in reply to a PPPoE Active Discovery Initiation (PADI) packet.

PPPoE Active Discovery Request packet

PADR. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) packet sent by the client to one selected access concentrator to request a session.

PPPoE Active Discovery Session Confirmation packet

PADS. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) packet sent by the selected access concentrator to confirm the session.

PPPoE Active Discovery Termination packet

PADT. Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) packet sent by either the client or the access concentrator to terminate a session.

PPPoE over ATM

Also called PPPoA. Network protocol that encapsulates Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet (PPPoE) frames in Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) for digital subscriber line (DSL) transmission, and connects multiple hosts over a simple bridging access device to a remote access concentrator.

PPPoE service name table

Collection of service name tags, as defined in RFC 2516, A Method for Transmitting PPP Over Ethernet (PPPoE), for an access concentrator (AC) such as an E Series router. PPPoE clients use service name tags to request that an AC support certain services. Configuring PPPoE service name tables enables the AC to support multiple service name tags in addition to the empty service name tag. See also service name tag.

Pragmatic General Multicast

PGM. Protocol layer that can be used between the IP layer and the multicast application on sources, receivers, and routers to add reliability, scalability, and efficiency to multicast networks.

precedence bits

First three bits in the type-of-service (ToS) byte. On a Juniper Networks router, these bits are used to sort or classify individual packets as they arrive at an interface. The classification determines the queue to which the packet is directed upon transmission.

precedence level

Order in which the effectiveness of CLI privilege levels of E Series routers is implemented. The CLI uses the following order of precedence:

1. Privilege level set for all commands within a mode, including modes that are accessed from another mode; for example, Global Configuration mode. See also switch.
2. Privilege level set for all commands that begin with the same keyword; for example, snmp commands.
3. Privilege level set for individual commands; for example, snmp-server community.

preference

Value associated with a route that the virtual router uses to select the active route when there are multiple routes to the same destination network. The preference value is determined by the protocol or origin of the route. The lower the preference value of a route, the more likely the route is to be selected as the active route.

preferred address

On an interface, the default local address used for packets sourced by the local router to destinations on the subnet.

preferred roaming list

PRL. File that contains information for accessing a device's home network, as well as the service provider's roaming partners.

prefix

First part of a BGP route, which describes a set of IP addresses that can be reached using the route. Prefixes are made possible by classless interdomain routing (CIDR).

prefix list

Sequential collection of permit and deny conditions that apply to IP or IPv6 addresses. Like an access list, the router tests addresses one by one against the conditions in a prefix list. Unlike an access list, the prefix list specifies a base IP or IPv6 address and a length. The tested address is matched against the prefix.

prefix tree

Nonsequential collection of permit and deny conditions that apply to IP addresses. Like a prefix list, the prefix tree specifies a base IP address and a length (the number of bits applied to the base) to determine the network prefix. The tested address is matched against the prefix. The prefix tree also enables route summarization. However, the prefix tree does not match addresses one by one in sequence against the listed conditions. The router performs a binary search against the tree structure of the entries. The prefix tree provides a faster search methodology and matches the test address more closely than either the access list or the prefix list.

prefix-length-range

Junos OS routing policy match type representing all routes that share the same most-significant bits. The prefix length of the route must also lie between the two supplied lengths in the route filter.

prepended header

Header created by the policy-mirroring action during packet mirroring, and used for demultiplexing at the analyzer to sort through the multiple mirrored streams that arrive from different sources. During a packet mirroring session, the router prepends a special UDP/IP header to each mirrored packet that is sent to the analyzer port.

presentation layer

Sixth level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design. This layer transforms data to provide a standard interface for the application layer.

prestage

Data placed on a Media Flow Controller or origin server before an HTTP request comes in for it.

Pretty Good Privacy

PGP. Strong cryptographic technique invented by Philip Zimmerman in 1991.

primary address

On an interface, the address used by default as the local address for broadcast and multicast packets sourced locally and sent out the interface.

primary contributing route

Contributing route with the numerically smallest prefix and smallest Junos OS preference value. This route is the default next hop used for a generated route.

primary interface

Router interface that packets go out on when no interface name is specified and when the destination address does not specify a particular outgoing interface.

primary IP address

IP address configured as primary from the set of real interface addresses. VRRP advertisements are always sent (by the master router) using the primary IP address as the source of the IP packet.

primary IP interface

Normal IP interface on a supported layer 2 interface, such as Ethernet. You create a primary interface by assigning an IP address to the Ethernet interface.

priority

Combination of the facility and severity level of a system log message. By default, priority information is not included in system log messages, but you can configure Junos OS to include it.

Privacy Enhanced Mail

PEM. Technique for securely exchanging electronic mail over a public medium.

private branch exchange

PBX. Telephone system that enables telephone extensions within the system to connect with each other as well as with the public telephone system.

private community

Convenient way to categorize groups of routes to facilitate the use of routing policies. Also called local-use community or general community.

private line aggregation

Consolidation of multiple high-speed access lines into one access point.

Privileged Exec mode

User Exec mode that provides privileged-level access. Privileged Exec commands allow you to perform such functions as displaying system information, setting operating parameters, and gaining access to Global Configuration mode. See also User Exec mode.

privileged level

Access level in the CLI of E Series routers that enables you to view router configuration, change a configuration, and run debugging commands. You need a password to access this level. This level gives you full CLI privileges. The CLI has the ability to map any command to one of 16 levels of command privilege (in the range 0–15). When you access Privileged Exec mode, you have access to those commands that map to your access level or below.

PRL

preferred roaming list. File that contains information for accessing a device's home network, as well as the service provider's roaming partners.

probe

An action taken or an object used to learn something about the state of the network. Real-time performance monitoring (RPM) uses several types of requests to probe a network.

probe interval

Time, in seconds, between probe packets.

process ID

Unique identifier for a process, displayed in a system log message along with the name of the process that generated the event.

process status

Display on a security device that shows information about processes on that device.

profile

Set of characteristics that act as a pattern. Defined through CLI commands to configure dynamic interfaces.

programmable read-only memory

PROM. Form of digital memory in which each bit is locked by using a fuse or antifuse action to store information permanently.

progress indicator

Animated representation of how much progress has been made on a CLI operation that does not finish within the expected completion time. This type of status indicator is supported for the file system synchronization application and the file copy application. The progress indicator displays a series of dots that represents the time required to complete the operation. The dots are followed by the actual percentage of the total that has been completed and by an oscillating asterisk that indicates ongoing activity. As the application progresses, the dots are replaced with asterisks, starting at the left, to represent how much of the operation is finished.

progressive download

PDL. An HTTP media delivery mode in which the media file is played while it is being downloaded, unlike the full download method whereby the media file is downloaded completely before playback can begin.

PROM

programmable read-only memory. Form of digital memory in which each bit is locked by using a fuse or antifuse action to store information permanently.

promiscuous mode

Used with ATM CCC Cell Relay encapsulation, enables mapping of all incoming cells from an interface port or from a virtual path (VP) to a single label-switched path (LSP) without restricting the VCI number.

promiscuous peer group

BGP peer group that accepts incoming BGP connections from any remote address that matches an access list. Promiscuous peers are useful when the remote address of the peer is not known ahead of time. An example is in B-RAS applications, in which interfaces for subscribers are created dynamically and the remote address of the subscriber is assigned dynamically from a local pool or by using RADIUS or some other method.

protect interface

Provides the redundant connection on modules that have APS/MSP or that otherwise enable port redundancy.

Protected System Domain

PSD. Set of Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) on a Juniper Networks routing platform matched with a redundant Routing Engine pair (or single Routing Engine) on the JCS 1200 platform to form a secure, virtual hardware router.

protocol

Rules determining the format and transmission of data between end points in a telecommunication connection.

protocol address

Logical Layer 3 address assigned to an interface within the Junos OS.

protocol anomaly

Deviation from the RFC specifications that dictate how communications between two entities should be implemented. Most legitimate traffic does not deviate from the protocols; when anomalies are detected they are often a sign of malicious traffic and seen as a threat to the system.

protocol data unit

PDU. OSI term equivalent to packet, containing protocol control information and, possibly, user data. Also refers to a specific layer of the OSI seven-layer model and a specific protocol.

protocol families

Grouping of logical properties within an interface configuration, for example, the inet, inet4, and mpls protocol families.

Protocol Field Compression

PFC. Normally, PPP-encapsulated packets are transmitted with a two-byte protocol field. For example, IPv4 packets are transmitted with the protocol field set to 0x0021, and MPLS packets are transmitted with the protocol field set to 0x0281. For all protocols with identifiers from 0x0000 through 0x00ff, PFC enables routers to compress the protocol field to one byte, as defined in RFC 1661, The Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP). PFC allows you to conserve bandwidth by transmitting less data. See also ACFC.

Protocol Independent Multicast

PIM. A set of multicast routing protocols for one-to-many and many-to-many data distribution over networks or the Internet. PIM is protocol-independent, using the routing information from other routing protocols such as BGP. PIM dense mode is a flood-and-prune protocol. PIM sparse mode routes to multicast groups that use join messages to receive traffic. PIM sparse-dense mode allows some multicast groups to be dense groups (flood-and-prune) and some groups to be sparse groups (join and leave).

Protocol Independent Multicast dense mode

PIM dense mode. Uses a reverse-path multicast, flood-and-prune mechanism. See also dense mode.

Protocol Independent Multicast source-specific multicast

PIM SSM. Extension of the PIM protocol where a client can receive multicast traffic directly from the source. PIM SSM uses PIM sparse mode functionality to create a shortest-path tree (SPT) between the client and the source, but builds the SPT without using a rendezvous point.

Protocol Independent Multicast sparse mode

PIM sparse mode. A sparse mode multicast protocol, which uses shared trees. In a shared tree, sources forward multicast datagrams to a directly connected router, the designated router. The designated router encapsulates the datagram and unicasts it to an assigned rendezvous point router, which then forwards the datagram to members of multicast groups. See also sparse mode.

Protocol Independent Multicast sparse-dense mode

PIM sparse-dense mode. Used to send data when a rendezvous point (RP) is not known for a group. However, if the router discovers an RP or you configure an RP statically, PIM sparse mode takes over.

protocol normalization

Method of reducing false positives in network intrusion detection systems, by “normalizing” traffic into a common format for accurate analysis, so that access to hosts takes place in a manner that is unambiguous.

protocol preference

32-bit value assigned to all routes placed into the routing table. The protocol preference is used as a tiebreaker when multiple exact routes are placed into the table by different protocols.

provider backbone bridge

PBB, PBBN, provider backbone bridge network. Defined in IEEE 802.1ah, PBBs offer a scalable solution for building large bridged networks by improving MAC address scalability and service instance scalability.

provider backbone bridge network

PBBN, PBB, provider backbone bridge. Defined in IEEE 802.1ah, PBBs offer a scalable solution for building large bridged networks by improving MAC address scalability and service instance scalability.

provider core router

P router. Router within a service provider core that connects directly to PE routers or other P routers and does not connect directly to a customer edge (CE) device. See also PE router.

provider edge router

PE router. Router in the service provider’s network that is connected to a customer edge (CE) device and participates in a virtual private network (VPN). See also P router.

provider router

Router in the service provider’s network that is not connected to a customer edge (CE) device.

proxy

Proxy or proxy server is a technique used to cache information on a Web server and acts as an intermediary between a Web client and that Web server. It breaks the connection between sender and receiver and acts as a relay between client and server.

proxy ARP

proxy Address Resolution Protocol. Enables an E Series router to respond to ARP requests on behalf of an Ethernet end node.

Prune message

PIM message sent upstream to a multicast source or the rendezvous point (RP) of the domain. The message requests that multicast traffic stop being transmitted to the router originating the message.

PSD

Protected System Domain. Set of Flexible PIC Concentrators (FPCs) on a Juniper Networks routing platform matched with a redundant Routing Engine pair (or single Routing Engine) on the JCS 1200 platform to form a secure, virtual hardware router.

PSN

packet-switched network. Network in which messages or fragments of messages (packets) are sent to their destination through the most expedient route, as determined by a routing algorithm. Packet switching optimizes bandwidth in a network and minimizes latency.

PSNP

partial sequence number PDU. Packet that contains only a partial list of the LSPs in the IS-IS link-state database; a PDU sent by a designated router to acknowledge and request link-state information.

PSTN

public switched telephone network. The public worldwide voice telephone network.

PTM

Packet Transfer Mode. Method of transporting packet-based services based on the EFM IEEE802.3ah standard.

public key infrastructure

PKI. Hierarchy of trust that enables users of a public network to securely and privately exchange data through the use of public and private cryptographic key pairs that are obtained and shared with peers through a trusted authority.

Public Land Mobile Network

PLMN. Telecommunications network for mobile stations.

public switched telephone network

PSTN. The public worldwide voice telephone network.

Public-Key Cryptography Standards

PKCS. Series of standards established by RSA Laboratories.

push

Addition of a label or stack of labels, by a router, to a packet as it enters an MPLS domain.

PVC

permanent virtual circuit or channel. Also called permanent virtual connection (when referring to ATM. Software-defined logical connection in a network; a virtual circuit that is permanently established. PVCs save bandwidth associated with circuit establishment and teardown in situations where certain virtual circuits must exist all the time. See also SVC, switched virtual connection (or circuit).

### Q

Q-in-Q

The IEEE802.1ad specification for encapsulation and bridging of Ethernet frames. Also known as IEEE 802.1QinQ, provider bridging, or stacked VLANs, Q-in-Q allows multiple VLAN headers to be inserted into a single frame, an essential capability for implementing Metro Ethernet network topologies.

QoS

quality of service. Performance, such as transmission rates and error rates, of a communications channel or system. A suite of features that configure queuing and scheduling on the forwarding path of an E Series router. QoS provides a level of predictability and control beyond the best-effort delivery that the router provides by default. (Best-effort service provides packet transmission with no assurance of reliability, delay, jitter, or throughput.) See also CoS.

QoS administrator

Person responsible for implementing a QoS queuing architecture by defining the scheduler profiles and referencing them from QoS profiles. A QoS administrator also configures parameter definitions that control the parameters, interfaces, and ranges of values that QoS clients, using QoS parameters, can assign.

QoS client

Person responsible for configuring services for individual subscribers by creating parameter instances. The parameter instances that a QoS client creates depend on the settings that the QoS administrator defined in parameter definitions. QoS clients can use the CLI, Service Deployment System (SDX), IP multicast bandwidth adjustment, RADIUS, or Service Manager to manage these services.

QoS parameters

Special parameters that enable you to configure a queuing architecture without specifying numeric subscriber rates and weights in scheduler profiles. You then use the same QoS and scheduler profiles across all subscribers who use the same services but at different bandwidths, reducing the total number of QoS profiles and scheduler profiles required.

QoS port-type profile

QoS profile that is automatically attached to ports of the corresponding type if you do not explicitly attach a QoS profile.

QoS profile

Collection of QoS commands that specify queue profiles, drop profiles, scheduler profiles, and statistics profiles in combination with interface types.

QoS profile attachment

Reference that applies the rules in the QoS profile to a specific interface.

quad-wide

Type of PIC that combines the PIC and FPC within a single FPC slot.

quadruple play

Addition of mobile phone service to triple play. See also triple play.

qualified next hop

Next hop for a static route that allows a second next hop for the same static route to have different metric and preference properties from the original next hop.

quality of service

QoS. Performance, such as transmission rates and error rates, of a communications channel or system. A suite of features that configure queuing and scheduling on the forwarding path of an E Series router. QoS provides a level of predictability and control beyond the best-effort delivery that the router provides by default. (Best-effort service provides packet transmission with no assurance of reliability, delay, jitter, or throughput.) See also CoS, class of service.

querier router

PIM router on a broadcast subnet responsible for generating IGMP query messages for the segment.

queue

First-in, first-out (FIFO) number of packets waiting to be forwarded over a router interface. You can configure the minimum and maximum size of the packet queue, the queue admission policies, and other parameters to manage the flow of packets through the router.

queue fullness

For random early detection (RED), the memory used to store packets expressed as a percentage of the total memory allocated for that specific queue. See also drop profile.

queue length

For ATM1 interfaces only, a limit on the number of transmit packets that can be queued. Packets that exceed the limit are dropped. See also EPD.

queue profile

Template that specifies the buffering and tail-dropping behavior of an egress queue.

queuing

In routing, the arrangement of packets waiting to be forwarded. Packets are organized into queues according to their priority, time of arrival, or other characteristics, and are processed one at a time. After a packet is sent to the outgoing interface on a router, it is queued for transmission on the physical media. The amount of time a packet is queued on the router is determined by the availability of the outgoing physical media, bandwidth, and the amount of traffic using the interface.

### R

RA

registration authority. Trusted third-party organization that acts on behalf of a certificate authority (CA) to verify the identity of a digital certificate user.

rack unit

RU. The standard single unit height of a rack-mounted device.

radio frequency interference

RFI. Interference from high-frequency electromagnetic waves emanating from electronic devices.

radio network controller

RNC. Manages the radio part of the network in UMTS.

RADIUS

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service. Distributed client/server AAA service method that protects networks against unauthorized access. RADIUS clients running on an E Series router send authentication requests to a central RADIUS server. The central RADIUS server stores all the required user authentication and network access information. RADIUS informs the router of the privilege levels for which RADIUS-authenticated users have enable access. The router permits or denies enable access accordingly.

RADIUS-based packet mirroring

RADIUS administrator uses RADIUS attributes to configure packet mirroring of a particular user’s traffic without regard to how often the user logs in or out or which E Series router or interface the user uses. It is particularly appropriate for large networks and for debugging network problems related to mobile users, who do not always log in to a particular router.

random early detection

RED. Gradual drop profile for a given class that is used for congestion avoidance. RED tries to anticipate incipient congestion by dropping a small percentage of packets from the head of the queue to ensure that a queue never actually becomes congested.

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol

RSTP. Used to prevent loops in bridge configurations. RSTP is not aware of VLANs and blocks ports at the physical level. See also MSTP, Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.

RAS

remote access service. Any combination of hardware and software to enable users to remotely access services protected by your network security devices . Typically, you use a virtual private network (VPN) to enable RAS, then add RAS users to the VPN.

rate limiting

- Method of applying rate limits on bandwidth and burst size for traffic on a particular interface. See also one-rate rate-limit profile, two-rate rate-limit profile, policing.
- In IDP Series, an application policy enforcement (APE) rule-based action. When the bandwidth rate for matching traffic is below the rate limit, the IDP series appliance does nothing. When the bandwidth rate exceeds the limit, the IDP appliance behaves as if no bandwidth is available and drops the packets.

rate shaping

Mechanism that throttles the rate at which an interface can transmit packets.

rate-limit hierarchy

Enables lower-priority traffic to access unused bandwidth allocated for real-time traffic during times when no real-time traffic is flowing. See also color-aware rate limit, color-blind rate limit.

rate-limit profile

Set of bandwidth attributes and associated actions that provides a variety of services, including tiered bandwidth service where traffic conforming to configured bandwidth levels is treated differently than traffic that exceeds the configured values, and a hard-limit service where a fixed bandwidth limit is applied to a traffic flow. Also provides a TCP-friendly rate-limiting service that works in conjunction with TCP’s native flow-control functionality. See also one-rate rate-limit profile, two-rate rate-limit profile.

RBOC

Regional Bell Operating Company, pronounced “are-bock”. Regional telephone companies formed as a result of the divestiture of the Bell System in 1984. Also known as Baby Bell.

RC2, RC4, RC5

RSA codes. Family of proprietary (RSA Data Security, Inc.) encryption schemes often used in Web browsers and servers. These codes use variable-length keys up to 2048 bits.

RDBMS

relational database management system. Presents data in a tabular form with a means of manipulating the tabular data with relational operators.

RDI cell

remote defect indication cell. Cell received from the remote endpoint of the virtual path (VP) or virtual connection (VC) that indicates an interruption in the cell transfer capability of the VP/VC.

RDM

Russian Dolls model. A bandwidth constraints model that makes efficient use of bandwidth by allowing the class types to share bandwidth, as defined in RFC 4127, Russian Dolls Bandwidth Constraints Model for DiffServ-aware MPLS Traffic Engineering. “Russian Dolls” refers to a traditional type of nested doll-within-a-doll set.

real server

The logical representation of a service or server application residing on a physical server. A real server is defined by an IP address and an optional port corresponding to the service. See also physical server.

Real-Time Messaging Protocol

RTMP. A multimedia streaming and remote procedure call (RPC) protocol primarily used in Adobe Flash. RTMP has three variations: The “plain” protocol that works on top of TCP and uses port 1935; RTMPT which is encapsulated within HTTP requests to traverse firewalls; and RTMPS which works just like RTMPT but over a secure HTTPS connection.

real-time performance monitoring

RPM. Tool for creating active probes to track and monitor traffic.

Real-Time Streaming Protocol

RTSP. Application-level protocol for control over the delivery of data with real-time properties, it provides an extensible framework to enable controlled, on-demand delivery of real-time data such as audio and video. Sources of data can include both live data feeds and stored clips. This protocol is intended to control multiple data delivery sessions, provide a means for choosing delivery channels such as UDP, multicast UDP and TCP, and provide a means for choosing delivery mechanisms based upon RTP.

Real-Time Transport Protocol

RTP. Internet protocol that provides mechanisms for the transmission of real-time data, such as audio, video, or voice, over IP networks. Compressed RTP is used for VoIP traffic.

real-time variable bit rate

RTVBR. For ATM2 intelligent queuing (IQ) interfaces, data that is serviced at a higher priority rate than other VBR data. RTVBR is suitable for carrying packetized video and audio. RTVBR provides better congestion control and latency guarantees than non-real-time VBR.

Realtime Monitor

Module of NSM user interface that displays views of the Device Monitor, the VPN Monitor, and the NSRP Monitor. It provides continuous monitoring of the status of your security devices.

receive

Next hop for a static route that allows all matching packets to be sent to the Routing Engine for processing.

receive collision

Result of two devices on the same Ethernet network attempting to receive data at exactly the same time. Collisions on the line are detected by the Carrier Sense Multiple Access Collision Detection (CSMA/CD) protocol.

receive window size

RWS. Number of packets that an L2TP peer can transmit without receiving an acknowledgment from the router. L2TP uses the RWS to implement a sliding window mechanism for the transmission of control messages. If the RWS is not configured for the L2TP tunnel, the router determines the RWS and uses this value for all new tunnels on both the L2TP access concentrator (LAC) and the L2TP network server (LNS).

Recommended Standard 232

RS-232. Serial line protocol recommended standard. Also known as EIA-232. Standard connector used commonly in computer serial ports.

Recommended Standard 449

RS-449. Serial line protocol recommended standard that defines the functional and mechanical characteristics of the interface between DTE and DCE. Also known as EIA-449.

record route object

RRO. An RSVP message object that notes the IP address of each router along the path of an LSP.

recursive lookup

Method of consulting the routing table to locate the actual physical next hop for a route when the supplied next hop is not directly connected.

RED

random early detection. Gradual drop profile for a given class that is used for congestion avoidance. RED tries to anticipate incipient congestion by dropping a small percentage of packets from the head of the queue to ensure that a queue never actually becomes congested.

redirected authentication

Service that helps offload AAA activity on the router, by providing the domain-mapping-like feature remotely on the RADIUS server.

redistribution

Also known as route redistribution. Method of placing learned routes from one protocol into another protocol operating on the same router. The Junos OS accomplishes this with a routing policy.

redistribution list

List imported by current routing domain from another routing domain using a different protocol. See also route redistribution.

redundancy

Also called line module redundancy. Configuration in which an extra line module in a group of identical line modules provides redundancy if one of the modules fails. The process by which the router switches to the spare line module is called switchover. The requirements for line module redundancy depend on the router type. See also HA, switchover.

redundancy midplane

Hardware component that provides additional connectivity so the spare line module can take control of the I/O module associated with any failed line module in the redundancy group. See also midplane.

refresh reduction

In RSVP, an extension that addresses the problems of scaling, reliability, and latency when refresh messages are used to cover message loss.

Regional Bell Operating Company

RBOC, pronounced “are-bock”. Regional telephone companies formed as a result of the divestiture of the Bell System in 1984. Also known as Baby Bell.

Register message

PIM message unicast by the first-hop router to the rendezvous point (RP) that contains the multicast packets from the source encapsulated within its data field.

Register Stop message

PIM message sent by the RP to the first-hop router to halt the sending of encapsulated multicast packets.

registration authority

RA. Trusted third-party organization that acts on behalf of a certificate authority (CA) to verify the identity of a digital certificate user.

reject

Next hop for a configured route that drops all matching packets from the network and returns an ICMP message to the source IP address. Also used as an action in a routing policy or firewall filter.

relational database management system

RDBMS. Presents data in a tabular form with a means of manipulating the tabular data with relational operators.

relative strict-priority scheduling

Process that provides strict-priority scheduling within a shaped aggregate rate. It differs from true strict priority in that it can implement an aggregate shaping rate for both strict and nonstrict traffic. With true strict priority, you can shape the nonstrict or the strict traffic separately, but you cannot shape the aggregate to a single rate.

relative URL

Points to the location of a file from a point of reference, usually the directory beneath. Preceded by two dots (../directory_path/file.txt) for the directory above; one dot (./directory_path/file.txt) for the current directory. Contrast with absolute URL.

relay proxy

Also called DHCP relay proxy, an enhancement to the E-series router's DHCP relay component that manages host routes for DHCP clients, including selecting the single most appropriate offer from multiple DHCP servers.

remote access service

RAS. Any combination of hardware and software that enables users to remotely access services protected by network security devices . Typically, you use a virtual private network (VPN) to enable RAS, then add RAS users to the VPN.

Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service

RADIUS.Distributed client/server AAA service method that protects networks against unauthorized access. RADIUS clients running on an E Series router send authentication requests to a central RADIUS server. The central RADIUS server stores all the required user authentication and network access information. RADIUS informs the router of the privilege levels for which RADIUS-authenticated users have enable access. The router permits or denies enable access accordingly.

remote defect indication cell

RDI cell. Cell received from the remote endpoint of the virtual path (VP) or virtual connection (VC) that indicates an interruption in the cell transfer capability of the VP/VC.

remote loopback

Ability to request that remote devices enter into loopback; the ability to be placed in loopback by remote devices.

remote monitoring

RMON. Standard MIB that defines current and historical MAC-layer statistics and control objects, allowing you to capture real-time information across the entire network. This allows you to detect, isolate, diagnose, and report potential and actual network problems.

remote neighbors

RIP neighbors that enable the router to establish neighbor adjacencies through unidirectional interfaces, such as MPLS tunnels, rather than the standard practice of using the same interface for receipt and transmission of RIP packets. The remote neighbor can be more than one hop away through intermediate routes that are not running RIP. RIP uses the interface associated with the best route to the remote neighbor to reach the neighbor. A best route to the neighbor must exist in the IP routing table.

remote procedure call

RPC. Type of protocol that allows a computer program running on one computer to cause a function on another computer to be executed, without explicitly coding the details for this interaction.

remote settings object

Object that defines the DNS and WINS servers that are assigned to L2TP RAS users after they have connected to the L2TP tunnel.

rename

Junos OS command that allows a user to change the name of a routing policy, firewall filter, or any other variable character string defined in the router configuration.

rendezvous point

RP. For PIM sparse mode, a core router acting as the root of the distribution tree in a shared tree.

Report Manager

Module of the NSM user interface for generating and viewing reports of log entries and alarms. The reports are used to track and analyze log incidents, network traffic, and potential attacks.

Request for Comments

RFC. Internet standard specifications published by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

request message

RIP message used by a router to ask for all or part of the routing table from a neighbor.

requesting authority

Group that is authorized to request or conduct packet mirroring (E Series routers).

resolve

Next hop for a static route that allows the router to perform a recursive lookup to locate the physical next hop for the route.

Resource Reservation Protocol

RSVP. Establishes a session between two routers to transport a specific traffic flow. See also RSVP-TE.

Resource Reservation Protocol—Traffic Engineering

RSVP-TE. RSVP with traffic engineering extensions, as defined by RFC 3209, that allow RSVP to establish label-switched paths (LSPs) in MPLS networks. See also MPLS, RSVP.

resource threshold monitor

RTM. CLI mode that enables you to set the rising and falling thresholds and trap hold-down times for certain interfaces. You can also view the resource threshold information.

response message

RIP message used to advertise routing information into a network.

Response Time Reporter

RTR. Feature that enables you to monitor network performance and resources by measuring response times and the availability of your network devices. The primary objective of RTR is to collect statistics and information about network performance.

result cell

Junos OS data structure generated by the Internet Processor ASIC after performing a forwarding table lookup.

ResvConf message

RSVP message that allows the egress router to receive an explicit confirmation message from a neighbor that its Resv message was received.

ResvErr message

RSVP message indicating that an error has occurred along an established LSP. The message is advertised downstream toward the egress router, and it does not remove any RSVP soft state from the network.

ResvTear message

RSVP message indicating that the established LSP and its associated soft state should be removed by the network. The message is advertised upstream toward the ingress router.

reverse path forwarding

RPF. Algorithm that checks the unicast routing table to determine whether there is a shortest path back to the source address of the incoming multicast packet. Unicast RPF helps determine the source of denial-of-service attacks and rejects packets from unexpected source addresses.

reverse path multicasting

RPM. Routing algorithm used by Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) to forward multicast traffic.

revert timer

For SONET Automatic Protection Switching (APS), a timer that specifies the amount of time (in seconds) to wait after the working circuit has become functional before making the working circuit active again.

rewrite rules

Set the appropriate class-of-service (CoS) bits in an outgoing packet. This allows the next downstream router to classify the packet into the appropriate service group.

RFC

Request for Comments. Internet standard specifications published by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF).

RFI

radio frequency interference. Interference from high-frequency electromagnetic waves emanating from electronic devices.

RIB

routing information base. Logical data structure used by BGP to store routing information, including routes BGP learned from peers, local routes resulting from the application of BGP policies to the learned routes, and the routes that BGP advertises to its peers. See also routing table.

RID

router identification. IP address used by a router to uniquely identify itself to a routing protocol. This address may not be equal to a configured interface address.

RIP

Routing Information Protocol. Interior gateway protocol (IGP) typically used in small, homogeneous IPv4 networks, it uses distance-vector routing to route information based on hop count. See also distance-vector routing.

RIP messages

Messages sent from the RIP port that contain routing information. RIP exchanges routing information by means of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) data packets. Each RIP router sends and receives datagrams on UDP port number 520, the RIP version 1/RIP version 2 port. All communications intended for another router’s RIP process area are sent from the RIP port.

RIP metric

Compares the value of different routes, based on hop count. The hop count is the number of routers that data packets must traverse between RIP networks. Metrics range from 0 for a directly connected network to 16 for an unreachable network. This small range prevents RIP from being useful for large networks. Also known as cost.

RIPng

Routing Information Protocol next generation. Used in IPv6 networks, a distance-vector interior gateway protocol that makes routing decisions based on hop count.

Rivest-Shamir-Adleman (encryption algorithm)

RSA. Algorithm for public key encryption.

RJ-45 connector

Connector commonly used for 10Base and 100Base Ethernet connections.

RMON

remote monitoring. Standard MIB that defines current and historical MAC-layer statistics and control objects, allowing you to capture real-time information across the entire network. This allows you to detect, isolate, diagnose, and report potential and actual network problems.

RNC

radio network controller. Manages the radio part of the network in UMTS.

role-based administration

Method of creating a security environment by defining strategic roles for administrators and creating domains of network devices where access is granted by assigned role.

root certificate

Self-signed public key certificate for a root CA; root certificates are used to verify other certificates.

Root System Domain

RSD. Pair of redundant Routing Engines on Juniper Networks routing platforms connected to the switch fabric on the Juniper Control System (JCS) platform. The configuration on the Routing Engines on the Juniper Networks routing platforms provides the RSD identification and the configuration of up to eight Protected System Domains (PSDs).

round-robin server access

Method of access for RADIUS servers. The first configured server is treated as a primary for the first request, the second server configured as primary for the second request, and so on. When the router reaches the end of the list of servers, it starts again at the top of the list until it comes full cycle through the list. See also direct server access.

route distinguisher

6-byte value identifying a VPN that is prefixed to an IPv4 address to create a unique IPv4 address. The new address is part of the VPN IPv4 address family, which is a BGP address family added as an extension to the BGP protocol. It allows you to configure private addresses within the VPN by preventing overlap with the private addresses in other VPNs.

route filter

Junos OS syntax used in a routing policy to match an individual route or a group of routes.

route flap damping, route flap dampening

Method for minimizing instability caused by route flapping. The router stores a penalty value with each route. Each time the route flaps, the router increases the penalty by 1000. If the penalty for a route reaches a configured suppress value, the router suppresses the route. That is, the router does not include the route as a forwarding entry and does not advertise the route to BGP peers. See also route flapping.

route flapping

Condition of network instability where a route is announced and withdrawn repeatedly, often as the result of an intermittently failing link.

route identifier

IP address of the router from which a BGP, IGP, or OSPF packet originated.

route leakage

Process of allowing routes from one protocol or area to be learned by another protocol or area. Routes can be leaked into OSPF or from OSPF as follows:

- Route leakage into OSPF—When another routing protocol adds a new route to the routing table, or when a static route is added to the routing table, OSPF can be informed through the redistribute commands. When OSPF learns the new route, it floods the information into the routing domain by using external LSAs.
- Route leakage from OSPF—OSPF adds routing information to the routing table, which is used in forwarding IP packets.

route maps

- Modify the characteristics of a route (generally to set its metric or to specify additional attributes) as it is transmitted or accepted by a router. Route maps control and modify routing information and define conditions for redistributing routes between routing domains. Route maps can use access lists to identify the set of routes to modify.
- In BGP, route maps consist of match clauses and set clauses. Match clauses specify the attribute values that determine whether a route matches a route map. Set clauses modify the specified attributes of routes that pass all match clauses in the route map.

route redistribution

Method of placing learned routes from one protocol into another protocol operating on the same router. The Junos OS accomplishes this with a routing policy.

route reflection

In BGP, the configuration of a group of routers into a cluster in which one system acts as a route reflector, redistributing routes from outside the cluster to all routers in the cluster. Routers in a cluster do not need to be fully meshed. An alternative to confederations as a strategy to reduce IBGP meshing. BGP specifies that a BGP speaker cannot advertise routes to an IBGP neighbor if the speaker learned the route from a different IBGP neighbor. In route reflection, a BGP speaker (the route reflector) advertises routes learned from each of its IBGP neighbors to its other IBGP neighbors. Routes are reflected among IBGP routers that are not meshed. See also cluster, confederation, route reflector, route reflector client.

route reflector

BGP speaker that advertises routes learned from each of its IBGP neighbors to its other IBGP neighbors; routes are reflected among IBGP routers that are not meshed. The route reflector’s neighbors are called route reflector clients. The clients are neighbors only to the route reflector, not to each other. Each route reflector client depends on the route reflector to advertise its routes within the AS; each client also depends on the route reflector to pass routes to the client.

A route reflector and its clients are collectively referred to as a cluster. Clients peer only with a route reflector and do not peer outside their cluster. Route reflectors peer with clients and other route reflectors within a cluster; outside a cluster they peer with other reflectors and other routers that are neither clients nor reflectors. Route reflectors and nonclient routers must be fully meshed. See also route reflector client.

route reflector client

A neighbor of a route reflector. The clients are neighbors only to the route reflector, not to each other. Each route reflector client depends on the route reflector to advertise its routes within the AS. Each client also depends on the route reflector to pass routes to the client. See also cluster, route reflector.

route tag

- Field in an RIP message that allows boundary routers in an autonomous system (AS) to exchange information about external routes. Route tags provide a method of separating internal RIP routes (routes within the RIP routing domain) from external RIP routes, which may have been imported from an EGP (Exterior Gateway Protocol) or another IGP (Interior Gateway Protocol).
- In IS-IS, a numeric value assigned to the IP addresses on an IS-IS route before the route is propagated to other routers in an IS-IS domain. You can use this tag to control IS-IS route redistribution, route leaking, or route summarization by referencing it in a route map.

route target

BGP extended community used to define VPN membership. The route target appears in a field in the update messages associated with VPN-IPv4. You create route-target import lists and route-target export lists for each VRF. The route targets that you place in a route-target export list are attached to every route advertised to other PE routers. When a PE router receives a route from another PE router, it compares the route targets attached to each route against the route-target import list defined for each of its VRFs. If any route target attached to a route matches the import list for a VRF, then the route is imported to that VRF. If no route target matches the import list, then the route is rejected for that VRF.

route-refresh capability

Lower-cost alternative to soft reconfiguration as a means to change policies without major disruptions. The router advertises the route-refresh capability when it establishes a BGP session with a peer to indicate that it is capable of exchanging BGP route-refresh messages. See also cooperative route filtering, soft reconfiguration.

router ID

RID. 32-bit number that uniquely identifies a router within an autonomous system, for example, 10.10.1.5.

router LSA

OSPF link-state advertisement sent by each router in the network. It describes the local router’s connected subnets and their metric values.

router priority

Numerical value assigned to an OPSF or IS-IS interface that is used as the first criterion in electing the designated router or designated intermediate system, respectively.

router solicitation address

IP address to which a DHCP client can transmit router solicitation requests.

router-link advertisement

OSPF link-state advertisement flooded throughout a single area by all routers to describe the state and cost of the router’s links to the area.

router.conf

Default router configuration file for autoinstallation, with a minimum configuration sufficient for you to telnet to the device and configure it manually.

routing domain

Collection of contiguous networks that provide full connectivity to all end systems located within them. A routing domain is partitioned into areas. See also AS.

Routing Engine

Portion of the router that handles all routing protocol processes, as well as other software processes that control the router’s interfaces, some of the chassis components, system management, and user access to the router.

routing gateway

Firewall, Network Address Translation (NAT) router, or other routing device used as a customer premises equipment (CPE) terminator in the home, office, or local point of presence (POP).

routing information base

RIB. Logical data structure used by BGP to store routing information, including routes BGP learned from peers, local routes resulting from the application of BGP policies to the learned routes, and the routes that BGP advertises to its peers. See also routing table.

Routing Information Protocol

RIP. Interior gateway protocol (IGP) typically used in small, homogeneous IPv4 networks, it uses distance-vector routing to route information based on hop count. See also distance-vector routing.

Routing Information Protocol next generation

RIPng. Used in IPv6 networks, a distance-vector interior gateway protocol that makes routing decisions based on hop count.

routing instance

Collection of routing tables, interfaces, and routing protocol parameters. The set of interfaces is contained in the routing tables, and the routing protocol parameters control the information in the routing tables.

routing matrix

Terabit routing system interconnecting up to four T640 routing nodes and a TX Matrix platform to deliver up to 2.56 terabits per second (Tbps) of subscriber switching capacity.

routing plane

Used to describe the interconnected routing engines within a routing matrix. There are two routing planes: the master routing plane, which includes all master Routing Engines, and the backup routing plane, which includes all backup routing planes.

routing policy

Method to control flow of routes into and out of the router. Determines how the system handles the routes it receives from and sends to neighboring routers. In many cases, routing policy consists of filtering routes, accepting certain routes, accepting and modifying other routes, and rejecting some routes.

routing protocol daemon

rpd. Junos OS routing protocol process (daemon). User-level background process responsible for starting, managing, and stopping the routing protocols on a Juniper Networks router.

routing table

Common database of routes learned from one or more routing protocols. Because each protocol typically has multiple routes to a destination, the IP routing table maintains the one best route by protocol. All routes are maintained by the Junos OS routing protocol process.

RP

rendezvous point. For PIM sparse mode, a core router acting as the root of the distribution tree in a shared tree.

RPC

remote procedure call. Type of protocol that allows a computer program running on one computer to cause a function on another computer to be executed without explicitly coding the details for this interaction.

rpd

Junos OS routing protocol process (daemon). User-level background process responsible for starting, managing, and stopping the routing protocols on a Juniper Networks router.

RPF

reverse path forwarding. Algorithm that checks the unicast routing table to determine whether there is a shortest path back to the source address of the incoming multicast packet. Unicast RPF helps determine the source of denial-of-service attacks and rejects packets from unexpected source addresses.

RPM

- reverse path multicasting. Routing algorithm used by the Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) to forward multicast traffic.
- real-time performance monitoring. Tool for creating active probes to track and monitor traffic.

RPM target

Remote network endpoint, identified by an IP address or URL, to which the device sends a real-time performance monitoring (RPM) probe.

RPM test

A collection of real-time performance monitoring (RPM) probes sent out at regular intervals.

RRO

record route object. An RSVP message object that notes the IP address of each router along the path of an LSP.

RS-232

Recommended Standard 232. Serial line protocol recommended standard, also known as EIA-232. Standard connector commonly used in computer serial ports.

RS-449

Recommended Standard 449. Serial line protocol recommended standard, also known as EIA-449. Defines the functional and mechanical characteristics of the interface between DTE and DCE.

RSA

Rivest-Shamir-Adleman (encryption algorithm). Algorithm for public key encryption.

RSA codes

RC2, RC4, RC5. Family of proprietary (RSA Data Security, Inc.) encryption schemes often used in Web browsers and servers. These codes use variable-length keys up to 2048 bits.

RSD

Root System Domain. Pair of redundant Routing Engines on Juniper Networks routing platforms connected to the switch fabric on the Juniper Control System (JCS) platform. The configuration on the Routing Engines on the Juniper Networks routing platforms provides the RSD identification and the configuration of up to eight Protected System Domains (PSDs).

RSTP

Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol. Used to prevent loops in bridge configurations. RSTP is not aware of VLANs, and blocks ports at the physical level. See also MSTP.

RSVP

Resource Reservation Protocol. Establishes a session between two routers to transport a specific traffic flow. See also RSVP-TE.

RSVP MD5 authentication

Method of authentication that provides hop-by-hop security against message spoofing and replay attacks. When authentication is configured, RSVP embeds an integrity object within secure cleartext RSVP messages sent between peers. The integrity object includes a key ID unique to the sender, a message sequence number, and keyed message digest. These attributes enable verification of both packet content and sender.

RSVP Path message

Sent by the ingress router downstream toward the egress router. It begins the establishment of a soft state database for a particular label-switched path.

RSVP Resv message

Sent by the egress router upstream toward the ingress router. It completes the establishment of the soft state database for a particular label-switched path.

RSVP signaled LSP

Label-switched path that is dynamically established using RSVP Path and Resv messages.

RSVP-TE

Resource Reservation Protocol--Traffic Engineering. RSVP with traffic engineering extensions, as defined by RFC 3209, that allow RSVP to establish label-switched paths (LSPs) in MPLS networks. See also MPLS, RSVP.

RTM

resource threshold monitor. CLI mode that enables you to set the rising and falling thresholds and trap hold-down times for certain interfaces. You can also view the resource threshold information.

RTMP

Real-Time Messaging Protocol. A multimedia streaming and remote procedure call (RPC) protocol primarily used in Adobe Flash. RTMP has three variations: The “plain” protocol that works on top of TCP and uses port 1935; RTMPT which is encapsulated within HTTP requests to traverse firewalls; and RTMPS which works just like RTMPT but over a secure HTTPS connection.

RTO

run time object. Code object created dynamically in memory during normal operation. Some examples of RTOs are session table entries, ARP cache entries, certificates, DHCP leases, and IPsec Phase 2 security associations (SAs).

RTP

Real-Time Transport Protocol. Internet protocol that provides mechanisms for the transmission of real-time data, such as audio, video, or voice, over IP networks. Compressed RTP is used for VoIP traffic.

RTR

Response Time Reporter. Feature that enables you to monitor network performance and resources by measuring response times and the availability of your network devices. The primary objective of RTR is to collect statistics and information about network performance.

RTSP

Real-Time Streaming Protocol. Application-level protocol for control over the delivery of data with real-time properties, it provides an extensible framework to enable controlled, on-demand delivery of real-time data such as audio and video. Sources of data can include both live data feeds and stored clips. This protocol is intended to control multiple data delivery sessions, provide a means for choosing delivery channels such as UDP, multicast UDP and TCP, and provide a means for choosing delivery mechanisms based upon RTP.

RTVBR

real-time variable bit rate. For ATM2 intelligent queuing (IQ) interfaces, data that is serviced at a higher priority rate than other VBR data. RTVBR is suitable for carrying packetized video and audio. RTVBR provides better congestion control and latency guarantees than non-real-time VBR.

RU

rack unit. The standard single unit height of a rack-mounted device.

rule

Statement that defines a specific type of network traffic. When traffic passes through the security device, the device attempts to match that traffic against its list of rules. If a rule is matched, the device performs the action defined in the rule against the matching traffic.

rule base

Set of rules that defines what traffic is and is not allowed to pass, using a specific detection mechanism to identify and prevent attacks. A security policy contains one or more rule bases. For example, NSM can contain three types of rule bases: zone, global, and multicast.

run time object

RTO. Code object created dynamically in memory during normal operation. Some examples of RTOs are session table entries, ARP cache entries, certificates, DHCP leases, and IPsec Phase 2 security associations (SAs).

RWS

receive window size. Number of packets that an L2TP peer can transmit without receiving an acknowledgment from the router. L2TP uses the RWS to implement a sliding window mechanism for the transmission of control messages. If the RWS is not configured for the L2TP tunnel, the router determines the RWS and uses this value for all new tunnels on both the L2TP access concentrator (LAC) and the L2TP network server (LNS).

RX

Communications abbreviation for receive; the corresponding abbreviation for transmit is TX.

### S

S-TAG

Field defined in the IEEE 802.1ad Q-in-Q encapsulation header that carries the S-VLAN identifier information See also B-TAG.

S-tagged service interface

Interface between a customer edge (CE) device and the I-BEB or IB-BEB network components. Frames passed through this interface contain an S-TAG field. Similarly, a B-tagged service interface contains a B-TAG field.

S-VLAN

stacked VLAN, service VLAN, or switched VLAN. Provides a two-level VLAN tag structure, with a specific service instance VLAN identifier carried inside the S-TAG field. Creating an S-VLAN requires the use of a second encapsulation tag; the router performs decapsulation twice, once to get the S-VLAN tag and once to get the VLAN tag. This double tagging approach enables more than 16 million address possibilities, extending the VLAN ID space to more than 16 million VLANs. This meets and exceeds the scaling requirement for Ethernet B-RAS applications. Defined by IEEE 802.1ad, an S-VLAN often corresponds to a network aggregation device such as a DSLAM. Scheduling and shaping is often established for an S-VLAN to provide CoS for downstream devices with little buffering and simple schedulers. See also B-VID, C-VLAN.

S-VLAN oversubscription

Ability to configure up to the maximum number of S-VLANs supported on an I/O module or IOA, knowing that no more than the maximum number of supported PPP sessions can be connected to the router at any one time.

S-VLAN tunnel

Special type of stacked VLAN that uses a single interface to tunnel traffic from multiple VLANs across an MPLS network. The S-VLAN tunnel enables multiple VLANs, each configured with a unique VLAN ID tag, to share a common S-VLAN ID tag when they traverse an MPLS network.

S/T interface

system reference point/terminal reference point interface. A four-pair connection between the ISDN provider service and the customer terminal equipment.

SA

security association. Set of security parameters that dictates how IPsec processes a packet. The SA defines what rules to use for authentication and encryption algorithms, key exchange mechanisms, and secure communications between two parties. A single secure tunnel uses multiple SAs. See also SA parameters.

SA parameters

Actual session parameters used to secure a specific data flow associated with a specific secure IP interface. How SA parameters are set depends on how the IP interfaces are secured:

- For manual secure IP interfaces, the system administrator sets SA parameters manually, which allows provisioning IP security (using IKE) to destinations that do not support SA negotiation.
- For signaled secure IP interfaces, the two security gateway peers negotiate SA parameters; the system administrator cannot set any of the parameters. For some of these parameters, such as session keys, the system administrator does not have even read access.

SAFI

subsequent address family identifier. Number that further identifies an address family identified by an AFI. In an MP-BGP update message, SAFI is used with AFI to identify the network layer protocol associated with the network address of the next hop and the semantics of the NLRI that follows. See also AFI.

salt encryption

Random string of data used to modify a password hash.

sampling

Method where the sampling key based on the IPv4 header is sent to the Routing Engine. There, the key is placed in a file, or cflowd packets based on the key are sent to a cflowd server.

SAP

- Session Announcement Protocol. Used with multicast protocols to handle session conference announcements.
- service access point. Device that identifies routing protocols and provides the connection between the network interface card and the rest of the network.

SAR

segmentation and reassembly. Buffering used with ATM.

SAR scheduler

One part of the integrated scheduler used to extend ATM QoS functionality. The commercial SAR scheduler enables you to configure traditional ATM cell-based QoS. See also HRR scheduler.

SAS

serial-attached SCSI. Data transfer technology used to move data to and from computer storage devices such as hard drives and tape drives.

SATA

Serial Advanced Technology Attachment. A computer bus technology primarily for transfer of data to and from a hard disk.

SC

system controller. Subsystem located on the SRP modules on the E320 router that controls the overall operations on the router.

SCB

System Control Board. On an M40 router, the part of the Packet Forwarding Engine that performs route lookups, monitors system components, and controls FPC resets.

SCC

switch-card chassis. Term used by the Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) to refer to the TX Matrix platform in a routing matrix.

SCEP

Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol. Protocol for digital certificates that supports certificate authority (CA) and registration authority (RA) public key distribution, certificate enrollment, certificate revocation, certificate queries, and certificate revocation list (CRL) queries.

SCG

SONET Clock Generator. On a T640 routing node, provides the Stratum 3 clock signal for the SONET/SDH interfaces. Also provides external clock inputs.

schedule object

Object that defines the time interval that a firewall rule is in effect. Use a schedule object in a firewall rule to determine when a device enforces that rule.

scheduler hierarchy

Hierarchical, tree-like arrangement of scheduler nodes and queues. The router supports up to three levels of scheduler nodes stacked above a port (level 0), with a final level of queues stacked above the nodes. A traffic-class group uses a scheduler level at level 1.

scheduler maps

In class of service, schedule maps associate schedulers with specific forwarding classes. See also schedulers, forwarding classes.

scheduler node

Element within the hierarchical scheduler that implements bandwidth controls for a group of queues. Queues are stacked above scheduler nodes in a hierarchy. The root node is associated with a channel or physical port.

scheduler profile

Collection of commands that configures the bandwidth at which queues drain as a function of relative weight, assured rate, and shaping rate.

schedulers

Define the priority, bandwidth, delay buffer size, rate control status, and RED drop profiles of a packet transmission. Schedulers are mapped to a specific forwarding class by a scheduler map. See also scheduler maps.

scheduling

Method of determining which type of packet or queue is transmitted before another. An individual router interface can have multiple queues assigned to store packets. The router then determines which queue to service based on a particular method of scheduling. This process often involves a determination of which type of packet should be transmitted before another. For example, first in, first out (FIFO). See also FIFO.

scope

Value used in some unicast and multicast IPv6 addresses that identifies the application suitable for the address. See also address scope.

SCP

secure copy. A protocol, program, or command based on SSH (Secure Shell Protocol) that securely transfers computer files, usually between a local and a remote host or between two remote hosts.

SCR

sustained cell rate. Upper bound on the conforming average rate of an ATM connection over a sustained time interval that is longer than the time interval for which the PCR is defined.

SCSI

small computer system interface. A standard interface and command set for transferring data between devices over a computer bus.

SCU

source class usage. Means of tracking traffic originating from specific prefixes on the provider core router and destined for specific prefixes on the customer edge router, based on the IP source and destination addresses.

SDH

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy. International standard defined by the International Telecommunication Union for transmitting bits over fiber-optic cable. A CCITT variation of the SONET standard.

SDP

Session Description Protocol. Used with multicast protocols to handle session conference announcements.

SDRAM

synchronous dynamic random access memory. Electronic standard in which the inputs and outputs of SDRAM data are synchronized to an externally supplied clock, allowing for extremely fast consecutive read and write capacity. A type of RAM that is stored on dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) and synchronized with the system clock.

SDSL

symmetric digital subscriber line. Version of digital subscriber line (DSL) where the upload speeds and download speeds are the same, typically in the range 144 Kbps–1.5 Mbps. SDSL uses one cable pair and does not share lines with analog phones.

SDX software

Service Deployment System software. Deprecated term. See SRX software.

secondary input policy

Evaluates conditions after a route lookup. See also input policy, output policy, policy.

section layer

For channelized OCx/STMx interfaces, the layer that manages the transport of STS/STM frames across the physical path. This layer is responsible for frame alignment, scrambling, error detection, error monitoring, signal reception, and signal regeneration. See also line layer, path layer.

Secure Access Device

Juniper Networks SSL VPN appliance.

secure copy

SCP. A protocol, program, or command based on SSH (Secure Shell Protocol) that securely transfers computer files, usually between a local and a remote host or between two remote hosts.

Secure Hash Algorithm

SHA. One of the cryptographic hashing functions used by FIPS, it is a standard published by NIST. See also hashing, SHA-1.

secure IP interfaces

Virtual IP interfaces that you can configure to provide confidentiality and authentication services for the data flowing through such interfaces. The software provides these services using mechanisms created by the suite of IPsec standards established by the IETF.

secure policy

Policy that is created with a mirror action and that contains information about where to forward mirrored traffic during packet mirroring. See also packet mirroring.

Secure Server Protocol

SSP. Modified version of TCP that is more reliable than ordinary TCP, requires less CPU and memory resources from servers, and reduces the number of acknowledgement packets on the network. SSP uses AES encryption and SH1 authentication for all connections. NSM uses SSP for communication between the UI, the GUI Server, and the Device Server.

Secure Shell

SSH. Protocol that uses strong authentication and encryption for remote access across a nonsecure network. SSH provides remote login, remote program execution, file copy, and other functions. In a UNIX environment, SSH is intended as a secure replacement for rlogin, rsh, and rcp.

Secure Sockets Layer

SSL. Protocol that encrypts security information using public-private key technology, which requires a paired private key and authentication certificate, before transmitting data across a network.

secure tunnel

Virtual connection between two security gateways used to exchange data packets in a secure way. A secure tunnel is made up of a local SA and a remote SA, where both are negotiated in the context of an ISAKMP SA.

security association

SA. Set of security parameters that dictates how IPsec processes a packet. The SA defines what rules to use for authentication and encryption algorithms, key exchange mechanisms, and secure communications between two parties. A single secure tunnel uses multiple SAs. See also SA parameters.

security device

Hardware device that enables secure access to your network components and protects your network against malicious traffic.

security level

Measure of how seriously a triggering event affects device functions.

Security Parameter Index

SPI. In IPsec, a numeric identifier used with the destination address and security protocol to identify an SA. When IKE is used to establish an SA, the SPI is randomly derived. When manual configuration is used for an SA, the SPI must be entered as a parameter.

security policy

- Set of rules defining access to your network, including permitted services, users, and time periods. Use security policies to control the shape of your network traffic as it passes through the firewall, or to log specific network events.
- In IDP Series, a set of one or more rule bases that determine which traffic to inspect, what to look for, and what action to take if a rule matches.

security policy database

SPD. Ordered list of policy entries that specifies what services are to be offered to IP datagrams and in what fashion. The SPD must discriminate between traffic that has IPsec protection and traffic that is allowed to bypass IPsec. This applies to the IPsec protection to be applied by a sender and that must be present at the receiver. The SPD requires distinct entries for inbound and outbound traffic. For any outbound or inbound datagram, three processing choices are possible: discard, bypass IPsec, or apply IPsec.

security zone

Collection of one or more network segments requiring the regulation of inbound and outbound traffic through the use of access policies.

segmentation and reassembly

SAR. Buffering used with ATM.

Serial Advanced Technology Attachment

SATA. A computer bus technology primarily for transfer of data to and from a hard disk.

serial interface

DTE/DCE interface for WAN links. See also DTE and DCE.

Serial Line Address Resolution Protocol

SLARP. Simple control protocol provided by the Cisco High-Level Data Link Control implementation that maintains serial link keepalives. See also Cisco HDLC.

serial-attached SCSI

SAS. Data transfer technology used to move data to and from computer storage devices such as hard drives and tape drives.

Server Manager

Module of the NSM user interface used to manage and monitor the individual server processes that comprise your NSM system.

service access point

SAP. Device that identifies routing protocols and provides the connection between the network interface card and the rest of the network.

Service Deployment System software

SRX software, formerly known as Service Deployment System software. Customizable Juniper Networks product with which service providers can rapidly deploy IP services—such as video on demand (VoD), IP television, stateful firewalls, Layer 3 VPNs, and bandwidth on demand (BoD)—to hundreds of thousands of subscribers over a variety of broadband access technologies.

service level agreement

SLA . Formal agreement between a service provider and its customers (as part of a networking service contract) to provide a certain level of service (usually a level of performance).

service line module

SLM. Tunnel-service line module that does not pair with a corresponding I/O module that provides ingress and egress ports. Receives data from and transmits data to line modules that have ingress and egress ports.

service name tag

Entry in a PPPoE service name table that specifies a particular service that an access concentrator (AC), such as an E Series router, can provide to a PPPoE client. An empty service name tag of zero length indicates that any service is acceptable. See also PPPoE service name table.

service object

Service objects represent the IP traffic types for existing protocol standards. Security devices monitor and manage network traffic using these protocols. NSM includes predefined service objects for most standard services. You can also create custom service objects to represent services that are not included in the list of predefined service objects, or to represent a custom service running on your network.

Service Profile Identifier

SPID. Used only in Basic Rate Interface (BRI) implementations of ISDN. The SPID specifies the services available on the service provider switch and defines the feature set ordered when the ISDN service is provisioned.

service VLAN

S-VLAN, stacked VLAN, or switched VLAN. Provides a two-level VLAN tag structure, with a specific service instance VLAN identifier carried inside the S-TAG field. Creating an S-VLAN requires the use of a second encapsulation tag; the router performs decapsulation twice, once to get the S-VLAN tag and once to get the VLAN tag. This double tagging approach enables more than 16 million address possibilities, extending the VLAN ID space to more than 16 million VLANs. This meets and exceeds the scaling requirement for Ethernet B-RAS applications. Defined by IEEE 802.1ad, an S-VLAN often corresponds to a network aggregation device such as a DSLAM. Scheduling and shaping is often established for an S-VLAN to provide CoS for downstream devices with little buffering and simple schedulers. See also B-VID, C-VLAN.

Services and Routing Engine

SRE. SRX mid-range services gateway module that provides processing power for security services, routing protocol processes, and other software processes that control the services gateway interfaces, some of the chassis components, system management, and user access to the device.

services interface

Interface that provides specific capabilities for manipulating traffic before it is delivered to its destination, for example, the adaptive services interface and the tunnel services interface. See also network interface.

Serving GPRS Support Node

SGSN. Device in the mobile network that requests PDP contexts with a GGSN.

Session and Resource Control software

SRX software. Customizable Juniper Networks product with which service providers can rapidly deploy IP services—such as video on demand (VoD), IP television, stateful firewalls, Layer 3 VPNs, and bandwidth on demand (BoD)—to hundreds of thousands of subscribers over a variety of broadband access technologies. Formerly known as Service Deployment System software.

Session Announcement Protocol

SAP. Used with multicast protocols to handle session conference announcements.

session attribute object

RSVP message object used to control the priority, preemption, affinity class, and local rerouting of the LSP.

Session Description Protocol

SDP. Used with multicast protocols to handle session conference announcements.

Session Initiation Protocol

SIP. Adaptive services application protocol option used for setting up sessions between endpoints on the Internet. Examples include telephony, fax, videoconferencing, file exchange, and person-to-person sessions.

session layer

Fifth level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design, it controls the dialogues and connections (sessions) between computers. It establishes, manages, and terminates the connections between the local and remote application. The OSI model made this layer responsible for "graceful close" of sessions, which is a property of TCP, and also for session checkpointing and recovery, which is not usually used in the Internet protocols suite. Session layers are commonly used in application environments that make use of remote procedure calls (RPCs).

set clause

Part of a route map that defines how the attributes are modified for matching routes. The set conditions apply only to routes that pass all the match conditions (or a route map with no match conditions). When a route passes all the match conditions, all set conditions are applied.

set-top box

End host or device used to receive IPTV video streams.

severity

The designated threat level of an attack: critical, high, medium, low, or informational. Attack objects use the severity setting that matches the potential threat level of a detected attack.

SFM

- Switching and Forwarding Module. On an M160 router, a component of the Packet Forwarding Engine that provides route lookup, filtering, and switching to FPCs.
- switch fabric module. A module that works with the SFP module to create a shared memory fabric for the E320 router.

SFP

small form-factor pluggable transceiver. Provides support for optical or copper cables. SFPs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. See also XFP.

SGSN

Serving GPRS Support Node. Device in the mobile network that requests PDP contexts with a GGSN.

SHA-1

Secure Hash Algorithm 1. Secure hash algorithm standard defined in FIPS PUB 180-1 (SHA-1). Developed by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), SHA-1 produces a 160-bit hash for message authentication. Longer-hash variants include SHA-224, SHA-256, SHA-384, and SHA-512 (sometimes grouped under the name “SHA-2”). SHA-1 is more secure than MD5. See also hashing, MD5.

sham link

Unnumbered point-to-point intra-area link advertised by a type 1 link-state advertisement (LSA).

shaping rate

In class of service, controls the maximum rate of traffic transmitted on an interface. See also traffic shaping.

shared IP interface

Allocation of separate pools of shared resources to subsets of logical interfaces belonging to the same physical port. One of a group of IP interfaces that are created over the same layer 2 logical interface, which enables multiple IP interfaces to share the same logical resources.

shared local address pool

Group of available addresses that enables a local address server to distribute addresses allocated from DHCP local server address pools within the same virtual router. The addresses are configured and managed within DHCP; therefore, thresholds are not configured on the shared pool, but are instead managed by the referenced DHCP local server pool. A shared local address pool references one DHCP address pool, and can then obtain addresses from the referenced DHCP address pool and from any DHCP address pools that are linked to the referenced DHCP address pool.

shared object

Object that can be shared across domains.

shared scheduling and shaping

Allocation of separate pools of shared resources to subsets of logical interfaces belonging to the same physical port.

shared shaper constituent

Multicast forwarding tree established from the rendezvous point (RP) to the last-hop router for a particular group address.

shared shaping

Mechanism that enables dynamic sharing of logical interface bandwidth for traffic that is queued through separate scheduler hierarchies. Also called shared rate shaping. See also compound shared shaping, simple shared shaping.

shared tunnel-server module

Module that supports dynamic tunnel-server ports. It provides both tunnel services and regular access services.

SHDSL

symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line. Standardized multirate symmetric DSL that transports rate-adaptive symmetrical data across a single copper pair at data rates from 192 Kbps to 2.3 Mbps, or from 384 Kbps to 4.6 Mbps over two pairs, covering applications served by HDSL, SDSL, T1, E1, and services beyond E1. SHDSL conforms to the following recommendations: ITU G.991.2 G.SHDSL, ETSI TS 101-524 SDSL, and ANSI T1E1.4/2001-174 G.SHDSL. See also G.SHDSL.

SHDSL transceiver unit—central office

STU-C, symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) transceiver unit–central office. Equipment at the telephone company central office that provides SHDSL connections to remote user terminals.

SHDSL transceiver unit—remote

STU-R, symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) transceiver unit–remote. Equipment at the customer premises that provides SHDSL connections to remote user terminals.

shim header

Location of the MPLS header in a data packet. The Junos OS always places (shims) the header between the existing Layer 2 and Layer 3 headers.

short frame

Contains less than 64 bytes of data.

short message service

SMS. GSM service that enables short text messages to be sent to and from mobile telephones.

short pipe model

Also called pipe (and short-pipe) model. Tunneling model whereby any traffic conditioning (in a pure JunosE environment, a change in traffic class/color combination) that is applied when traffic goes through the tunnel has no effect on the EXP bits coding in the inner header. That is, when traffic exits an LSP (when a label is popped) or when traffic enters an LSP, the inner header’s EXP bits coding is not changed. The pipe and short-pipe models differ in the header that the tunnel egress uses when it determines the PHB of an incoming packet. With the short-pipe model, the tunnel egress uses an inner header used for forwarding. With the pipe model, the outermost label is always used. Because of this, you cannot use PHP with the pipe model. See also uniform model.

shortest path first

SPF. Algorithm used by IS-IS and OSPF to make routing decisions based on the state of network links. Also called the Dijkstra algorithm.

shortest-path tree

SPT. Algorithm that builds a network topology that attempts to minimize the path from one router (the root) to other routers in a routing area.

SIB

Switch Interface Board. On a T640 routing node, provides the switching function to the destination Packet Forwarding Engine.

SIBR

Source Interface Based Routing. Method of allowing the security device to forward traffic based on the source interface (the interface on which the data packet arrives on the security device).

signaled path

In traffic engineering, an explicit path; that is, a path determined using RSVP signaling. The Explicit Route Object carried in the packets contains the explicit path information.

signaled secure IP interface

Negotiates an SA on demand with the remote security gateway. The remote security gateway must also support SA negotiation; otherwise, the gateway drops traffic. The router keeps statistics for dropped traffic. See also manual secure IP interfaces.

signaling message

Any GTP-PDU except the G-PDU. GTP signalling messages are exchanged between GSN pairs in a path. The signaling messages are used to transfer GSN capability information between GSN pairs and to create, update, and delete GTP tunnels.

Signaling System 7

SS7. Protocol used in telecommunications for delivering calls and services.

SIM

subscriber identity module. Detachable smart card on the GSM HSDPA 3G wireless modem and other mobile devices that stores configuration and subscriber information for the device.

simple authentication

Authentication method in IS-IS that uses a text password (authentication key) that can be entered in encrypted or unencrypted form. The receiving router uses this authentication key to verify the packet.

Simple Certificate Enrollment Protocol

SCEP. Protocol for digital certificates that supports certificate authority (CA) and registration authority (RA) public key distribution, certificate enrollment, certificate revocation, certificate queries, and certificate revocation list (CRL) queries.

simple explicit shared shaper

One of four types of shared shapers, in which the weight and priority attributes of the shared-shaping-constituent command are ignored, because the simple shared shaper does not allocate bandwidth among constituents. Instead it controls just the best-effort queue or node. See also compound explicit shared shaper, compound implicit shared shaper, simple implicit shared shaper.

simple implicit shared shaper

One of four types of shared shapers, in which constituents are best-effort nodes or queues, and all nodes and queues in named traffic-class groups. See also compound explicit shared shaper, compound implicit shared shaper, simple explicit shared shaper.

Simple Network Management Protocol

SNMP. Grotocol governs network management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions.

simple shared shaping

Software-assisted mechanism that measures the rate of active constituents, and can shape the best-effort node or queue associated with a logical interface to a shared rate. See also compound shared shaping, shared shaping.

simplex interface

Interface that treats packets it receives from itself as the result of a software loopback process. The interface does not consider these packets when determining whether the interface is functional.

single-mode fiber

Optical fiber designed for transmission of a single ray or mode of light as a carrier and used for long-distance signal transmission. For short distances, multimode fiber is used. See also MMF.

SIP

Session Initiation Protocol. Adaptive services application protocol option used for setting up sessions between endpoints on the Internet. Examples include telephony, fax, videoconferencing, file exchange, and person-to-person sessions.

SLA

service level agreement. Formal agreement between a service provider and its customers (as part of a networking service contract) to provide a certain level of service, usually a level of performance.

SLARP

Serial Line Address Resolution Protocol. Simple control protocol provided by the Cisco High-Level Data Link Control implementation that maintains serial link keepalives. See also Cisco HDLC.

sleep

Feature of SSH that prevents a user who has exceeded the authentication retry limit from connecting from the same host within the specified period.

SLM

service line module. Tunnel-service line module that does not pair with a corresponding I/O module that provides ingress and egress ports. Receives data from and transmits data to line modules that have ingress and egress ports.

slot group

Group of adjacent chassis (module) slots. The number of slots and number of slots per group depend on the system.

SLS

standard local survivability. Configurable software feature that enables a TGM550 to provide limited MGC functionality when no link is available to a registered MGC.

small computer system interface

SCSI. A standard interface and command set for transferring data between devices over a computer bus.

small form-factor pluggable transceiver

SFP. Provides support for optical or copper cables. SFPs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. See also XFP.

small outline dual inline memory module

SODIMM. Memory module that is approximately half the size of a standard DIMM.

smart keepalive

Also known as high-density keepalive. Mode whereby, when the keepalive timer expires, the interface first verifies whether any frames were received from the peer in the prior keepalive timeout interval. If so, the interface does not send an LCP echo request (keepalive). Keepalive packets are sent only if the peer is silent (if no traffic was received from the peer during the previous keepalive timeout interval). See also low-density keepalive mode.

SMDS

Switched Multimegabit Data Service. Connectionless, wide-area networking service designed for LAN interconnection. An SMDS network is composed of a series of SMDS switches inside a service provider’s network, a series of channel service units/data service units (CSUs/DSUs) that connect subscribers to the network, and routers and gateways to connect to each CSU/DSU.

SMS

short message service. GSM service that enables short text messages to be sent to and from mobile telephones.

SNA

System Network Architecture. IBM proprietary networking architecture consisting of a protocol stack that is used primarily in banks and other financial transaction networks.

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol. Protocol governs network management and the monitoring of network devices and their functions.

SNMP agent

Managed device, such as a router, that collects and stores management information. The SNMP agent (SNMPv3) recognizes up to 32 usernames that can have one of the following security levels: no authentication and no privacy, authentication only, authentication and privacy.

SNMP client

Device that executes management applications that monitor and control network elements. Sometimes called a network management station (NMS) or simply a manager. The SNMP client runs on a network host and communicates with one or more SNMP servers on other network devices, such as routers, to configure and monitor the operation of those network devices.

SNMP community

Logical group of SNMP-managed devices and clients in the same administrative domain.

SNMP community name

Name that acts as a password and is used to authenticate messages sent between an SNMP client and a router containing an SNMP server. The community name is sent in every packet between the client and the server.

SNMP event

Condition or state change that might cause the generation of a trap message.

SNMP group

Set of users with the same access privileges to the router. Three predefined groups are available: admin, public, and private. Applies to SNMPv3.

SNMP managed object

Characteristic of something that can be managed, such as a list of currently active TCP circuits in a device.

SNMP MIB

Tree-structured schema that specifies the format of managed data for a device function. The goal of a MIB is to provide a common and consistent management representation for that function across networking devices. E Series routers support both standard and enterprise SNMP MIBs. See also enterprise MIB, standard MIB.

SNMP notification

Message that indicates a status change (equivalent to a trap in SNMPv1). Applies to SNMPv3.

SNMP privilege level

MIB access level that allows increasing levels of privilege:

- Read-only—Read-only access to the entire MIB except for SNMP configuration objects.
- Read-write—Read-write access to the entire MIB except for SNMP configuration objects.
- Admin—Read-write access to the entire MIB.

SNMP secure packet mirroring trap

Type of SNMP trap that enables the administrator to capture and report packet mirroring information to an external device. The secure information can then be viewed on the remote device. See also packet mirroring.

SNMP server

Managed device, such as a router, that collects and stores management information. The SNMP server operates on a network device, such as a router, a switch, or a workstation. It responds to SNMP requests received from SNMP clients and generates trap messages to alert the clients about notable state changes in the network device. See also SNMP client.

SNMP Server Event Manager

Application that works in conjunction with the Event MIB (RFC 2981) to allow many management functions such as fault detection, configuration management, accounting management, and performance management. These functions are traditionally performed by the network management station (NMS). However, by using the SNMP Server Event Manager, you can distribute some of these functions to E Series routers and automate them. See also Event MIB.

SNMP trap

Message sent by an SNMP server to a client to indicate the occurrence of a significant event, such as a specifically defined condition or a threshold that was reached. Managed devices use traps to asynchronously report certain events to clients. See also SNMP server.

SNMP trap severity level

Each SNMP trap message is assigned a severity level. From most severe to least severe, the trap severity levels are: Emergency, Alert, Critical, Warning, and Notice. See also SNMP server.

SNMP user

Person who accesses the router. The router can provide authentication and privacy for the user through SNMPv3. Each user is associated with a group. Applies to SNMPv3.

SNMP view

Management information that is available to the user: read, write, or notification. Three predefined views are available for each group:

- Everything—Includes all MIBs associated with the router.
- User—Includes all MIBs associated with the router, except standard and enterprise MIBs used to configure SNMP operation.
- Nothing—Excludes all MIBs.

SNTP

Simple Network Time Protocol. Adaptation of the Network Time Protocol (NTP) used to synchronize computer clocks in the Internet. SNTP can be used when the ultimate performance of the full NTP implementation described in RFC 1305 is not needed or justified. When operating with current and previous NTP and SNTP versions, SNTP version 4 involves a clarification of certain design features of NTP that allow operation in a simple, stateless remote-procedure call (RPC) mode with accuracy and reliability expectations similar to the UDP/TIME protocol described in RFC 868, Time Protocol.

SOC

System On Chip. Integration of all required components of a device into a single integrated chip.

SODIMM

small outline dual inline memory module. Memory module that is approximately half the size of a standard DIMM.

soft reconfiguration

Method used to reapply inbound policies to stored BGP routes without clearing the BGP sessions and therefore disrupting the network.

soft state

In RSVP, control state in hosts and routers that expires if not refreshed within a specified amount of time.

solid-state drive

SSD. Storage device that uses solid-state memory to store persistent data.

SONET

Synchronous Optical Network. High-speed (up to 2.5 Gbps) synchronous network specification developed by Bellcore and designed to run on optical fiber. STS1 is the basic building block of SONET. Approved as an international standard in 1988. See also SDH.

SONET Clock Generator

SCG. On a T640 routing node, provides the Stratum 3 clock signal for the SONET/SDH interfaces. Also provides external clock inputs.

source class usage

SCU. Means of tracking traffic originating from specific prefixes on the provider core router and destined for specific prefixes on the customer edge router, based on the IP source and destination addresses.

Source Interface Based Routing

SIBR. Method of allowing the security device to forward traffic based on the source interface (the interface on which the data packet arrives on the security device).

source route

An option in the IP header. An attacker can use the source route option to enter a network with a false IP address and have data sent back to the attacker’s real address.

source service access point

SSAP. Device that identifies the origin of an LPDU on a DLSw network.

source-based tree

Multicast forwarding tree established from the source of traffic to all interested receivers for a particular group address. It is often used in a dense-mode forwarding environment.

source-specific multicast

SSM. Service that allows a client to receive multicast traffic directly from the source. Typically, SSM uses a subset of the PIM sparse mode functionality along with a subset of IGMPv3 to create a shortest-path tree between the client and the source, but it builds the shortest-path tree without the help of a rendezvous point.

Spanning Tree Protocol

STP. Defined in the IEEE standard 802.1D, the Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI Layer 2 protocol that ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged LAN. This protocol creates a spanning tree within a mesh network of connected Layer 2 bridges (typically Ethernet switches), and disables the links that are not part of that tree, leaving a single active path between any two network nodes.

sparse mode

Method of operating a multicast domain where sources of traffic and interested receivers meet at a central rendezvous point. A sparse mode network assumes that there are very few receivers for each group address. Routers running sparse mode protocols forward multicast traffic only when explicitly requested to do so. See also dense mode.

SPD

security policy database. Ordered list of policy entries that specifies what services are to be offered to IP datagrams and in what fashion. The SPD must discriminate between traffic that has IPsec protection and traffic that is allowed to bypass IPsec. This applies to the IPsec protection to be applied by a sender and that must be present at the receiver. The SPD requires distinct entries for inbound and outbound traffic. For any outbound or inbound datagram, three processing choices are possible: discard, bypass IPsec, or apply IPsec.

SPF

shortest path first. Algorithm used by IS-IS and OSPF to make routing decisions based on the state of network links. Also called the Dijkstra algorithm.

SPI

Security Parameter Index. In IPsec, a numeric identifier used with the destination address and security protocol to identify an SA. When IKE is used to establish an SA, the SPI is randomly derived. When manual configuration is used for an SA, the SPI must be entered as a parameter.

SPID

Service Profile Identifier. Used only in Basic Rate Interface (BRI) implementations of ISDN. The SPID specifies the services available on the service provider switch and defines the feature set ordered when the ISDN service is provisioned.

split horizon

Method used in distance-vector networks to avoid routing loops. When enabled, each router does not advertise routes back to the neighbor from which the information originated.

spoof checking

MPLS forwarding table behavior, whereby MPLS determines that an MPLS packet received from an upstream neighbor does not contain an MPLS label that was advertised to that neighbor. The packet is dropped. MPLS supports the following types of spoof checking:

- Router spoof checking—MPLS packets are accepted only if they arrive on an MPLS major interface that is in the same virtual router as the MPLS forwarding table.
- Interface spoof checking—MPLS packets are accepted only if they arrive on the particular MPLS major interface identified in the spoof check field.

SPQ

strict-priority queuing. Dequeuing method that provides a special queue that is serviced until it is empty. The traffic sent to this queue tends to maintain a lower latency and more consistent latency numbers than traffic sent to other queues. See also APQ.

SPT

shortest-path tree. Algorithm that builds a network topology that attempts to minimize the path from one router (the root) to other routers in a routing area.

SQL

structured query language. International standard language used to create, modify, and select data from relational databases.

src port

TCP or UDP port for the source IP address in a packet.

SRE

Services and Routing Engine. SRX mid-range services gateway module that provides processing power for security services, routing protocol processes, and other software processes that control the services gateway interfaces, some of the chassis components, system management, and user access to the device.

SRP

switch route processor. ERX router module that performs system management, routing table calculations and maintenance, forwarding table computations, statistics processing, configuration storage, and other control plane functions.

SRX software

Session and Resource Control software. Customizable Juniper Networks product with which service providers can rapidly deploy IP services—such as video on demand (VoD), IP television, stateful firewalls, Layer 3 VPNs, and bandwidth on demand (BoD)—to hundreds of thousands of subscribers over a variety of broadband access technologies. Formerly known as Service Deployment System software.

SS7

Signaling System 7. Protocol used in telecommunications for delivering calls and services.

SSAP

source service access point. Device that identifies the origin of an LPDU on a DLSw network.

SSB

System and Switch Board. On an M20 router, a Packet Forwarding Engine component that performs route lookups and component monitoring and monitors FPC operation.

SSD

solid-state drive. Storage device that uses solid-state memory to store persistent data.

SSH

Secure Shell. Protocol that uses strong authentication and encryption for remote access across a nonsecure network. SSH provides remote login, remote program execution, file copy, and other functions. In a UNIX environment, SSH is intended as a secure replacement for rlogin, rsh, and rcp.

SSH timeout

Maximum time allowed for a user to be authenticated, starting from the receipt of the first SSH protocol packet.

SSL

Secure Sockets Layer. Protocol that encrypts security information using public-private key technology, which requires a paired private key and authentication certificate, before transmitting data across a network.

SSL certificate

Secure electronic identifier conforming to the X.509 standard, definitively identifying an individual, system, company, or organization. In addition to identification data, the digital certificate contains a serial number, a copy of the certificate holder’s public key, the identity and digital signature of the issuing certificate authority (CA), and an expiration date.

SSM

source-specific multicast. Service that allows a client to receive multicast traffic directly from the source. Typically, SSM uses a subset of the PIM sparse mode functionality along with a subset of IGMPv3 to create a shortest-path tree between the client and the source, but it builds the shortest-path tree without the help of a rendezvous point.

SSP

- Switch-to-Switch Protocol. Protocol implemented between two DLSw routers that establishes connections, locates resources, forwards data, and handles error recovery and flow control.
- Secure Server Protocol. Modified version of TCP that is more reliable than ordinary TCP, requires less CPU and memory resources from servers, and reduces the number of acknowledgement packets on the network. SSP uses AES encryption and SH1 authentication for all connections. NSM uses SSP for communication between the UI, the GUI Server, and the Device Server.

SSRAM

synchronous static random access memory. Used for storing routing tables, packet pointers, and other data such as route lookups, policer counters, and other statistics to which the microprocessor needs quick access.

stacked virtual local area network

S-VLAN, stacked VLAN, service VLAN, or switched VLAN. Provides a two-level VLAN tag structure, with a specific service instance VLAN identifier carried inside the S-TAG field. Creating an S-VLAN requires the use of a second encapsulation tag; the router performs decapsulation twice, once to get the S-VLAN tag and once to get the VLAN tag. This double tagging approach enables more than 16 million address possibilities, extending the VLAN ID space to more than 16 million VLANs. This meets and exceeds the scaling requirement for Ethernet B-RAS applications. Defined by IEEE 802.1ad, an S-VLAN often corresponds to a network aggregation device such as a DSLAM. Scheduling and shaping is often established for an S-VLAN to provide CoS for downstream devices with little buffering and simple schedulers. See also B-VID, C-VLAN.

stacked VLAN

S-VLAN, service VLAN, or switched VLAN. Provides a two-level VLAN tag structure, with a specific service instance VLAN identifier carried inside the S-TAG field. Creating an S-VLAN requires the use of a second encapsulation tag; the router performs decapsulation twice, once to get the S-VLAN tag and once to get the VLAN tag. This double tagging approach enables more than 16 million address possibilities, extending the VLAN ID space to more than 16 million VLANs. This meets and exceeds the scaling requirement for Ethernet B-RAS applications. Defined by IEEE 802.1ad, an S-VLAN often corresponds to a network aggregation device such as a DSLAM. Scheduling and shaping is often established for an S-VLAN to provide CoS for downstream devices with little buffering and simple schedulers. See also B-VID, C-VLAN.

standalone mode

DHCP standalone mode. Mode in which the DHCP local server operates as a basic DHCP server. Clients are not authenticated by default; however, you can optionally configure the DHCP local server to use AAA authentication for the incoming clients.

standard AAL5 mode

Transport mode that allows multiple applications to tunnel the protocol data units of their Layer 2 protocols over an ATM virtual circuit. You use this transport mode to tunnel IP packets over an ATM backbone. See also AAL5 mode, cell-relay mode, Layer 2 circuits, trunk mode.

standard local survivability

SLS. Configurable software feature that enables a TGM550 to provide limited MGC functionality when no link is available to a registered MGC.

standard MIB

MIB defined by a body such as the IETF that fosters consistency of management data representation across many vendors’ networking products.

starvation

Problem that occurs when lower-priority traffic, such as data and protocol packets, is locked out (starved) because a higher-priority queue uses all of the available transmission bandwidth.

stateful access control

Method to address firewall issues; stateful access control guards a network by allowing traffic only in the trusted direction. After a firewall for a protocol is configured, all packets that belong to those applications, that use that protocol, are subject to stateful monitoring.

stateful firewall

Type of firewall created by a filter that evaluates the context of connections, permits or denies traffic based on the context, and updates this information dynamically. Context includes IP source and destination addresses, port numbers, TCP sequencing information, and TCP connection flags. The context established in the first packet of a TCP session must match the context contained in all subsequent packets if a session is to remain active. See also stateful firewall filter, stateless firewall filter.

stateful firewall filter

Type of firewall filter that evaluates the context of connections, permits or denies traffic based on the context, and updates this information dynamically. Context includes IP source and destination addresses, port numbers, TCP sequencing information, and TCP connection flags. The context established in the first packet of a TCP session must match the context contained in all subsequent packets if a session is to remain active. See also stateless firewall filter.

stateful firewall recovery

Recovery strategy that preserves parameters concerning the history of connections, sessions, or application status before failure. See also stateless firewall recovery.

stateful inspection

Firewall process that checks the TCP header for information about the session’s state. The process checks whether it is initializing (SYN), ongoing (SYN/ACK), or terminating (FIN). A stateful inspection firewall tracks each session flowing through it, dropping packets from unknown sessions that appear to be part of ongoing or illegal sessions. All security devices are stateful inspectors.

stateful signature

A signature is any distinctive characteristic that identifies something. A stateful signature knows the pattern it is attempting to find and where to look for that pattern. Stateful signatures produce very few false positives because they understand the context of the attack and can eliminate huge sections of network traffic they know the attack would not be in.

stateful signature detection

Method of attack detection that uses stateful signatures. Stateful signatures are much smarter than regular signatures: they know the protocol or service used to perpetrate the attack, the direction and flow of the attack, and the context in which the attack occurs.

stateful SRP switchover

Ensures rapid SRP module recovery following a switchover. Also known as high availability mode. Stateful SRP switchover uses an initial bulk file transfer and subsequent, transaction-based mirroring. In addition to keeping the contents of NVS,stateful SRP switchover keeps state and dynamic configuration data from the SRP memory synchronized between the primary and standby SRP modules.

stateless access control

Method to address firewall issues. You can use the E Series policy manager to provide solutions to access problems, such as address spoofing. E Series routers automatically provide some stateless checks as part of their normal forwarding feature set.

stateless firewall filter

Type of firewall filter that statically evaluates the contents of packets transiting the router and packets originating from or destined for the Routing Engine. Packets are accepted, rejected, forwarded, or discarded and collected, logged, sampled, or subjected to classification according to a wide variety of packet characteristics. Sometimes called access control lists (ACLs) or simply firewall filters, stateless firewall filters protect the processes and resources owned by the Routing Engine. A stateless firewall filter can evaluate every packet, including fragmented packets. In contrast to a stateful firewall filter, a stateless firewall filter does not maintain information about connection states. See also stateful firewall filter.

stateless firewall recovery

Recovery strategy that does not attempt to preserve the history of connections, sessions, or application status before failure. See also stateful firewall recovery.

static interface

Created through an existing configuration mechanism such as the command-line interface (CLI) or Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP). See also dynamic interface.

static LSP

In the context of traffic engineering, a static route that requires hop-by-hop manual configuration. No signaling is used to create or maintain the path. Also called a static path.

static oversubscription

Process that enables the router to vary queue thresholds based on the number of queues currently configured, which is relatively static. See also bandwidth oversubscription, dynamic oversubscription.

static path

In the context of traffic engineering, a static route that requires hop-by-hop manual configuration. No signaling is used to create or maintain the path. Also called a static LSP.

static route

Explicitly configured route that is entered into the routing table, requiring packets to use the specified path. Static routes have precedence over routes chosen by dynamic routing protocols.

static RP

One of three methods of learning the rendezvous point (RP) to group address mapping in a multicast network. Each router in the domain must be configured with the required RP information.

static translation

One of two NAT methods used to assign a translated IP address. Establishes a one-to-one mapping between a local and global address. Entered as a direct configuration setting that remains in the translation table until it is removed. Used when you must initiate connections from both the inside and outside interfaces or when the translation is not subject to change. See also dynamic translation.

static tunnel-server port

Virtual port that is always present on dedicated tunnel-server modules. No explicit configuration is required for this type of port.

statistics baseline

Starting point for statistics collection after resetting protocol or application statistics and counters to zero.

statistics profile

Template that specifies rate statistics and event-gathering characteristics. A statistics profile enables you to gather statistics for the rate at which packets are forwarded out of a queue and for the rate at which committed, conformed, or exceeded packets are dropped. Statistics profiles also enable you to use events to monitor the rate statistics.

STM

synchronous transport module. CCITT specification for SONET at 155.52 Mbps.

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol. Defined in the IEEE standard 802.1D, the Spanning Tree Protocol is an OSI Layer 2 protocol that ensures a loop-free topology for any bridged LAN. This protocol creates a spanning tree within a mesh network of connected Layer 2 bridges (typically Ethernet switches), and disables the links that are not part of that tree, leaving a single active path between any two network nodes.

streaming

Playing a digital media file while it is still being downloaded; letting a user view and hear digitized content as it is being downloaded.

strict

In the context of traffic engineering, a route that must go directly to the next address in the path. (Definition from RFC 791, modified to fit LSPs).

strict hop

Routers in an MPLS named path that must be directly connected to the previous router in the configured path; a next hop defined by the ingress node that is connected to the previous node in the path. See also loose hop.

strict-priority queuing

SPQ. Dequeuing method that provides a special queue that is serviced until it is empty. The traffic sent to this queue tends to maintain a lower latency and more consistent latency numbers than traffic sent to other queues. See also APQ.

strict-priority scheduling

Process that designates the traffic class (queue) that receives top priority for transmission of its packets through a port. It is implemented with a special strict-priority scheduler node that is stacked directly above the port.

strict-source routing

MPLS routing mechanism that specifies every hop that the packet must traverse. The specified path consists of adjacent hops.

structured query language

SQL. International standard language used to create, modify, and select data from relational databases.

STS

synchronous transport signal. Synchronous transport signal level 1 is the basic building block signal of SONET, operating at 51.84 Mbps. Faster SONET rates are defined as STS-n, where n is an integer by which the basic rate of 51.84 Mbps is multiplied. See also SONET.

STU-C

symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) transceiver unit–central office. Equipment at the telephone company central office that provides SHDSL connections to remote user terminals.

STU-R

symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line (SHDSL) transceiver unit–remote. Equipment at the customer premises that provides SHDSL connections to remote user terminals.

stub area

Area that does not get flooded with external link-state advertisements (LSAs) but does carry intra-area and interarea routes and a default route. See also NSSA.

sub-LSP

Part of a point-to-multipoint label-switched-path (LSP). A sub-LSP carries traffic from the main LSP to one of the egress PE routers. Each point-to-multipoint LSP has multiple sub-LSPs. See also P2MP LSP.

subchannel

Group of T1 timeslots. Subchannel numbers are in the range 1–24 but do not necessarily correspond to DS0 timeslots. The subchannel number identifies a fractional T1 channel.

subdomain

Section of a domain that is still a part of the larger whole domain.

subinterface

Mechanism that allows a single physical interface to support multiple logical interfaces or networks. Each subinterface borrows the bandwidth it needs from the physical interface with which it is associated. Configuring multiple virtual interfaces, or subinterfaces, on a single physical interface provides greater flexibility and connectivity on the network.

subnet addressing

Type of addressing used in IP addresses. A subset of a class A, B, or C network. Subnets cannot be used with class D (multicast) addresses. See also IP address classes.

subnet mask

Number of bits of the network address used to separate the network information from the host information in a Class A, Class B, or Class C IP address, allowing the creation of subnetworks. In binary notation, a series of 1s followed by a series of contiguous 0s. The 1s represent the network number; the 0s represent the host number. Use of masks can divide networks into subnetworks by extending the network portion of the address into the host portion. Subnetting increases the number of subnetworks and reduces the number of hosts.

subnetwork

Logical division of a LAN created to enhance performance and provide security.

subrate value

Value that reduces the maximum allowable peak rate by limiting the HDLC-encapsulated payload. The subrate value must exactly match that of the remote channel service unit (CSU).

subscriber (client) bridge interface

Type of bridge interface where the traffic flow direction is downstream—from the server (trunk) to the client (subscriber). See also trunk (server) bridge interface.

subscriber identity module

SIM. Detachable smart card on the GSM HSDPA 3G wireless modem and other mobile devices that stores configuration and subscriber information for the device.

subscriber interfaces

Extension of a shared IP interface. Subscriber interfaces are bidirectional—they can both receive and transmit traffic, in contrast to shared IP interfaces, which are unidirectional—they can transmit but not receive traffic.

subscriber policy

Set of forwarding and filtering rules that defines how to handle various packet or attribute types.

subsequent address family identifier

SAFI. Number that further identifies an address family identified by an AFI. In an MP-BGP update message, SAFI is used with AFI to identify the network layer protocol associated with the network address of the next hop and the semantics of the NLRI that follows. See also AFI.

summary link advertisement

OSPF link-statement advertisement flooded throughout the advertisement’s associated areas by area border routers to describe the routes that they know about in other areas.

super administrator

Root user, or manager, of the system. The super administrator role has unrestricted authority to access and modify most of the system, and is the default administrator for all domains.

supplicant

The client in an 802.1X-authenticated network.

sustained cell rate

SCR. Upper bound on the conforming average rate of an ATM connection over a sustained time interval that is longer than the time interval for which the PCR is defined.

SVC

switched virtual connection (or circuit). A dynamically established, software-defined logical connection that stays up as long as data is being transmitted. When transmission is complete, the software tears down the SVC. SVCs are used in situations where data transmission is sporadic. See also PVC, permanent virtual connection.

switch

Network device that attempts to perform as much of the forwarding task in hardware as possible. The switch can function as a bridge (LAN switch), router, or some other specialized device, and forwards frames, packets, or other data units. See also bridge.

switch fabric module

SFM. A module that works with the SFP module to create a shared memory fabric for the E320 router.

Switch Interface Board

SIB. On a T640 routing node, provides the switching function to the destination Packet Forwarding Engine.

switch route processor

SRP. ERX router module that performs system management, routing table calculations and maintenance, forwarding table computations, statistics processing, configuration storage, and other control plane functions.

switch-card chassis

SCC. Term used by the Junos OS command-line interface (CLI) to refer to the TX Matrix platform in a routing matrix.

Switch-to-Switch Protocol

SSP. Protocol implemented between two DLSw routers that establishes connections, locates resources, forwards data, and handles error recovery and flow control.

Switched Multimegabit Data Service

SMDS. Connectionless, wide-area networking service designed for LAN interconnection. An SMDS network is composed of a series of SMDS switches inside a service provider’s network, a series of channel service units/data service units (CSUs/DSUs) that connect subscribers to the network, and routers and gateways to connect to each CSU/DSU.

switched virtual circuit, switched virtual connection

SVC. A dynamically established, software-defined logical connection that stays up as long as data is being transmitted. When transmission is complete, the software tears down the SVC. SVCs are used in situations where data transmission is sporadic. See also PVC, permanent virtual connection.

switched VLAN

S-VLAN, stacked VLAN, or service VLAN. Provides a two-level VLAN tag structure, with a specific service instance VLAN identifier carried inside the S-TAG field. Creating an S-VLAN requires the use of a second encapsulation tag; the router performs decapsulation twice, once to get the S-VLAN tag and once to get the VLAN tag. This double tagging approach enables more than 16 million address possibilities, extending the VLAN ID space to more than 16 million VLANs. This meets and exceeds the scaling requirement for Ethernet B-RAS applications. Defined by IEEE 802.1ad, an S-VLAN often corresponds to a network aggregation device such as a DSLAM. Scheduling and shaping is often established for an S-VLAN to provide CoS for downstream devices with little buffering and simple schedulers. See also B-VID, C-VLAN.

Switching and Forwarding Module

SFM. On an M160 router, a component of the Packet Forwarding Engine that provides route lookup, filtering, and switching to FPCs.

switchover

In a redundant configuration, the process by which the router switches to the spare line module. During switchover, the line, circuit, and IP interfaces on the I/O module or IOAs appear to fail temporarily. The duration of the downtime depends on the number of interfaces and the size of the routing table, because the router must reload the interface configuration and the routing table from the SRP module. See also high availability mode.

symmetric digital subscriber line

SDSL. Version of digital subscriber line (DSL) where the upload speeds and download speeds are the same, typically in the range 144 Kbps–1.5 Mbps. SDSL uses one cable pair and does not share lines with analog phones.

symmetric high-speed digital subscriber line

SHDSL. Standardized multirate symmetric DSL that transports rate-adaptive symmetrical data across a single copper pair at data rates from 192 Kbps to 2.3 Mbps, or from 384 Kbps to 4.6 Mbps over two pairs, covering applications served by HDSL, SDSL, T1, E1, and services beyond E1. SHDSL conforms to the following recommendations: ITU G.991.2 G.SHDSL, ETSI TS 101-524 SDSL, and ANSI T1E1.4/2001-174 G.SHDSL. See also G.SHDSL.

SYN

TCP flag indicating the use of a synchronization packet when set to 1.

SYN attack

Denial-of-service attack in which SYN packets overwhelm a network by initiating so many connection attempts or information requests that the network can no longer process legitimate connection requests.

synchronization

- Process that prevents a redundant NVS card from overwriting saved files on the primary NVS card if the primary SRP module fails and the redundant SRP module takes control. See also file system synchronization mode.
- Mechanism for ensuring that a BGP speaker does not advertise routes to its EBGP peers before all the BGP routes have been redistributed into all routers within its AS that are running an IGP and are not running BGP. When BGP is not synchronized with the IGPs, the IGP routers cannot forward all traffic received from another AS. The BGP speaker cannot propagate a BGP route that it learned from a peer until an IGP route to the prefix has been installed in the BGP speaker’s IP routing table.
- Method that NTP uses to ensure accurate time. There are three stages to synchronization:
  - Preliminary synchronizationThe system evaluates the initial time situation and decides how to proceed with longer-term synchronization.
  - Frequency calibration--Takes place the first time you use NTP or when you reboot the system. During this stage, the system evaluates the frequency error of its clock by measuring change in the offset error. A frequency calibration takes 15 minutes.
  - Progressive synchronizationThe system continues to synchronize to a server after establishing initial NTP parameters.

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDH. International standard defined by the International Telecommunication Union for transmitting bits over fiber-optic cable. A CCITT variation of the SONET standard.

synchronous dynamic random access memory

SDRAM. Electronic standard in which the inputs and outputs of SDRAM data are synchronized to an externally supplied clock, allowing for extremely fast consecutive read and write capacity. A type of RAM that is stored on dual in-line memory modules (DIMMs) and synchronized with the system clock.

Synchronous Optical Network

SONET. High-speed (up to 2.5 Gbps) synchronous network specification developed by Bellcore and designed to run on optical fiber. STS1 is the basic building block of SONET. Approved as an international standard in 1988. See also SDH.

synchronous static random access memory

SSRAM. Used for storing routing tables, packet pointers, and other data such as route lookups, policer counters, and other statistics to which the microprocessor needs quick access.

synchronous transport module

STM. CCITT specification for SONET at 155.52 Mbps.

synchronous transport signal

STS. Synchronous transport signal level 1 is the basic building block signal of SONET, operating at 51.84 Mbps. Faster SONET rates are defined as STS-n, where n is an integer by which the basic rate of 51.84 Mbps is multiplied. See also SONET.

sysid

system identifier. Portion of the ISO nonclient peer. The system ID can be any 6 bytes that are unique throughout a domain.

syslog

system log. Method for sending and storing messages to a log file for troubleshooting or record-keeping. It can also be used as an action within a firewall filter to store information to the messages file.

system alarm

Predefined alarm triggered by a missing rescue configuration or by a lack of an installed license for a licensed software feature.

System and Switch Board

SSB. On an M20 router, a Packet Forwarding Engine component that performs route lookups and component monitoring and monitors FPC operation.

System Control Board

SCB. On an M40 router, the part of the Packet Forwarding Engine that performs route lookups, monitors system components, and controls FPC resets.

system controller

SC. Subsystem located on the SRP modules on the E320 router that controls the overall operations on the router.

system events

System changes that can be classified into log event categories and that can be used for tracking purposes.

system ID

sysid. Portion of the ISO nonclient peer. The system ID can be any 6 bytes that are unique throughout a domain.

system log

syslog. Method for sending and storing messages to a log file for troubleshooting or record-keeping. It can also be used as an action within a firewall filter to store information to the messages file.

System Network Architecture

SNA. IBM proprietary networking architecture consisting of a protocol stack that is used primarily in banks and other financial transaction networks.

System On Chip

SOC. Integration of all required components of a device into a single integrated chip.

system reference point/terminal reference point interface

S/T interface. A four-pair connection between the ISDN provider service and the customer terminal equipment.

### T

T-carrier

Generic designator for any of several digitally multiplexed telecommunications carrier systems originally developed by Bell Labs and used in North America and Japan.

T-PDU

Transport Protocol Data Unit. Payload that is tunneled in the GTP tunnel.

T1

Basic physical layer protocol used by the Digital Signal level 1 (DS1) multiplexing method in North America. A T1 interface operates at a bit rate of 1.544 Mbps and can support 24 DS0 channels.

T3

Physical layer protocol used by the Digital Signal level 3 (DS3) multiplexing method in North America. A T3 interface operates at a bit rate of 44.736 Mbps.

table map

Mechanism for applying a route map to an IS-IS route as a way to filter and manipulate route attributes before the route is added to the routing table. Issuing the JunosE table-map command (in Router Configuration mode) applies a specified route map as a policy filter on the route before it is installed in the routing table.

TACACS

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System. A security protocol that provides centralized validation of users who are attempting to gain access to a router or NAS.

TACACS+

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus. An authentication method of providing access control for routers, network access servers, and other networked computing devices using one or more centralized servers. TACACS+ provides separate authentication, authorization, and accounting services. It is based on TACACS. However, it is an entirely new protocol.

TACACS+ accounting service

Service that enables the creation of an audit trail of User Exec sessions and command-line interface (CLI) commands that have been executed within these sessions. For example, you can track user CLI connects and disconnects, when configuration modes have been entered and exited, and which configuration and operational commands have been executed.

TACACS+ host

Security server on which the TACACS+ process is running. Also called a TACACS+ server.

TACACS+ process

Program or software running on a security server that provides AAA services using the TACACS+ protocol. The program processes authentication, authorization, and accounting requests from an NAS. When processing authentication requests, the process might respond to the NAS with a request for additional information, such as a password.

tail drop

Queue management algorithm for dropping packets from the input end (tail) of the queue when the length of the queue exceeds a configured threshold. See also RED.

TCC

translational cross-connect. Switching concept that allows you to establish interconnections between a variety of Data Link Layer (Layer 2) protocols or circuits.

TCM

tricolor marking. Traffic policing mechanism that extends the functionality of class-of-service (CoS) traffic policing by providing three levels of drop precedence (loss priority or PLP) instead of two. There are two types of TCM: single-rate and two-rate. The Junos OS currently supports two-rate TCM only. See also trTCM.

TCP

Transmission Control Protocol. Works in conjunction with the Internet Protocol (IP) to send data over the Internet, creating connections between hosts for the exchange of data. Divides a message into packets and tracks the packets from point of origin to destination. Guarantees that packets are transmitted in their original sequence from sender to receiver.

TCP port 179

Well-known port number used by BGP to establish a peering session with a neighbor.

TCP scan

Attack method that attempts to connect to every TCP port on a single machine, to provide attackers with information about your network configuration.

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Set of communications protocols that support peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local and wide area networks. Enables computers with different operating systems to communicate with each other. Controls how data is transferred between computers on the Internet.

tcpdump

- UNIX packet monitoring utility used by the Junos OS to view information about packets sent or received by the Routing Engine.
- In IDP Series, a BSD utility used to capture TCP/IP packets.

TDM

time-division multiplexing. A form of multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots.

TDMA

Time-Division Multiple Access. Type of multiplexing in which two or more channels of information are transmitted over the same link, where the channels take turns to use the link. Each link is allocated a different time interval (“slot” or “slice”) for the transmission of each channel. For the receiver to distinguish one channel from the other, some kind of periodic synchronizing signal or distinguishing identifier is required. See also GSM.

TE

traffic engineering. Ability to control the path taken through a network or portion of a network based on a set of traffic parameters (bandwidth, QoS parameters, and so on). Traffic engineering enables performance optimization of operational networks and their resources. See also MPLS traffic engineering, RSVP-TE.

tear drop attack

If the first and second parts of a fragmented packet overlap, the server attempting to reassemble the packet can crash. If the security device sees this discrepancy in a fragmented packet, it drops the packet.

TEI

Terminal Endpoint Identifier. Any ISDN-capable device attached to an ISDN network. The TEI is a number between 0 and 127, where 0 through 63 are used for static TEI assignment, 64 through 126 are used for dynamic assignment, and 127 is used for group assignment.

TEID

Tunnel Endpoint Identifier. Uniquely identifies a tunnel endpoint in the receiving GTP-U or GTP-C protocol entity. The receiving end of a GTP tunnel locally assigns the TEID value for the transmitting end.

template

Configuration that is defined once and then can be used for other device configurations. You can specify most device configuration values in a template, and you can specify only those configuration parameters that you want to set. You do not need to specify a complete device configuration.

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System (Plus)

TACACS, TACACS+. An authentication method of providing access control for routers, network access servers, and other networked computing devices using one or more centralized servers. TACACS+ provides separate authentication, authorization, and accounting services. It is based on TACACS. However, it is an entirely new protocol.

Terminal Endpoint Identifier

TEI. Any ISDN-capable device attached to an ISDN network. The TEI is a number between 0 and 127, where 0 through 63 are used for static TEI assignment, 64 through 126 are used for dynamic assignment, and 127 is used for group assignment.

terminating action

Action in a routing policy or firewall filter that halts the logical software processing of a policy or filter.

terms

Used in a routing policy or firewall filter to segment the policy or filter into small match and action pairs.

test interval

Time, in seconds, between RPM tests.

TFTP

Trivial File Transfer Protocol. An Internet software utility that is simpler to use than the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) but less capable. TFTP does not support any security features, so it is used where user authentication and directory visibility are not required. TFTP uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) rather than the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to transfer small files on a network.

TGM550

Avaya H.248 Telephony Gateway Module for VoIP, it is installed in a Services Router along with one or more Telephony Interface Modules (TIMs) to connect VoIP and legacy analog telephones and trunks over IP networks. Only the TGM550 has an interface configurable through the J-Web interface or Junos OS CLI. The TIMs are configured and administered from the TGM550 CLI.

Third-Generation Partnership Project

3GPP. Created to expedite the development of open, globally accepted technical specifications for the Universal Mobile Telecommunications System (UMTS).

through

Junos OS routing policy match type representing all routes that fall between the two supplied prefixes in the route filter.

TID

tunnel identifier. Uniquely identifies a particular tunnel or tunnel group.

TIM510

Avaya E1/T1 Telephony Interface Module for VoIP, it is installed in a Services Router to provide an E1 or T1 trunk connection over the Internet to a telephone central office (CO). A TIM510 is configured and administered from a TGM550 installed in the same router.

TIM514

Avaya Analog Telephony Interface Module for VoIP, it is installed in a Services Router to connect individual telephones or trunk lines to the Internet. A TIM514 is configured and administered from a TGM550 installed in the same router.

TIM521

Avaya BRI Telephony Interface Module for VoIP, it is installed in a Services Router to connect ISDN Basic Rate Interface (BRI) trunk lines to a telephone central office (CO) over the Internet for data or voice transmission. A TIM521 is configured and administered from a TGM550 installed in the same router.

time to live

TTL. Value (octet) in the IP header that is (usually) decremented by 1 for each hop the packet passes through. If the field reaches zero, the packet is discarded, and a corresponding error message is sent to the source of the packet.

Time-Division Multiple Access

TDMA. Type of multiplexing in which two or more channels of information are transmitted over the same link, where the channels take turns to use the link. Each link is allocated a different time interval (“slot” or “slice”) for the transmission of each channel. For the receiver to distinguish one channel from the other, some kind of periodic synchronizing signal or distinguishing identifier is required. See also GSM.

time-division multiplexed channel

Channel derived from a given frequency and transmitted over a single wire or wireless medium. The channel is preassigned a time slot whether or not there is data to transmit.

time-division multiplexing

TDM. A form of multiplexing that divides a transmission channel into successive time slots.

timeout timer

Used in a distance-vector protocol to ensure that the current route is still usable for forwarding traffic.

TLS

Transport Layer Security. Protocol that ensures privacy between communicating applications and their users on the Internet by blocking any third party from eavesdropping or message tampering. In NSM, it is used to provide secure communication between the NSM UI and the NSM GUI server.

TLV

type-length-value. An element inside a data communications protocol used to encode optional information. These fields are used as follows:

- Type—A 1-4 byte numeric code that indicates the kind of field that this part of the message represents.
- Length—A 1-4 byte field that denotes the size of the value field, typically in bytes.
- Value—A variable-sized set of bytes that contains the data for this part of the message.

TN power system

Power distribution system that has one point connected directly to earth (ground), usually the star point in a three-phase system. The exposed conductive parts of the installation are connected to that point by protective earth conductors.

TNP

Trivial Network Protocol. Juniper Networks proprietary protocol automatically configured on an internal interface by the Junos OS. TNP is used to communicate between the Routing Engine and components of the Packet Forwarding Engine, and is critical to the operation of the router.

token-bucket algorithm

Used in a rate-policing application to enforce an average bandwidth while allowing bursts of traffic up to a configured maximum value.

ToS

type of service. Method of handling traffic using information extracted from the fields in the ToS byte to differentiate packet flows.

totally stubby area

OSPF area type that prevents Type 3, 4, and 5 link-state advertisements (LSAs) from entering the nonbackbone area. However, type 3 LSAs carrying default route information alone are injected into the area. See also NSSA, stub area.

traditional NAT

Common method of using network address translation (NAT). Primary use is translating private addresses to legal addresses for use in an external network. There are two types of traditional NAT: basic NAT and NAPT. See also basic NAT, NAPT.

traffic class

Chassis-wide collection of buffers, queues, and bandwidth that can be allocated to provide a defined level of service to packets in the traffic class for JunosE QoS.

traffic engineering

Process of selecting the paths chosen by data traffic in order to balance the traffic load on the various links, routers, and switches in the network. (Definition from http://www.ietf.org/internet-drafts/draft-ietf-mpls-framework-04.txt .) See also TE, MPLS.

traffic engineering class

In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, a paired class type and priority.

traffic engineering class map

In Differentiated Services-aware traffic engineering, a map among the class types, priorities, and traffic engineering classes. The traffic engineering class mapping must be consistent across the Differentiated Services domain.

traffic policing

Examines traffic flows and discards or marks packets that exceed service-level agreements (SLAs).

traffic sampling

Method used to capture individual packet information of traffic flow at a specified time period. The sampled traffic information is placed in a file and stored on a server for various types of analysis. See also packet capture.

traffic shaping

Reduces the potential for network congestion by placing packets in a queue with a shaper at the head of the queue. Traffic shaping tools regulate the rate and volume of traffic admitted to the network. See also shaping rate.

traffic-class group

Separate hierarchy of scheduler nodes and queues over a port. Traffic classes belong to the default group unless they are specifically assigned to a named group. Organizing traffic into multiple traffic-class groups enables you to manage and shape traffic—by service class, for example—when the traffic classes are distributed across different virtual circuits. The router supports up to four traffic-class groups. A traffic class cannot belong to more than one group.

traffic-control profile

Defines the characteristics of a scheduler node, as used at several levels of the CLI, including the physical interface, the interface set, and the logical interface. Scheduling and queuing characteristics are defined for the scheduler node using the shaping-rate, guaranteed-rate, and delay-buffer-rate statements. Queues over these scheduler nodes are defined by referencing a scheduler map. See also schedulers and scheduler maps.

transform sets

Sets composed of security parameters that provide a required security level to a particular data flow. Transform sets are used during user SA negotiation to find common agreement between the local and the remote security gateway on how to protect that specific data flow. A transform set includes encapsulation protocols and transforms, for example, encryption/decryption/authentication algorithms.

transient black hole

Condition in which a transit router running both IS-IS and BGP drops traffic because not all of the information required to reach some external destinations is yet available.

transient change

Commit script-generated configuration change that is loaded into the checkout configuration, but not into the candidate configuration. Transient changes are not saved in the configuration if the associated commit script is deleted or deactivated. See also persistent change.

transient interface

Interface that can be configured on a routing platform depending on your network needs. Unlike a permanent interface that is required for router operation, a transient interface can be disabled or removed without affecting basic operation of the router. See also FPC, PIC, permanent interface.

transit area

In OSPF, an area used to pass traffic from one adjacent area to the backbone, or to another area if the backbone is more than two hops away from an area.

transit router

In MPLS, any intermediate router in the LSP between the ingress router and the egress router.

translational cross-connect

TCC. Switching concept that allows you to establish interconnections between a variety of Data Link Layer (Layer 2) protocols or circuits.

Transmission Control Protocol

TCP. Works in conjunction with the Internet Protocol (IP) to send data over the Internet, creating connections between hosts for the exchange of data. Divides a message into packets and tracks the packets from point of origin to destination. Guarantees that packets are transmitted in their original sequence from sender to receiver.

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TCP/IP. Set of communications protocols that support peer-to-peer connectivity functions for both local and wide area networks. Enables computers with different operating systems to communicate with each other. Controls how data is transferred between computers on the Internet.

transparent bridge

Data Link Layer (Layer 2) relay device that connects two or more networks or network systems. Transparent bridging is configured when you create one or more bridge groups on an E Series router. See also bridge group, bridge group interface.

transport layer

Fourth level in the seven-layer OSI reference model for network protocol design and in the five-layer TCP/IP protocol stack. This layer provides communication between applications residing in different hosts and reliable transparent data transfer between end users. It is the first layer to address reliability.

transport mode

IPsec mode of operation in which the data payload is encrypted, but the original IP header is left untouched. The IP addresses of the source or destination can be modified if the packet is intercepted. Because of its construction, transport mode can be used only when the communication endpoint and cryptographic endpoint are the same. VPN gateways that provide encryption and decryption services for protected hosts cannot use transport mode for protected VPN communications. See also tunnel mode.

transport plane

Virtual network path used to distribute data between nodes. Also known as data plane, control plane.

Transport Protocol Data Unit

T-PDU. Payload that is tunneled in the GTP tunnel.

transport virtual router

For a secure IP tunnel, the VR in which both of the secure tunnel endpoints,—the source and destination—are routable addresses. Normally, the transport VR is the default ISP routing infrastructure on top of which VPNs are provisioned.

trap

SNMP message that reports significant events occurring on a network device, most often errors or failures. SNMP traps are defined in either standard or enterprise-specific MIBs. See SNMP trap.

tricolor marking

TCM. Traffic policing mechanism that extends the functionality of class-of-service (CoS) traffic policing by providing three levels of drop precedence (loss priority or PLP) instead of two. There are two types of TCM: single-rate and two-rate. The Junos OS currently supports two-rate TCM only. See also trTCM.

trigger

RADIUS attribute that identifies a user whose traffic is to be mirrored. Packet mirroring starts when a trigger is detected. See also packet mirroring.

trigger table (mteTriggerTable)

SNMP term for a table that lists any currently defined trigger conditions. Triggers fall into three categories—existence, Boolean, and threshold. One of three parts of the Event MIB. See also event table (mteEventTable), objects table (mteObjectsTable).

triggered updates

Used in a distance-vector protocol to reduce the time for the network to converge. When a router has a topology change, it immediately sends the information to its neighbors instead of waiting for a timer to expire.

Triple Data Encryption Standard

3DES. A 168-bit encryption algorithm that encrypts data blocks with three different keys in succession, achieving a higher level of encryption than standard DES. Data is encrypted with the first key, decrypted with the second key, and encrypted again with the third key. 3DES is often implemented with cipher block chaining (CBC). 3DES is one of the strongest encryption algorithms available for use in virtual private networks (VPNs). Also called Triple DES.

triple play

Provisioning of three services (data, voice, and video) over a single broadband connection. See also quadruple play.

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TFTP. An Internet software utility that is simpler to use than the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) but less capable. TFTP does not support any security features, so it is used where user authentication and directory visibility are not required. TFTP uses the User Datagram Protocol (UDP) rather than the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) to transfer small files on a network.

Trivial Network Protocol

TNP. Juniper Networks proprietary protocol automatically configured on an internal interface by the Junos OS. TNP is used to communicate between the Routing Engine and components of the Packet Forwarding Engine, and is critical to the operation of the router.

trojan

Program with hidden functionality. Trojans often install a remote administration program (known as a backdoor) that enables attackers to access the target system.

trTCM

Two-rate TCM polices traffic according to the color classification (loss priority) of each packet. Traffic policing is based on two rates: the committed information rate (CIR) and the peak information rate (PIR). Two-rate TCM is defined in RFC 2698, A Two Rate Three Color Marker. See also CIR, PIR.

trunk (server) bridge interface

Bridge interface in which the traffic flow direction is upstream—from the client (subscriber) to the server (trunk). See also subscriber (client) bridge interface.

trunk mode

Layer 2 circuit cell-relay transport mode that allows you to send ATM cells between ATM2 IQ interfaces over an MPLS core network. You use Layer 2 circuit trunk mode (as opposed to standard Layer 2 circuit cell-relay mode) to transport ATM cells over an MPLS core network that is implemented between other vendors’ switches or routers. The multiple connections associated with a trunk increase bandwidth and provide failover redundancy. See also AAL5 mode, cell-relay mode, Layer 2 circuits, standard AAL5 mode.

trunk port

Enables a switch to bundle traffic from several VLANs through a single physical port, sorting the various packets by the VLAN identifier (VID) in their frame headers.

trust zone

One of two predefined zones (trust, untrust) that enables packets to be secured from being seen by devices external to your current domain.

trusted network

Internal network (for instance, an intranet) or your personal computer. See also untrusted network.

TSM

Tunnel Service Module. Line module that does not pair with a corresponding I/O module that provides ingress and egress ports. A TSM receives data from and transmits data to line modules that have ingress and egress ports.

Tspec object

RSVP message object that contains information such as the bandwidth request of the LSP as well as the minimum and maximum packets supported.

TTL

time to live. Value (octet) in the IP header that is (usually) decremented by 1 for each hop the packet passes through. If the field reaches zero, the packet is discarded, and a corresponding error message is sent to the source of the packet.

tunnel

Private, secure path through an otherwise public network. More specifically, it is an LSP that is used by an IGP to reach a destination, or an LSP that uses traffic engineering.

tunnel endpoint

Last node of a tunnel where the tunnel-related headers are removed from the packet, which is then passed on to the destination network.

Tunnel Endpoint Identifier

TEID. Uniquely identifies a tunnel endpoint in the receiving GTP-U or GTP-C protocol entity. The receiving end of a GTP tunnel locally assigns the TEID value for the transmitting end.

tunnel interface

Opening, or doorway, through which traffic to or from a VPN tunnel passes. It can be numbered (assigned an IP address) or unnumbered. A numbered tunnel interface can be in either a tunnel zone or security zone. An unnumbered tunnel interface can only be in a security zone that contains at least one security zone interface. The unnumbered tunnel interface borrows the IP address from the security zone interface.

tunnel mode

IPsec mode of operation in which the entire IP packet, including the header, is encrypted and authenticated and a new VPN header is added, protecting the entire original packet. This mode can be used by both VPN clients and VPN gateways, and protects communications that come from or go to non-IPsec systems. See also transport mode.

Tunnel Service Module

TSM. Line module that does not pair with a corresponding I/O module that provides ingress and egress ports. A TSM receives data from and transmits data to line modules that have ingress and egress ports.

tunnel services interface

Provides the capability of a Tunnel Services PIC on an AS PIC. See also Tunnel Services PIC.

Tunnel Services PIC

Physical interface card that allows the router to perform the encapsulation and de-encapsulation of IP datagrams. The Tunnel Services PIC supports IP-IP, GRE, and PIM register encapsulation and de-encapsulation. When the Tunnel Services PIC is installed, the router can be a PIM rendezvous point (RP) or a PIM first-hop router for a source that is directly connected to the router.

tunnel zone

Logical segment that hosts one or more tunnel interfaces. A tunnel zone is associated with a security zone that acts as its carrier.

tunneling

Transmission of data intended for use only within a private (usually corporate) network through a public network in such a way that the routing nodes in the public network are unaware that the transmission is part of a private network. Tunneling is generally done by encapsulating the private network data and protocol information within the public network transmission units so that the private network protocol information appears to the public network as data. Tunneling allows the use of the Internet, a public network, to convey data on behalf of a private network. With VPN tunneling, remote users can access the entrance to their corporate VPN network using an Internet service provider and the remote users as well as the organization know that it is a secure connection. Also known as port forwarding.

tunneling protocol

Network protocol that encapsulates one protocol or session inside another. When protocol A is encapsulated within protocol B, A treats B as though it were a data-link layer. Tunneling can be used to transport a network protocol through a network that would not otherwise support it. It is encapsulated for delivery only; no policies can be applied. Tunneling can also be used to provide various types of VPN functionality such as private addressing.

twice NAT

Both the source and destination addresses are subject to translation as packets traverse the NAT router in either direction. See also NAT.

two-rate rate-limit profile

Enables the user to build tiered rate-limit services and to specify different treatments for packets at different rates. See also one-rate rate-limit profile, rate-limit profile.

two-rate TCM

trTCM. Two-rate TCM polices traffic according to the color classification (loss priority) of each packet. Traffic policing is based on two rates: the committed information rate (CIR) and the peak information rate (PIR). Two-rate TCM is defined in RFC 2698, A Two Rate Three Color Marker. See also CIR, PIR.

TX

Communications abbreviation for transmit; the corresponding abbreviation for receive is TRX.

TX Matrix platform

Routing platform that provides the centralized switching fabric of the routing matrix.

type of service

ToS. Method of handling traffic using information extracted from the fields in the ToS byte to differentiate packet flows.

type-length-value

TLV. An element inside a data communications protocol used to encode optional information. These fields are used as follows:

- Type—A 1-4 byte numeric code that indicates the kind of field that this part of the message represents.
- Length—A 1-4 byte field that denotes the size of the value field, typically in bytes.
- Value—A variable-sized set of bytes that contains the data for this part of the message.

### U

U

Unit. Standard of measurement for rack-mounted equipment (a U equals 1.75 in., or 4.44 cm).

U interface

User reference point interface. A single-pair connection between the local ISDN provider and the customer premises equipment.

U-Boot

Computer software that serves as a bootstrap loader in many embedded systems.

UBR

unspecified bit rate. ATM service category that does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. Specifically, UBR does not define a per-connection negotiated bandwidth.

UDP

User Datagram Protocol. In TCP/IP, a connectionless transport layer protocol that exchanges datagrams without acknowledgments or guaranteed delivery, requiring that error processing and retransmission be handled by other protocols.

UDP flood

Denial-of-service attack using multiple UDP packets, sent to slow the target system to the point that it can no longer handle valid connections. You can configure the security device with a threshold to invoke UDP flood attack protection. When UDP packet flow exceeds this threshold, the device records the UDP flood attack as a statistic.

UDP scan

Attack method that attempts to connect to every UDP port on a single machine, to provide attackers with information about your network configuration.

UHP

ultimate hop popping. When the egress router advertises the explicit null label or a non-null label to its upstream neighbor. This advertisement, performed by the signaling protocol (either LDP or RSVP-TE) ensures that all MPLS packets traversing the LSP to the egress router include a label. See also PHP.

UI

user interface. Program that controls a display for the user (usually on a computer monitor) and that allows the user to interact with the system. See also PHP.

ultimate hop popping

UHP. When the egress router advertises the explicit null label or a non-null label to its upstream neighbor. This advertisement, performed by the signaling protocol (either LDP or RSVP-TE) ensures that all MPLS packets traversing the LSP to the egress router include a label. See also PHP.

UME

UNI management entity. Code residing in the ATM devices at each end of a UNI (user-to-network interface) circuit that functions as an SNMP agent, maintaining network and connection information specified in a MIB.

UMTS

universal mobile telecommunications system. Provides third-generation (3G), packet-based transmission of text, digitized voice, video, and multimedia, at data rates up to 2 Mbps.

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network

UTRAN. WCDMA radio network in UMTS.

UNC

Unified National Coarse. Standard used to specify the thread in screws and bolts.

unchannelized interface

Interface that is not fragmented into channels.

UNI

user-to-network interface. ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the interface between a router or an ATM switch located in a private network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.

UNI management entity

UME. Code residing in the ATM devices at each end of a UNI (user-to-network interface) circuit that functions as an SNMP agent, maintaining network and connection information specified in a MIB.

unicast

Operation of sending network traffic from one network node to another individual network node.

unicast address

IPv4 and IPv6 user-to-user addressing protocol used to send a datagram to a single recipient.

Unified National Coarse

UNC. Standard used to specify the thread in screws and bolts.

uniform model

Tunneling method that renders MPLS transparent to the differentiated services operation. From the diff-serv perspective, it is as if MPLS is not used. In the uniform model, if traffic conditioning is applied somewhere along the LSP, the EXP bits of the inner header must be changed at the egress when the inner header becomes the outer header (because of the pop of the outer label). See also pipe (and short-pipe) model.

Uniform Resource Identifier

URI. Compact string of characters for identifying an abstract or physical resource. Details can be found in RFC 2396 Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI): Generic Syntax.

Uniform Resource Locator

URL. Standard method of specifying the location of an available electronic resource. Also known as a location or address, a URL specifies the location of files on servers. A general URL has the syntax protocol://address. For example, http://www.example.com/index.html specifies that the protocol is http and the address is www.example.com/index.html. Most commonly used as a compact string representation for a resource available over the Internet, as defined in RFC 1738, Uniform Resource Locators (URL). See also Uniform Resource Identifier.

uninterruptible power supply

UPS. Device that sits between a power supply and a router or other device and prevents power-source events, such as outages and surges, from affecting or damaging the device.

Unit

U. Standard of measurement for rack-mounted equipment (a U equals 1.75 in., or 4.44 cm).

unit

Junos OS syntax that represents the logical properties of an interface.

universal mobile telecommunications system

UMTS. Provides third-generation (3G), packet-based transmission of text, digitized voice, video, and multimedia, at data rates up to 2 Mbps.

Universal Unique Identifier

UUID. 128-bit number assigned to any object within a distributed computing environment (DCE) cell which is guaranteed to be unique.

unnumbered interface

Logical interface that is configured without an IP address.

unspecified bit rate

UBR.. ATM service category that does not specify traffic-related service guarantees. Specifically, UBR does not define a per-connection negotiated bandwidth.

untrust zone

One of two predefined zones (trust, untrust) that enables packets to be seen by devices external to your current domain.

untrusted network

External network, such as the Internet. See also trusted network.

UOL

Uniform Object Locator. An intuitive, general-purpose identifier that is hierarchical and readable. Details can be found in Internet Draft draft-boynton-uol-00, Uniform Object Locator—UOL.

Update message

BGP message that advertises path attributes and routing knowledge to an established neighbor.

update timer

Used in a distance-vector protocol to advertise routes to a neighbor on a regular basis.

UPS

uninterruptible power supply. Device that sits between a power supply and a router or other device and prevents power-source events, such as outages and surges, from affecting or damaging the device.

upto

Junos OS routing policy match type representing all routes that share the same most-significant bits and whose prefix length is smaller than the supplied subnet in the route filter.

URI

Uniform Resource Identifier. Compact string of characters for identifying an abstract or physical resource. Details can be found in RFC 2396 Uniform Resource Identifiers (URI): Generic Syntax.

URL

Uniform Resource Locator. Standard method of specifying the location of an available electronic resource. Also known as a location or address, a URL specifies the location of files on servers. A general URL has the syntax protocol://address. For example, http://www.example.com/index.html specifies that the protocol is http and the address is www.example.com/index.html. Most commonly used as a compact string representation for a resource available over the Internet, as defined in RFC 1738, Uniform Resource Locators (URL). See also Uniform Resource Identifier.

user

Person using the network that your security devices are protecting. NSM supports two types of users: local users and external users.

User Datagram Protocol

UDP. In TCP/IP, a connectionless transport layer protocol that exchanges datagrams without acknowledgments or guaranteed delivery, requiring that error processing and retransmission be handled by other protocols.

User Exec mode

CLI mode you are in after you log in to the system. By default, the commands you can execute from User Exec mode provide only user-level access. The User Exec commands allow you to perform such functions as changing terminal settings on a temporary basis, performing ping and trace commands, displaying system information, and accessing Global Configuration mode. See also Global Configuration mode, Privileged Exec mode, privileged level.

user interface

UI. Program that controls a display for the user (usually on a computer monitor) and that allows the user to interact with the system. See also PHP.

user level

Access level in the CLI of E Series routers that enables you to view router status. This level restricts you to User Exec mode.

user object

User objects represent the users of your managed devices. You can include user objects or groups in security policies or VPNs to permit or deny access to individuals or groups.

user-based security model

USM. Method for providing SNMP message-level security using authentication protocols and privacy protocols..

user-to-network interface

UNI. ATM Forum specification that defines an interoperability standard for the interface between a router or an ATM switch located in a private network and the ATM switches located within the public carrier networks. Also used to describe similar connections in Frame Relay networks.

USM

user-based security model. Method for providing SNMP message-level security using authentication protocols and privacy protocols.

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time. Historically referred to as Greenwich mean time (GMT), a high-precision atomic time standard that tracks Universal Time (UT) and is the basis for legal civil time all over the Earth. Time zones around the world are expressed as positive and negative offsets from UTC.

UTRAN

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network. WCDMA radio network in UMTS.

### V

V.35 interface

Provides synchronous operation between data communication equipment (DCE) and data terminal equipment (DTE) for data communication over the telephone network.

vapor corrosion inhibitor

VCI. Small cylinder packed with the router that prevents corrosion of the chassis and components during shipment.

variable bit rate

VBR. ATM service category that supports variable bit rate data traffic with average and peak traffic parameters. VBR traffic adds the ability to statistically oversubscribe user traffic. The VBR service category has two subcategories: VBR-NRT and VBR-RT.

VBR

variable bit rate. ATM service category that supports variable bit rate data traffic with average and peak traffic parameters. VBR traffic adds the ability to statistically oversubscribe user traffic. The VBR service category has two subcategories: VBR-NRT and VBR-RT.

VBR-NRT

variable bit rate, non-real time. Subcategory of the VBR service category that is used for bursty or other non-time-sensitive transmissions. VBR-NRT guarantees minimum delay and cell loss.

VBR-RT

variable bit rate, real time. Subcategory of the VBR service category that is used for time-sensitive connections such as video or voice. VBR-NRT guarantees minimum delay and cell loss.

VC

virtual circuit.

- Software-defined logical connection between two network devices that is not a dedicated connection but acts as though it is. It can be either permanent (PVC) or switched (SVC). VCs are used in ATM, Frame Relay, and X.25. See also VPI, VCI, PVC, SVC.
- In IDP Series, corresponds with a physical interface.

VCC

virtual channel connection. Uses all the addressing bits of a cell header to move traffic from one link to another. The VCC is formed by joining a series of virtual channels, which are logical circuits uniquely identified for each link of the network.

VCC cell relay encapsulation

Method for the router to emulate ATM switch behavior by forwarding individual ATM cells over an MPLS pseudowire (also referred to as an MPLS tunnel) created between two ATM VCCs, or as part of a local ATM passthrough connection between two ATM 1483 subinterfaces on the same router.

VCD

virtual circuit descriptor. Unique number that identifies a virtual circuit.

VCI

- vapor corrosion inhibitor. Small cylinder packed with the router that prevents corrosion of the chassis and components during shipment.
- virtual circuit (channel) identifier. 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell that indicates the particular virtual circuit the cell takes through a virtual path. Also called a logical interface. See also VPI.

VDSL

very-high-bit-rate digital subscriber line. DSL technology providing faster data transmission over short distances, usually between 1000 and 4500 feet (300 and 1500 meters), of twisted pair copper wire. The shorter the distance, the faster the connection rate.

VDSL2

Enhancement to ITU-T G.993.1 standard VDSL that permits the transmission of asymmetric and symmetric (full duplex) aggregate data at a faster rate.

VE router

VPLS edge device. Router that is analogous to a provider edge (PE) router in a BGP/MPLS VPN configuration, and performs similar functions.

very-high-bit-rate digital subscriber line

VDSL. DSL technology providing faster data transmission over short distances, usually between 1000 and 4500 feet (300 and 1500 meters), of twisted pair copper wire. The shorter the distance, the faster the connection rate.

video on demand

VOD. Unicast streaming video offering by service providers that enables the reception of an isolated video session per user with rewind, pause, and similar VCR-like capabilities.

video services router

VSR. Router used in a video services network to route video streams between an access network and a metro or core network. The VSR is any M Series or MX Series router that supports the video routing package provided with Junos OS Release 8.3 or later.

virtual channel

Enables queuing, packet scheduling, and accounting rules to be applied to one or more logical interfaces. See also virtual channel group.

virtual channel connection

VCC. Uses all the addressing bits of a cell header to move traffic from one link to another. The VCC is formed by joining a series of virtual channels, which are logical circuits uniquely identified for each link of the network.

virtual channel group

Combines virtual channels into a group and then applies the group to one or more logical interfaces. See also virtual channel.

virtual channel identifier, virtual circuit identifier

VCI. 16-bit field in the header of an ATM cell that indicates the particular virtual circuit the cell takes through a virtual path. Also called a logical interface. See also VPI.

virtual chassis

Stacked EX Series devices functioning as one logical EX Series switch.

virtual circuit descriptor

VCD. Unique number that identifies a virtual circuit.

virtual circuit, virtual connection

VC

- Software-defined logical connection between two network devices that is not a dedicated connection but acts as though it is. It can be either permanent (PVC) or switched (SVC). VCs are used in ATM, Frame Relay, and X.25. See also VPI, VCI, PVC, SVC.
- In IDP Series, corresponds with a physical interface.

virtual host

Capability of some computers to respond to different IP addresses and offer different services, each appearing to be a distinct host on a distinct machine. A single machine can supply several virtual hosts.

virtual IP address

VIP address maps traffic received at one IP address to another address based on the destination port number in the packet header.

virtual link

In OSPF, link created between two routers that are part of the backbone but are not physically contiguous.

virtual local area network

VLAN. Logical group of network devices that appear to be on the same LAN, regardless of their physical location. VLANs are configured with management software, and are extremely flexible because they are based on logical, rather than physical, connections. VLANs allow network administrators to resegment their networks without physically rearranging the devices or network connections. VLANs span one or more ports on multiple devices. By default, each VLAN maintains its own Layer 2 forwarding database containing MAC addresses learned from packets received on ports belonging to the VLAN. See also bridge domain.

virtual loopback tunnel interface

VT. Virtual interface that loops packets back to the Packet Forwarding Engine for further processing, such as looking up a route in a VRF routing table or looking up an Ethernet MAC address. A virtual loopback tunnel interface can be associated with a variety of MPLS- and VPN-related applications, including VRF routing instances, VPLS routing instances, and point-to-multipoint LSPs.

virtual path

VP. Combination of multiple virtual circuits between two devices in an ATM network.

virtual path connection

VPC. A concatenation of VPIs between Virtual Path Terminators (VPTs). VPCs are unidirectional.

virtual path identifier

VPI. 8-bit field in the header of an ATM cell that indicates the virtual path the cell takes. See also VCI.

Virtual Player

Server-side player provided by Media Flow Controller to assist in media viewing.

virtual private LAN service

VPLS. Ethernet-based multipoint-to-multipoint Layer 2 VPN service used for interconnecting multiple Ethernet LANs across an MPLS backbone. VPLS is specified in the IETF draft Virtual Private LAN Service.

virtual private network

VPN. Uses a public TCP/IP network, typically the Internet, while maintaining privacy with a tunneling protocol, encryption, and security procedures. See also tunneling protocol.

virtual router

VR.

- Multiple distinct logical routers within a single router, which enables service providers to configure multiple, separate, secure routers within a single chassis. Each virtual router has its own separate set of IP interfaces, forwarding table, and instances of routing protocols. Applications for this function include the creation of individual routers dedicated to wholesale customers, corporate virtual private network (VPN) users, or a specific traffic type.
- In IDP Series, a pair of virtual circuits, providing a physical path into and out of the appliance.

virtual router identifier

VRID. Number in the range 1—255 that identifies a VRRP instance.

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol

VRRP. On Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, enables you to configure virtual default routers.

virtual routing and forwarding instance

VRF. Also known as a virtual router and forwarding instance. A VRF exists within the context of a VR. VRFs are used to create VPNs. In this case, the VRF forwarding table includes only routes to sites that have at least one VPN in common with the site that is associated with the VRF. The router looks up a packet’s destination in the VRF associated with the interface on which the packet is received. In general, any application that can be enabled in a VR can be enabled in a VRF.

virtual security device

VSD. Single logical device comprised of a set of physical security devices.

virtual security interface

VSI. Logical entity at Layer 3 that is linked to multiple Layer 2 physical interfaces in a VSD group. The VSI binds to the physical interface of the device acting as master of the VSD group. The VSI shifts to the physical interface of another device in the VSD group if there is a failover and it becomes the new master.

virtual switch

Routing instance that can contain one or more bridge domains.

VLAN

virtual local area network. Logical group of network devices that appear to be on the same LAN, regardless of their physical location. VLANs are configured with management software, and are extremely flexible because they are based on logical, rather than physical, connections. VLANs allow network administrators to resegment their networks without physically rearranging the devices or network connections. VLANs span one or more ports on multiple devices. By default, each VLAN maintains its own Layer 2 forwarding database containing MAC addresses learned from packets received on ports belonging to the VLAN. See also bridge domain.

VLAN-tagged frame

Tagged frame whose tag header carries both VLAN identification and priority information.

VOD

video on demand. Unicast streaming video offering by service providers that enables the reception of an isolated video session per user with rewind, pause, and similar VCR-like capabilities.

Voice over Internet Protocol

VoIP. Enables people to use the Internet as the transmission medium for telephone calls by sending voice data in packets using the Internet Protocol instead of over traditional telephony circuits.

VoIP

Voice over Internet Protocol. Enables people to use the Internet as the transmission medium for telephone calls by sending voice data in packets using the Internet Protocol instead of over traditional telephony circuits.

VP

virtual path. Combination of multiple virtual circuits between two devices in an ATM network.

VP tunneling

Tunneling that enables traffic shaping to be applied to the aggregation of all VCs within a single virtual path. Thus, VP tunnels can be used to ensure that the total traffic transmitted on a VP does not exceed the specified peak cell rate.

VPC

virtual path connection. A concatenation of VPIs between Virtual Path Terminators (VPTs). VPCs are unidirectional.

VPI

virtual path identifier. 8-bit field in the header of an ATM cell that indicates the virtual path the cell takes. See also VCI.

VPLS

virtual private LAN service. Ethernet-based multipoint-to-multipoint Layer 2 VPN service used for interconnecting multiple Ethernet LANs across an MPLS backbone. VPLS is specified in the IETF draft Virtual Private LAN Service.

VPLS domain

Set of VPLS edge routers running VPLS instances that participate in that domain. Typically associated with customers who want to use Ethernet-based Layer 2 VPNs to connect geographically dispersed sites in their organization across an MPLS-based service provider core, also known as an MPLS backbone. To provide signaling for VPLS, BGP builds a full mesh of label-switched paths (LSPs) among all of the VPLS instances on each of the VPLS edge routers participating in a particular VPLS domain.

VPLS edge device

VE router. Router that is analogous to a provider edge (PE) router in a BGP/MPLS VPN configuration, and performs similar functions.

VPLS instance

New or existing bridge group that has additional VPLS attributes configured. A single VPLS instance is analogous to a distributed learning bridge (also known as a bridge group) used for transparent bridging, and performs similar functions. A bridge group is a collection of bridge interfaces stacked on Ethernet Layer 2 interfaces to form a broadcast domain. Similarly, a VPLS instance is a collection of network interfaces stacked on Ethernet Layer 2 interfaces that transmits packets between the router, or VE device, and the CE device located at the edge of the customer’s network. In addition, the VPLS virtual core interface enables a VPLS instance to forward traffic not only between bridge interfaces, like a bridge group, but also between a bridge (network) interface and the service provider core.

VPN

virtual private network. Uses a public TCP/IP network, typically the Internet, while maintaining privacy with a tunneling protocol, encryption, and security procedures. See also tunneling protocol.

VR

virtual router.

- Multiple distinct logical routers within a single router, which enables service providers to configure multiple, separate, secure routers within a single chassis. Each virtual router has its own separate set of IP interfaces, forwarding table, and instances of routing protocols. Applications for this function include the creation of individual routers dedicated to wholesale customers, corporate virtual private network (VPN) users, or a specific traffic type.
- In IDP Series, a pair of virtual circuits, providing a physical path into and out of the appliance.

VRF table

Routing instance table that stores VRF routing information. See also VRF instance.

VRF, VRF instance

VPN routing and forwarding instance. Also known as virtual router and forwarding instance. A VRF exists within the context of a VR, and is used to create a VPN, for which the VRF forwarding table includes only routes to sites that have at least one VPN in common with the site that is associated with the VRF. The router looks up a packet’s destination in the VRF associated with the interface on which the packet is received. In general, any application that can be enabled in a VR can be enabled in a VRF. A VRF instance for a Layer 3 VPN implementation consists of one or more routing tables, a derived forwarding table, a set of interfaces that use the forwarding table, and a set of policies and routing protocols that determine what goes into the forwarding table.

VRID

virtual router identifier. Number in the range 1—255 that identifies a VRRP instance.

VRRP

Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol. On Fast Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, enables you to configure virtual default routers.

VRRP router

Router that is running VRRP. It might participate in one or more virtual router IDs (VRIDs).

VSD

virtual security device. Single logical device comprised of a set of physical security devices.

VSI

virtual security interface. Logical entity at Layer 3 that is linked to multiple Layer 2 physical interfaces in a VSD group. The VSI binds to the physical interface of the device acting as master of the VSD group. The VSI shifts to the physical interface of another device in the VSD group if there is a failover and it becomes the new master.

VSR

video services router. Router used in a video services network to rout video streams between an access network and a metro or core network. The VSR is any M Series or MX Series router that supports the video routing package provided with Junos OS Release 8.3 or later.

VT

virtual loopback tunnel interface. VT interface that loops packets back to the Packet Forwarding Engine for further processing, such as looking up a route in a VRF routing table or looking up an Ethernet MAC address. A virtual loopback tunnel interface can be associated with a variety of MPLS and VPN-related applications, including VRF routing instances, VPLS routing instances, and point-to-multipoint LSPs.

### W

WAN PHY

Wide Area Network Physical Layer Device. Allows 10-Gigabit Ethernet wide area links to use fiber-optic cables and other devices intended for SONET/SDH. See also LAN PHY and PHY.

WAP

Wireless Application Protocol. Enables mobile users to access the Internet in a limited fashion if WAP is supported and enabled on the mobile device, server, and wireless network. WAP users can send and receive e-mail and access Web sites in text format only (WAP does not support graphics).

warm restart

Result of a redundant, standby SRP module becoming active when high availability (HA) is configured. The line modules remain enabled, forwarding remains active, and the newly active SRP module recovers dynamic state information from mirrored storage. To avoid route flapping during an SRP warm restart,BGP and other routing protocols typically use graceful restart. See also cold restart, graceful restart.

warm standby

Method that enables one backup Adaptive Services (AS) PIC to support multiple active AS PICs, without providing guaranteed recovery times.

wavelength-division multiplexing

WDM. Technique for transmitting a mix of voice, data, and video over various wavelengths (colors) of light.

WCDMA

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access. Radio interface technology used in most third-generation (3G) systems.

WDM

wavelength-division multiplexing. Technique for transmitting a mix of voice, data, and video over various wavelengths (colors) of light.

Web filtering

Core part of network security that prevents access to unauthorized Web sites. Protects the network from malware and other related threats.

weight

- In BGP, a preference for a particular route over other routes to a destination. The higher the assigned weight, the more preferred the route. By default, the route weight on E Series routers is 32768 for paths originated by the router, and 0 for other paths.
- In QoS, a data unit that specifies the relative weight for queues in the traffic class.

weighted random early detection

WRED. Congestion avoidance technique that signals end-to-end protocols such as TCP that the router is becoming congested along a particular egress path. The intent is to trigger TCP congestion avoidance in a random set of TCP flows before congestion becomes severe and causes tail dropping on a large number of flows.

weighted round-robin

WRR. Scheme used to decide the queue from which the next packet should be transmitted.

WEP

Wired Equivalent Privacy. Protocol for encrypting data exchanged on wireless networks. Defined in the original IEEE 802.11 standard.

Wi-Fi Protected Access

WPA/WPA2. Successor to WEP defined in the IEEE 802.11i standard. See also WEP.

Wide Area Network Physical Layer Device

WAN PHY. Allows 10-Gigabit Ethernet wide area links to use fiber-optic cables and other devices intended for SONET/SDH. See also LAN PHY and PHY.

Wideband Code Division Multiple Access

WCDMA. Radio interface technology used in most third-generation (3G) systems.

Windows Internet Name Service

WINS. Windows name resolution service for network basic input/output system (NetBIOS) names. WINS is used by hosts running NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT) to register NetBIOS names and resolve NetBIOS names to Internet Protocol (IP) addresses.

WINS

Windows Internet Name Service. Windows name resolution service for network basic input/output system (NetBIOS) names. WINS is used by hosts running NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT) to register NetBIOS names and resolve NetBIOS names to Internet Protocol (IP) addresses.

Wired Equivalent Privacy (Protocol)

WEP. Encrypts data exchanged on wireless networks. Defined in the original IEEE 802.11 standard.

Wireless Application Protocol

WAP. Enables mobile users to access the Internet in a limited fashion if WAP is supported and enabled on the mobile device, server, and wireless network. WAP users can send and receive e-mail and access Web sites in text format only (WAP does not support graphics).

wireless local area network

WLAN. Type of LAN in which mobile users can connect to the network through a wireless (radio) connection. The IEEE 802.11 standard specifies the technologies for wireless LANs, including the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption algorithm.

WLAN

wireless local area network. Type of LAN in which mobile users can connect to the network through a wireless (radio) connection. The IEEE 802.11 standard specifies the technologies for wireless LANs, including the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) encryption algorithm.

working interface

Provides the primary connection on modules that have APS/MSP or that otherwise enable redundancy.

WPA/WPA2

Wi-Fi Protected Access. Successor to WEP defined in the IEEE 802.11i standard. See also WEP.

WRED

weighted random early detection. Congestion avoidance technique that signals end-to-end protocols such as TCP that the router is becoming congested along a particular egress path. The intent is to trigger TCP congestion avoidance in a random set of TCP flows before congestion becomes severe and causes tail dropping on a large number of flows.

WRR

weighted round-robin. Scheme used to decide the queue from which the next packet should be transmitted.

### X

X.21 interface

ITU serial line protocol standard, used primarily in the USA and Japan, for differential communications. Provides synchronous operation between data communication equipment and data terminal equipment on public data networks.

XDR

External Data Representation Standard. Standard for the description and encoding of data. XDR can be used to transfer data between computers.

xDSL

Combined term used to refer to ADSL, HDSL, SDSL, and VDSL.

XENPAK Multisource Agreement

Standard that defines a type of pluggable fiber-optic transceiver module that is compatible with the 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) standard MSA. See also MSA

XENPAK, XENPAK module

A pluggable fiber-optic transceiver module that is compatible with the 10-Gigabit Ethernet (10 GbE) standard MSA. XENPAK modules are hot-insertable and hot-removable. See also MSA.

XENPAK-SR 10BASE-SR XENPAK

Media type that supports a link length of 26 meters on standard Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) grade multimode fiber (MMF). Up to 300-meter link lengths are possible with 2000 MHz/km MMF (OM3).

XENPAK-ZR 10GBASE-ZR XENPAK

Media type used for long-reach, single-mode (80–120 km) 10-Gigabit Ethernet metro applications.

XFP

10-gigabit small form-factor pluggable transceiver. Provides support for fiber-optic cables. XFPs are hot-insertable and hot-removable. See also SFP.

XML

Extensible Markup Language. Used for defining a set of markers, called tags, that define the function and hierarchical relationships of the parts of a document or data set.

XML Path Language

Standard used in XSLT to specify and locate elements in the input document’s XML hierarchy. XPath is fully described in the W3C specification at http://w3c.org/TR/xpath . Also called XPath.

XML schema

Definition of the elements and structure of one or more Extensible Markup Language (XML) documents. Similar to a document type definition (DTD), but with additional information and written in XML.

XOR

exclusive or. Logical operator (exclusive disjunction) in which the operation yields the result of true when one, and only one, of its operands is true.

XPath

Standard used in XSLT to specify and locate elements in the input document’s XML hierarchy. XPath is fully described in the W3C specification at http://w3c.org/TR/xpath . Also called XML Path Language.

XPIM

SRX mid-range services gateway network interface card (NIC) that can only be installed in the 20-gigabit GPIM slots (slots 2 and 6 on the front panel).

- The 24-port GigE XPIM (standard or Power over Ethernet versions) is a double-high, double-wide LAN switch Gigabit-Backplane Physical Interface Module (GPIM) that uses two standard slots vertically and two standard slots horizontally and installs in slots 1, 2, 3, and 4 (connecting in the 20G connector in slot 2) or slots 5, 6, 7, and 8 (connecting in the 20G connector in slot 6).
- The 16-port GigE XPIM (standard or Power over Ethernet versions) is a double-high LAN switch GPIM that uses two standard slots vertically and installs in slots 2 and 4 (connecting in the 20G connector in slot 2) or slots 6 and 8 (connecting in the 20G connector in slot 6).

XSLT

Extensible Stylesheet Language for Transformations. Standard for processing XML data developed by the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). XSLT performs XML-to-XML transformations, turning an input XML hierarchy into an output XML hierarchy. The XSLT specification is on the W3C Web site at http://www.w3c.org/TR/xslt .

### Z

zeroize

Process of removing all sensitive information, such as cryptographic keys and user passwords, from a router running Junos-FIPS.